CAM2 Q Users Manual Version 1.5

08M53E00_CAM2_Q.
book Page 1 Wednesday, January 12, 2011 9:38 AM
VERSION 1.5
NOVEMBER 2010
08M53E00_CAM2_Q.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 12, 2011 9:38 AM
©FARO Technologies Inc., 2008-2010. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, or transmitted in any form or by
any means without written permission of FARO Technologies, Inc.
FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THE FAROARM, FARO LASER
TRACKER AND ANY MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS
AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN “AS-IS” BASIS.
IN NO EVENT SHALL FARO TECHNOLOGIES INC. BE LIABLE TO
ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING
OUT OF THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE FAROARM, FARO LASER
TRACKER OR ITS MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY
TO FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF
ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE
MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN.
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL IS SUBJECT TO
CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE AND DOES NOT REPRESENT A
COMMITMENT ON THE PART OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES INC.
ACCEPTANCE OF THIS DOCUMENT BY THE CUSTOMER
CONSTITUTES ACKNOWLEDGMENT THAT IF ANY INCONSISTENCY
EXISTS BETWEEN THE ENGLISH AND NON-ENGLISH VERSIONS, THE
ENGLISH VERSION TAKES PRECEDENCE.
® ®
FaroArm and CAM2 are registered trademarks of FARO Technologies Inc.
Windows®, Vista® and Excel® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Inc.
®
Acrobat is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Inc.
®
CATIA is a registered trademark of Dassault Systemes.
Unigraphics®, Parasolid® and Solid Edge® are registered trademarks of Siemens Product Lifecycle
Management Software Inc.
SolidWorks® is a registered trademark of Dassault Systèmes SolidWorks Corp.
® ® ® ®
iPhone , iPod , iPad , iTunes are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
FARO Technologies Inc. Internal Control File Locations:

F:\CONTROL\REFERENC\08PRODUC\ENGLISH\Prdpub53\08m53e00 - CAM2 Q - November 2010.pdf
F:\CONTROL\RECORDS\05MANUFA\PARTSPEC\10650-001.pdf
CAM2® Q Version 1.5
November 2010
Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction to CAM2® Q
System Requirements ...................................................... 3
Installing CAM2 Q ............................................................ 4
Licensing CAM2 Q........................................................... 5
Directory and File Locations........................................... 6
Getting Started ................................................................ 6
Starting CAM2 Q.............................................................................. 6
User Profiles ....................................................................................... 7
Unit of Measure and Coordinate System ..................................... 8
Screen Layout ................................................................................ 10
Menus ............................................................................. 11
Toolbars........................................................................... 12
Toolbar Help ................................................................................... 12
Default Toolbars............................................................................. 12
Control Panels................................................................ 15
Messages ........................................................................................ 17
Features .......................................................................................... 17
Feature Creator ............................................................................. 18
QuickTools ...................................................................................... 19
Readings......................................................................................... 19
Feature Information....................................................................... 20
Controlling the View...................................................... 20
Features .......................................................................... 21
Device-controlled Mouse............................................. 21
Help ................................................................................. 21
Electronic Manual ......................................................... 23
What is New ................................................................... 23
Chapter 2: File Menu

New ................................................................................. 29
Open............................................................................... 29
Save ................................................................................ 29
Save As ........................................................................... 30
Import.............................................................................. 30
i
November 2010
CAD................................................................................................. 30
Points ............................................................................................... 30
Alignment ....................................................................................... 31
Tolerance Preference ................................................................... 31
Tube ................................................................................................ 31
QuickTools ...................................................................................... 31
Export .............................................................................. 31
Points ............................................................................................... 31
Measurement Data....................................................................... 32
CAD to XGL .................................................................................... 32
Picture to File.................................................................................. 33
Tolerance Preference ................................................................... 33
Tube ................................................................................................ 33
Translate CAD Files ........................................................ 33
Send Document ............................................................ 34
Exit ................................................................................... 35
Chapter 3: Edit Menu

Repeat ............................................................................ 37
Clear All Readings ......................................................... 37
Flip Vector ...................................................................... 37
Feature Visibility ............................................................. 38
GD&T............................................................................... 38
Copy Tolerances ........................................................... 38
Paste Tolerances............................................................ 38
Preferences .................................................................... 38
File ................................................................................................... 39
Display............................................................................................. 40
Panels.............................................................................................. 46
Measurement................................................................................. 47
CAD................................................................................................. 54
Tolerance........................................................................................ 56
Report ............................................................................................. 58
Document Header Information ................................... 59
User Profiles..................................................................... 60
Properties........................................................................ 61
CAD Part Properties....................................................... 61
ii
November 2010
Chapter 4: View Menu

Status Bar ........................................................................ 63
Toolbars........................................................................... 63
Customize ....................................................................................... 64
Commands Tab...........................................................................64
Toolbars Tab .................................................................................64
Keyboard Tab ..............................................................................65
Menu Tab .....................................................................................65
Options Tab..................................................................................66
Panels.............................................................................. 66
Full Screen ...................................................................... 70
Show Feature Window .................................................. 70
Feature Readings .......................................................... 71
Feature Whiskers ............................................................ 71
Decrease ........................................................................................ 72
Increase .......................................................................................... 72
Whiskers........................................................................................... 72
Nominal Whiskers ........................................................................... 72
Pan .................................................................................. 73
Left................................................................................................... 73
Right ................................................................................................ 73
Up .................................................................................................... 73
Down............................................................................................... 73
Zoom ............................................................................... 73
Zoom All .......................................................................................... 74
Zoom In ........................................................................................... 74
Zoom Out........................................................................................ 74
Zoom To Window ........................................................................... 74
Preset Views ................................................................... 75
+X/-X View ...................................................................................... 75
+Y/-Y View ...................................................................................... 75
+Z/-Z View ....................................................................................... 75
Isometric SE..................................................................................... 75
Isometric SW ................................................................................... 76
Isometric NE.................................................................................... 76
Isometric NW .................................................................................. 76
Reset View...................................................................... 76
Shaded View.................................................................. 76
iii
November 2010
Wireframe View ............................................................. 77

Shaded + Wireframe View ........................................... 77
Cycle Shading ............................................................... 77
Grid.................................................................................. 77
Labels .............................................................................. 77
Export to Image ............................................................. 78
Chapter 5: Measure Menu

Measure/Template Mode ............................................ 79
Measure on CAD Side................................................... 80
Measure Properties........................................................ 80
Laser Probe Measurement ........................................... 83
Automatic Feature Recognition .................................. 84
Measurement Window ................................................. 85
Features Panel ............................................................... 88
Layers .............................................................................. 92
Creating a New Layer................................................................... 92
Editing a Layer ............................................................................... 93
Adding Features To A Layer ......................................................... 93
Viewing Features On A Layer....................................................... 93
Deleting a Layer ............................................................................ 93
Labels .............................................................................. 94
Readings......................................................................... 95
Nominals and Tolerances ............................................. 96
Measuring a Plane ...................................................... 101
Measuring a 2D Line.................................................... 102
Measuring a Point........................................................ 103
Measuring an Inspect Surface Point ......................... 104
Measuring a Circle ...................................................... 105
Measuring a Sphere .................................................... 106
Measuring a Cylinder .................................................. 107
Measuring a Torus........................................................ 108
Measuring a Tube........................................................ 109
Measuring a Cone ...................................................... 111
Measuring a Round Slot.............................................. 112
Measuring a Rectangular Slot.................................... 113
iv
November 2010
Measuring an Ellipse.................................................... 114

Measuring a 3D Line.................................................... 115
Measuring a Planar Point............................................ 116
Measuring a Home In Point ........................................ 116
Measuring a High/Low Point ...................................... 119
Measuring a Surface Point ......................................... 120
Measuring a Surface Edge Point ............................... 121
Measuring a Vector Point........................................... 121
Measuring a Compensate Axis Point ........................ 122
Measuring a Point Cloud ............................................ 123
Measuring a Polyline ................................................... 124
Measuring a Polyline Group ....................................... 125
Measuring a Single Point Circle ................................. 128
Inspect Surface............................................................ 129
Add Readings .............................................................. 129
Measure All................................................................... 130
Remeasure ................................................................... 130
Chapter 6: Key-In Menu

Plane ............................................................................. 131
Line ................................................................................ 131
Point .............................................................................. 132
Vector Point ................................................................. 132
Circle............................................................................. 133
Sphere........................................................................... 133
Cylinder......................................................................... 133
Torus .............................................................................. 134
Tube .............................................................................. 134
Cone ............................................................................. 135
Round Slot .................................................................... 137
Rectangular Slot .......................................................... 138
Ellipse............................................................................. 138
Coordinate System...................................................... 139
v
November 2010
Chapter 7: Pick From CAD Menu

Plane ............................................................................. 141
Line ................................................................................ 141
Point .............................................................................. 142
Vector Point ................................................................. 142
Circle............................................................................. 142
Sphere........................................................................... 143
Cylinder......................................................................... 143
Torus .............................................................................. 143
Cone ............................................................................. 144
Round Slot .................................................................... 144
Rectangular Slot .......................................................... 144
Ellipse............................................................................. 145
Chapter 8: Construct Menu

Construct Plane ........................................................... 147
Construct Plane: By 3 Points and 3 Offsets ............................... 148
Construct Plane: By Best Fit ........................................................ 148
Construct Plane: By Bisection..................................................... 149
Construct Plane: By Offset.......................................................... 149
Construct Plane: Perpendicular................................................. 150
Construct Line .............................................................. 151
Construct Line: By Best Fit ........................................................... 151
Construct Line: By Axis Best Fit.................................................... 152
Construct Line: By Bisection........................................................ 152
Construct Line: By Intersection of Two Planes .......................... 153
Construct Line: By Offset............................................................. 154
Construct Line: By Projection...................................................... 154
Construct Line: Parallel ............................................................... 155
Construct Line: Perpendicular.................................................... 156
Construct Point ............................................................ 157
Construct Point: By Best Fit.......................................................... 157
Construct Point: By Bisection ...................................................... 157
Construct Point: By Intersection ................................................. 158
Construct Point: By Offset ........................................................... 160
Construct Point: By Projection .................................................... 161
vi
November 2010
Construct Circle........................................................... 162

Construct Circle: By Best Fit ........................................................ 162
Construct Circle: By Intersection of a Plane and a Feature... 163
Construct Circle: By Offset ......................................................... 164
Construct Circle: By Coaxial Intersection ................................. 164
Construct Circle: From Cone ..................................................... 164
Construct Sphere......................................................... 165
Construct Sphere: By Best Fit ...................................................... 165
Construct Sphere: By Offset ....................................................... 165
Construct Cylinder....................................................... 166
Construct Cylinder: By Best Fit .................................................... 166
Construct Torus ............................................................ 167
Construct Torus: By Best Fit.......................................................... 167
Construct Tube ............................................................ 167
Construct Tube: From Features .................................................. 167
Construct Cone ........................................................... 168
Construct Cone: By Best Fit ........................................................ 168
Construct Slot ............................................................... 168
Construct Rectangular Slot: By Best Fit...................................... 169
Construct Round Slot: By Best Fit................................................ 169
Construct Ellipse........................................................... 169
Construct Ellipse: By Best Fit ........................................................ 169
Construct Ellipse: By Intersection ............................................... 170
Construct Coordinate System.................................... 170
Chapter 9: Dimension Menu

Angle............................................................................. 171
Angle: By Key-In ........................................................................... 171
Angle: From Features .................................................................. 172
Length ........................................................................... 173
Length: By Key-In ......................................................................... 173
Length: From Features................................................................. 174
Chapter 10: Coordinate Systems Menu

Coordinate System Wizard ......................................... 179
Basic Tab....................................................................................... 180
Advanced Tab............................................................................. 181
Coordinate System: By Offset .................................... 186
Coordinate System: By Key-In .................................... 187
vii
November 2010
Chapter 11: Alignments Menu

Coordinate Systems .................................................... 189
Create and Edit Alignments....................................... 190
Coordinate System...................................................................... 191
Iterative......................................................................................... 192
Three Feature ............................................................................... 194
Import............................................................................................ 195
Chapter 12: Device Menu

Device Manager ......................................................... 197
Move Device ............................................................... 198
Device Position ............................................................................ 198
Moving Device Position .............................................................. 199
Export and Import Device Position ............................................ 200
Save and Load Device Setup.................................................... 200
Device Control Panel.................................................. 201
Record Measurement................................................. 203
Record End Click ......................................................... 204
Change Adapter......................................................... 204
Tracker .......................................................................... 204
Aim ................................................................................................ 205
Reset ............................................................................................. 205
Search........................................................................................... 205
Manage Reset Points .................................................................. 205
Measure Level.............................................................................. 206
Motor On Off ................................................................................ 206
Set Backsight ................................................................................ 206
Drive Beam ................................................................................... 206
Bundle Adjustment ...................................................................... 206
Survey............................................................................ 207
Active Survey ............................................................................... 208
Types of Survey ............................................................................ 208
Survey Setup................................................................................. 208
Performing a Survey .................................................................... 210
Moving Device Position With a Survey ...................................... 211
Reporting Survey Results ............................................................. 211
viii
November 2010
Chapter 13: GD&T Tolerances

Datum ........................................................................... 214
Circularity...................................................................... 215
Cylindricity .................................................................... 215
Flatness ......................................................................... 216
Straightness .................................................................. 216
Profile of a Surface ...................................................... 217
Profile of a Line............................................................. 217
Angularity ..................................................................... 218
Concentricity ............................................................... 218
Parallelism..................................................................... 219
Perpendicularity .......................................................... 220
Total Runout ................................................................. 220
Position.......................................................................... 221
Chapter 14: QuickTools

QuickTools Programs ................................................... 223
Recording QuickTools Programs ................................................ 224
Importing QuickTools From Learn Files ...................................... 224
Editing QuickTools Programs ...................................................... 225
Playing QuickTools Programs ..................................................... 225
Automating QuickTools Programs ............................................. 226
Locking QuickTools Programs..................................................... 226
Deleting QuickTools Programs ................................................... 227
QuickTools Tools ........................................................................... 227
QuickTools Program Commands............................................... 228
QuickTools in Measure Mode..................................... 231
QuickTools in Template Mode ................................... 231
Image Creator ............................................................. 231
Adding Pictures............................................................................ 231
Creating QuickTools Pictures...................................................... 232
Chapter 15: Reporting

Reporting Overview .................................................... 235
Report Templates ........................................................................ 235
Logo Customization .................................................................... 236
Document Properties .................................................................. 236
ix
November 2010
User Interface............................................................... 237

Report Lists .................................................................................... 238
Standard Report Window Commands ..................................... 239
E-mailing/Saving a Report .......................................................... 239
Printing a Report .......................................................................... 239
CAD Picture.................................................................................. 240
Selecting a Report Template ..................................................... 240
Saving Report Data ..................................................................... 240
Chapter 16: CAM2® Q Remote

Using a Wireless Network ............................................ 241
Using an Ad Hoc Network .......................................... 241
Setting up the Remote Device .................................. 243
Apple iOS Software ..................................................................... 243
Setting up the Wi-Fi Connection ................................................ 244
Starting CAM2 Q Remote ........................................................... 246
CAM2 Q Remote Screens........................................... 246
Operating and Troubleshooting ................................ 248
Chapter 17: Hot Keys and Shortcut Menus

Hot Keys ........................................................................ 251
Shortcut Menus ............................................................ 254
Chapter 18: Operational Concepts

GD&T Tolerances ......................................................... 257
Angularity ..................................................................................... 257
Circularity...................................................................................... 258
Flatness ......................................................................................... 259
Straightness .................................................................................. 260
Concentricity ............................................................................... 261
Parallelism..................................................................................... 262
Perpendicularity........................................................................... 262
Cylindricity .................................................................................... 263
Profile of a Surface ...................................................................... 264
Profile of a Line............................................................................. 264
Total Runout ................................................................................. 265
RFS and MMC for a Measured Hole .......................................... 266
RFS and MMC for a Measured Shaft ......................................... 267
CAM2 Q True Position.................................................................. 268
x
November 2010
Glossary and Definitions.............................................. 271

Best Fit Circle ................................................................................ 271
Best Fit Cone ................................................................................ 271
Best Fit Cylinder............................................................................ 272
Best Fit Ellipse ................................................................................ 272
Best Fit Line ................................................................................... 273
Best Fit Plane ................................................................................ 273
Best Fit Point.................................................................................. 273
Best Fit Rectangular Slot ............................................................. 274
Best Fit Round Slot........................................................................ 274
Best Fit Sphere .............................................................................. 275
Best Fit Torus.................................................................................. 275
Right-Hand Rule ........................................................................... 275
Unsolved Features ....................................................................... 276
Software License Agreement ............... A-1

Purchase Conditions ............................. B-1
Industrial Products Service Policy ........ C-1
Industrial Service Policy ........................ D-1
xi
08M53E00_CAM2_Q.book Page xii Wednesday, January 12, 2011 9:38 AM
November 2010

CAM2® Q Version 1.5 is a CAD-based metrology software package specifically
designed to conduct precise measurements and inspections of complex features
simply by inputting 3D measurements. There is virtually no limit to the types of
measurements you can analyze using CAM2 Q. Through IGES, VDA, CATIA,
ProEngineer, or Unigraphics translation, your data can be exchanged with any
number of CAD systems.
This document contains all general information and specific instructions needed
to use CAM2 Q. If you have any questions or need further instructions for any
procedure, contact your Customer Service Representative by Phone, Fax or E-
Mail. See “Technical Support” on page 281. You can also reach the Customer
Service Applications and Training group via Internet e-mail at the following
addresses:
• support@faro.com
• applications@faro.com
• training@faro.com
Visit the FARO Customer Service area on the Web at www.faro.com to search
our technical support database, which is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Listed below are some of the visual and typographical conventions used in each
of the sections.
ALL CAPITAL text Indicates directory names, menu names, buttons,
tabs, key names, acronyms, and modes. For example,
“Click SAVE.”
monospaced text Indicates alpha/numeric characters or values you
enter in a field on the screen. For example, “Type
0.005 for the tolerance setting.”
bold text Indicates anything you must input using your
keyboard exactly as it appears. For example, “Type
a:install”.
SMALL CAPS text Indicates dialog box, button names, and window
names. For example, “Click OK to close the DEVICE
window.”
1

November 2010
You may also see a few new words. It is important that you understand the
meaning of these words before proceeding.
digitize Indicates the recording of XYZ coordinates of a
point or location in 3D space. The word digitize is
the same as the term measure when referring to
points.
choose or select Indicates that you are initiating an action. For
example, “Select FILE < INSERT < CAD PARTS.”
left-click, right-click, Indicates that you press and release the
click, or press corresponding mouse button or keyboard key. Also
used when referring to the hardware device buttons.
For example, “After selecting a file from the OPEN
FILE dialog box, click OK to open the file” or “Press
ESC at anytime to cancel a command.”
drag Indicates that you press and hold the LEFT MOUSE
button down and move the mouse. Release the
mouse button to finish. This word is often used when
changing the size of a window or toolbar.
Warning
A WARNING notice denotes a hazard. It calls attention to an operating
procedure, practice, or the like that, if not correctly performed or adhered to,
could result in personal injury or death. Do not proceed beyond a WARNING
notice until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met.
Caution
A CAUTION notice denotes a hazard. It calls attention to an operating
procedure, practice, or the like that, if not correctly performed or adhered to,
could result in damage to the product or loss of important data. Do not proceed
beyond a CAUTION notice until the indicated conditions are fully understood
and met.
Note
A NOTE notice denotes additional information that aids you in the use or
understanding of the equipment or subject. Specifically, they are not used when a
WARNING or CAUTION is applicable. They are not safety related and may be
placed either before or after the associated text as required.
2

November 2010
System Requirements
The following are the minimum and the recommended hardware and software
requirements for CAM2 Q.
Hardware
Minimum Requirements:
• Intel® Pentium® Core™ 2 Duo 2.3 GHz processor
• 2 GB RAM
• Graphics resolution - 1024 x 768
• NVIDIA Quadro FX 360M graphics card with 256 MB of Video RAM
• One free USB port for the CAM2 Q port lock
• DVD-ROM 8x speed or higher
• Standard PS/2 or USB mouse
• 80 GB hard drive, 5400RPM
Recommended Requirements:
• Intel® Core™ i7 3.0 GHz processor
• 4 GB RAM or greater
• Graphics resolution - 1600 x1200
• NVIDIA Quadro FX 1800M graphics card with 1 GB of Video RAM
• DVD-ROM 8x speed or higher
• Standard PS/2 or USB mouse
• 120 GB hard drive, 7200RPM
Software
The following computer operating systems are supported:
• Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional Service Pack 2 or later
(32-bit only)
• Microsoft® Internet Explorer 6.0
• Adobe® Acrobat® Reader® 6.0 or later (to print manuals)
OR
• Microsoft® Windows® Vista® (32-bit or 64-bit)
OR
® ®
• Microsoft Windows 7 (32-bit or 64 bit)
3

November 2010

Installing CAM2 Q
CAM2 Q is quick and easy to install. The CAM2 Q DVD-ROM includes the
software (32-bit or 64-bit) and a standard Windows help file. Also included in
this DVD-ROM is a Portable Document Format (*.PDF) file of the CAM2 Q
manual. You must install Adobe Acrobat Reader, included on the CAM2 Q
DVD-ROM, to read and print the manual from your computer.
To Install CAM2 Q:
1 Place the CAM2 Q, Version 1.5, DVD-ROM into the computer’s DVD-ROM
drive. The DVD-ROM automatically loads and opens the CAM2 Q window.
• If the DVD-ROM does not automatically open the CAM2 Q window, click
START < MY COMPUTER, double-click your computer’s DVD drive
(usually D:), and then double-click autorun.exe.
2 Click an installer language.
3 Click the 32-BIT, 64-BIT install button. Or, click the VIEW MANUAL button
to move to the CAM2 Q manual menu.
• Adobe Acrobat Reader is required to view the CAM2 Q manual. You can
install this program from the CAM2 Q manual menu.
4 If necessary, The CAM2 Q instal program displays a list of auxiliary system
programs that are required for CAM2 Q. Click INSTALL to continue. Click
OK to confirm the install of each program. A system restart may also be
required during this section of the install.
5 Read the Welcome screen and click NEXT.
6 Read and accept the Software License agreement. Click the proper radio
button, and click the NEXT button to continue.
7 Add or remove a component by clicking on the individual component.
8 Click the CHANGE button to change the destination folder for CAM2 Q, or
click the NEXT button to create the default folder.
9 Click the INSTALL button to begin installing the software.
10Click the FINISH button when the installation is complete.
4

November 2010
Licensing CAM2 Q
CAM2 Q requires the installation of a license. Your licensing option is
determined at the purchase of CAM2 Q. There are two licensing options for
CAM2 Q:
1 Licensing with a port lock - the license number is recorded into the port lock.
Attach the port lock to a USB port on your computer.
2 Licensing with a key code - the key code is printed on the back of the CAM2 Q
package (this box.) Start CAM2 Q and enter this code into the dialog box.
• The license key code must be validated using an Internet connection. Once
complete, this validation is permanently stored on your computer.
• If you do not have an available Internet connection, contact FARO’s
customer service team to receive a validation file.
• Each key code can only be activated three times. If you install CAM2 Q on a
new computer, contact FARO’s customer service team to deactivate your
key code from your old computer.
Contact FARO’s customer service team if you need to switch your licensing
option, or have another issues with licensing CAM2 Q.
Network Licensing
CAM2 Q allows management of multiple licenses over a network. This option is
available for users who want to employ a separate computer to host a network
port lock without having to install on that computer.
• Click the HASP Network License Manager button on the DVD menu and
follow the prompts.
• Obtain a special network port lock from FARO’s customer service. This port
lock may be plugged into any computer that has the HASP drivers installed.
Updating Your License

Use the FARO Remote Update System, found in the program group, to check for
any pending license updates. When you run this program, CAM2Q will
download any pending updates or orders and automatically update your port
lock. For example, if you order a translator from FARO customer service, you
can use the License Update tool to download the translator and automatically
apply it to your license.
• If you do not have an available Internet connection, contact FARO’s customer
service team to update your license.
5
November 2010
Directory and File Locations

The initial location of the files and directories is determined by the options
selected during the installation of CAM2 Q. These locations can always be
modified as a new default preference file. See “Preferences” on page 38.
NOTE: A detailed listing of the directory and file locations is available from
FARO Customer Service.
Getting Started
If you have purchased a port lock license, make sure that you have inserted the
port lock into the computer’s USB port. Although not required, it is
recommended that you connect your measuring device to the computer before
starting CAM2 Q.
Starting CAM2 Q
Click the Windows START button and find the CAM2 Q program icon. Click the
icon to start CAM2 Q. If the CAM2 Q program icon is not in the START menu,
click ALL PROGRAMS < FARO < and finally the CAM2 Q program icon.
Figure 1-1 CAM2 Q Program Icon
6
November 2010
As the software loads, the software attempts to initialize communication with a
primary measuring device.
• If the measuring device is connected properly, the DEVICE CONTROL panel
displays the device’s information.
• If there is no connection between the device and the computer’s USB or serial
port, or if the device is off, the DEVICE CONTROL panel is empty. Connect your
measuring device to the computer and click the RECONNECT button, or
continue using CAM2 Q without a measuring device.
For more information, see “Device Control Panel” on page 201.
NOTE: CAM2 Q also supports multiple devices for simultaneous
measurement. For more information, see “Multiple Devices” on page 202.
Figure 1-2 Device Control panel
User Profiles
When CAM2 Q loads the first time, you are prompted to select a User Profile
from the USER PROFILE SELECTION window. User profiles contain custom screen
layout settings, including the ordering and position of control panels.
7
November 2010
NOTE: You can also access the USER PROFILE SELECTION window from the
Edit Menu. For more information on User Profiles, see “User Profiles” on
page 60.
Unit of Measure and Coordinate System

Select the Units of Measure and type of Coordinate System using the menus on
the right side of the CAM2 Q Status Bar. The Status Bar is located at the bottom
of the CAM2 Q window.
Unit of Measure
The measurement file’s unit of measure, by default, is inches. To work in another
unit of measure, click the units button in the bottom right of the CAM2 Q screen
and select another unit of measure. This remains the same for all new files until
changed again.
Unit of Measure can also be controlled and configured as a Preference. For more
information, see “Units” on page 44.
Figure 1-3 Units menu
Customizing Units
To customize measurement units, click the units button in the bottom right of the
CAM2 Q screen and select Customize. You can configure the decimal places for
existing units or create a new unit (specifying the name, abbreviation, decimal
places, and distance in millimeters).
NOTE: You can also switch units by selecting the check box to the left of the
unit name.
Coordinate Systems
The measurement file’s coordinate system, by default, is Cartesian. To work in
another coordinate system (Cylindrical or Spherical), click the coordinate system
8

November 2010
button in the bottom right of the CAM2 Q screen and select another coordinate
system. This remains the same for all new files until changed again.
Figure 1-4 Coordinate Systems menu

Cartesian
Point data is displayed in (x, y, z) format:
• x is the value along the x axis.
• y is the value along the y axis.
• z is the value along the z axis.
Cylindrical
Point data is displayed in ( ρ , φ , z) format:
• ρ is the displacement from the origin in the xy plane.
• φ is the rotation angle from the +x axis.
• z is the value along the z axis.
Spherical
Point data is displayed in ( ρ , φ , θ ) format:
• ρ is the displacement from the origin.
• φ is the rotation angle from the +z axis.
• θ is the rotation angle from the +x axis.
9
November 2010
Screen Layout
The CAM2 Q screen contains the following areas.
Figure 1-5 CAM2 Q Screen Layout

Main Window: This is the main view window for your part that contains
the CAD, REPORT, IMAGE CREATOR and SURVEY tabs.
Menus See “Menus” on page 11.
Toolbars See “Toolbars” on page 12.
Features Control Panel. See “Features” on page 66.
Messages, Readings, and Tolerances Control Panels. See “Messages” on
page 17, “Readings” on page 95, and “Nominals and Tolerances” on page 96.
Feature Creator and QuickTools Control Panels. See “Feature Creator”
on page 66, and “QuickTools” on page 67.
Unit of Measure and Coordinate System Status Bar Menus. See “Unit of
Measure and Coordinate System” on page 8.
10
November 2010
Menus
CAM2 Q has two types of menus: standard Windows-style menus and CAM2 Q
menus.
Menus are at the top of the screen. FILE, EDIT, and VIEW are standard
Windows-style menus. MEASURE, KEY-IN, PICK FROM CAD,
CONSTRUCT, DIMENSION, COORDINATE SYSTEMS, ALIGNMENTS,
and DEVICE are CAM2 Q menus.
Figure 1-6 Pull-down Menu

To display a menu, move the pointer over a menu name and click the LEFT
MOUSE button. You can also display a menu by holding down the ALT key
while selecting the underlined letter on the menu name. For example, hold down
the ALT key and press M on the keyboard to display the MEASURE menu. This
is commonly called ALT+M.
Once the menu is open, select a command by pressing the underlined letter of the
command name. For example, press and release ALT+M and then press I on the
keyboard to activate the MEASURE < CIRCLE command.
Some commands also start using a single keyboard key, or Hot Key. For more
information, see “Hot Keys and Shortcut Menus” on page 251.
11
November 2010
Toolbars
The toolbar on the top of the MAIN window consists of a group of buttons and
provides a graphical way to start commands. If a button has a small triangle in the
lower right corner, a sub toolbar will “flyout” of the button and display more
buttons.
Additional toolbars may be opened from the VIEW < TOOLBARS <
CUSTOMIZE menu or by right-clicking any open toolbar and selecting the
CUSTOMIZE command from the shortcut menu. See “Toolbars Tab” on
page 64.
A toolbar may be moved anywhere on the MAIN window. To move a toolbar:
• Move the mouse pointer to the left side of the toolbar to change the single
arrow pointer to the move pointer.
• Click and hold the LEFT MOUSE button and move the mouse to drag the
toolbar to another location.
• Release the LEFT MOUSE button.
A toolbar may also be reshaped. To change the shape of a toolbar:
• Move the mouse pointer to any side of the toolbar to change the single arrow
pointer to the move pointer.
• Click and hold the LEFT MOUSE button and move the mouse to change the
shape of the toolbar.
• When the toolbar has the desired shape, release the LEFT MOUSE button.
NOTE: Toolbar modifications stay constant after you exit CAM2 Q.
To close a toolbar, click the CLOSE button in the upper right corner of the
toolbar.
Toolbar Help
Every toolbar button has a tool tip that appears when the mouse pointer passes
over the button. A description of the command also appears on the Status Bar at
the bottom left-hand side of the screen.
Default Toolbars
At the top of your screen are the FARO CAM2 Q STANDARD, ALIGNMENTS,
COORDINATE SYSTEMS, MEASUREMENT, PROJECTION PLANES,
12
November 2010
DEVICE CONTROL, and QUICKTOOLS toolbars. These contain basic
commands that you will regularly use.
STANDARD toolbar
DEVICE CONTROL toolbar
MEASUREMENT toolbar
PROJECTION PLANES toolbar
ALIGNMENTS toolbar
COORDINATE SYSTEMS toolbar
QUICKTOOLS toolbar
Figure 1-7 Default Toolbars
13
November 2010
Standard Toolbar
The STANDARD toolbar contains common commands for file management. See
“File Menu” on page 29 and “Edit Menu” on page 37.
Figure 1-8 Standard Toolbar
Alignments Toolbar
The ALIGNMENTS toolbar contains the commands for constructing an
alignment from features. See “Alignments Menu” on page 189.
Figure 1-9 Alignments Toolbar
Coordinate Systems Toolbar

The COORDINATE SYSTEMS toolbar contains the commands for constructing
a coordinate system from features. See “Coordinate Systems Menu” on
page 179.
Figure 1-10 Coordinate Systems Toolbar
Measurement Toolbar
The MEASUREMENT toolbar contains common commands for measuring. See
“Measure/Template Mode” on page 79, “Add Readings” on page 129, “Measure
All” on page 130 and “Remeasure” on page 130.
Figure 1-11 Measurement Toolbar
14
November 2010
Projection Planes Toolbar
The PROJECTION PLANES toolbar contains a drop-down window to control
the active projection plane for all two dimensional features. See “Measure
Properties” on page 80.
Figure 1-12 Projection Planes Toolbar
Device Control Toolbar

The DEVICE CONTROL toolbar contains the command to access the Device
Control Panel. See “Device Control Panel” on page 201.
Figure 1-13 Device Control Toolbar
QuickTools Toolbar
The QUICKTOOLS toolbar contains the commands to create, record, play,
pause, stop, and export QuickTools programs. See “QuickTools” on page 223.
Figure 1-14 QuickTools Toolbar
Control Panels
Control Panels are windows that contain all or some of the following:
• menu and submenu commands
• feature data
• an edit box to change a parameter of an item
• a check box to show/hide items
• tree lists of items and sub items
On the left, right and bottom edges of the MAIN window are control panels which
contain many of the common commands. Each control panel appears as a tab
when not in use. The FEATURES panel is on the left side, the FEATURE
CREATOR and QUICKTOOLS tabs are on the right side, and the MESSAGES,
READINGS, and FEATURE INFORMATION tabs are on the bottom.
15
November 2010
• Click on a tab to display a control panel. Click and drag the tab onto the MAIN
window and the panel automatically collapses and hides.
• Click the AUTO HIDE button in the upper right corner of the panel to
keep the bar visible.
• Click the CLOSE button in the upper right corner to close a panel.
NOTE: Use the VIEW < PANELS command to control the visibility of the
control panels. See “Panels” on page 66.
Moving and Docking Control Panels

CAM2 Q control panels may be moved, arranged, and docked to customize your
layout.
Moving a Control Panel

To move a panel, left-click and hold the panel’s title bar or tab name. Drag the
panel with the mouse to the desired location and release the button to release the
panel.
Docking Icons
Docking Icons appear when you left-click and begin to drag
a panel. Drag and release the panel onto one of these icons
to instantly dock the panel at the extreme right, left, top, or
bottom of the screen (depending on the corresponding
icon’s arrow). The icons disappear when the panel has been
released.
Reordering Control Panel Tabs

Left-click and hold the panel’s tab name. Drag the tab to the desired location and
release the mouse button.
16
November 2010
Messages
The MESSAGES panel contains informational messages relating to the
measurement file.
Figure 1-15 Messages panel

Use the VIEW < PANELS < MESSAGE BAR FONT... command to change the
size of the font in the MESSAGES panel.
Features
The FEATURES panel contains all of the CAD parts and features in your
measurement file.
Figure 1-16 Features panel

For more information, see “Features Panel” on page 88.
17
November 2010
Feature Creator
The FEATURE CREATOR panel contains many of the commands in the
MEASURE, KEY-IN, PICK FROM CAD, CONSTRUCT, DIMENSION, and
TRACKER menu.
Figure 1-17 Feature Creator panel

For more information see “Measure Menu” on page 79, “Key-In Menu” on
page 131, “Pick From CAD Menu” on page 141, “Construct Menu” on
page 147, “Dimension Menu” on page 171, and “Tracker” on page 204.
18
November 2010
QuickTools
The QUICKTOOLS panel contains all of the QuickTools commands in your
measurement file.
Figure 1-18 QuickTools panel

For more information, see “QuickTools” on page 223.
Readings
The READINGS panel contains the data for each individual reading, or
measurement point, of a feature. It also contains readings for best fit
constructions
Figure 1-19 Readings panel

For more information, see “Readings” on page 95.
19
November 2010
Feature Information
The FEATURE INFORMATION panel contains nominal and tolerance information
for each feature in your measurement file.
Figure 1-20 Feature Information panel

For more information, see “Nominals and Tolerances” on page 96.
Controlling the View

You can manipulate and rotate the contents of the main window using your
mouse. Doing so changes the mouse pointer to the grab or rotate icon as
appropriate.
To manipulate the view:
1 Click and hold the RIGHT MOUSE button. This changes the mouse pointer to
the grab icon.
2 Drag the mouse left, right, up, and down to move the view.
3 Release the RIGHT MOUSE button to set the view.
To rotate the view:
1 Click and hold the LEFT MOUSE button. This changes the mouse pointer to
the rotate icon.
2 Drag the mouse left, right, up, and down to rotate the view.
3 Release the LEFT MOUSE button to set the view.
Center of Rotation
By default, the rotation center is the center of all entities (features and CAD) in
the measurement file. You can also change temporarily change the center:
• Select any feature, start the command, and the view rotates around that
feature’s center.
• Right-click the CAD tab of the main window over any entity and the view
rotates around that feature’s center.
• Right-click the CAD tab of the main window over no entity and the view
rotates around the default center of all entities in the measurement file.
20
November 2010
Features
CAM2 Q Features are the geometric objects that you add to the measurement
file. There are four types of CAM2 Q Features:
• Measured: a feature that you create using a measurement device.
• Constructed: a feature that you create from other features or keyed-in
values.
• Nominal: a feature that is the theoretical, or design, value of a measurement.
You create nominals from CAD models, or entered values.
• Dimensioned: a length or angle calculation between two or more existing
features.
Selecting Features
You may have to select or deselect features that were created in CAM2 Q. To
select a feature on the screen, place the pointer over any part of a feature and
press the LEFT MOUSE button. Selected features appear in red. To deselect a
feature, click the selected feature again with the LEFT MOUSE button.
Device-controlled Mouse
When you use a measuring device with CAM2 Q, the position of the probe
controls the mouse pointer. The standard mouse also controls the pointer. See
“Use Arm as Mouse” on page 48.
NOTE: Some measurement devices that operate with CAM2 Q do not
constantly send positional data to CAM2 Q, so this command may not work
properly. Refer to the user manual included for your device.
CAM2 Q recognizes which measurement device is active and selects that device
for the pointer control. After starting a measurement command, CAM2 Q only
accepts control from the current measurement device and blocks any input except
digitized points.
NOTE: The pointer changes from the single arrow mouse pointer to the DEVICE
icon when CAM2 Q accepts data from the input device.
Help
Click any HELP button or select HELP < CONTENTS to access CAM2 Q’s
Online Help. Individual Help files are also available for the FaroArm and the
FARO Laser Tracker and are opened from some HELP buttons.
21

November 2010
NOTE: The HELP button for Measure commands is available in the EDIT
FEATURE dialog box for each feature. Select the feature and run the EDIT <
PROPERTIES command.
When the Online Help appears, select the CONTENTS, INDEX, or SEARCH tab
to open specific help files.
Figure 1-21 CAM2 Q Help File

• CONTENTS opens a series of books. Double-click the book you want with
the LEFT MOUSE button, or single-click the book and click the OPEN button.
If you see another book, continue clicking that selection until you see a topic
name.
• A topic has a QUESTION MARK (?) icon in front of its name. Double-click the
topic name to open the topic. Within a topic, you may have additional links
directing you to other topics for further information. Click the appropriate link
to go to another topic.
• On the INDEX tab you can type the first few letters of topic or word. You can
also scroll down to your topic using the scroll bar. Double-click your selection
with the LEFT MOUSE button, or single-click to highlight the topic and click
the DISPLAY button.
22
November 2010
• The SEARCH tab allows you to type words and search the whole document for
the different topics using the word(s) you selected. Type the word(s) in the
space provided in the first window and click the LIST TOPICS button.
Electronic Manual
You can open an electronic version of the CAM2 Q Users Manual with Adobe
Acrobat Reader, which is included with your CAM2 Q DVD-ROM.
• A Table of Contents is on the left-hand side of your screen under the
BOOKMARKS tab. Clicking a bookmark takes you to the selected section.
• You can also search the manual by using the EDIT < FIND command
(CTRL+F).
Using Acrobat Reader Help

Adobe Acrobat Reader has its own electronic manual if you need help. Running
Acrobat Reader HELP inside the Acrobat Reader application opens the Acrobat
Reader electronic manual.
What is New
The following sections describe new functions and commands that have been
added to CAM2 Q, as well as the enhancements made to existing CAM2 Q
commands.
Version 1.5
General
• CAM2® Q Remote: Control CAM2 Q remotely with your iPhone®,
iPod® Touch, or iPad®. See “CAM2® Q Remote” on page 241.
• Feature Information Panel: The Tolerance panel is now the FEATURE
INFORMATION panel. See “Feature Information” on page 20.
• QuickTools Toolbar: Access QuickTools commands without opening the
QUICKTOOLS panel. See “QuickTools Toolbar” on page 15.
File Menu
• Export Tube: Export a tube (*.txt) from the current measurement file. See
“Tube” on page 33.
23
November 2010
• Import QuickTools: Import a CAM2 Measure Learn file into the current
measurement file for use as a QuickTools program. See “QuickTools” on
page 31.
• Import Tube: Import a tube (*.txt) into the current measurement file. See
“Tube” on page 31.
• Re-establish CAD Link: You can re-establish a broken CAD link when
opening a measurement file. See “Open” on page 29.
Edit Menu
• Always Show Probe Preference: Keep the probe visible at all times. See
“Always Show Probe” on page 43.
• Automatically Take Reading Preference: Automatically measure a Vector
Point when the probe is inside the home-in zone. See “Automatically Take
Reading” on page 51.
• Auto-Recognize Features Preference: CAM2 Q can automatically recognize
features as you measure, so you can record measurements without first
invoking a measurement command. See “Auto-Recognize Features” on
page 48.
• Auto-Save of FCD Documents Preference: Enable, disable, and select the
interval of the Auto-Save feature. See “Auto-Save of FCD Documents” on
page 39.
• Measurement Sound Preference: Hear a special sound when you record a
measurement for a feature out of tolerance. See “Measurement Sound” on
page 48.
• Preferences Dialog Redesign: The Preferences dialog has been reorganized
and streamlined. See “Preferences” on page 38.
• RMS Threshold Preference: Specify an upper limit of RMS to define
acceptable reading quality (Laser Tracker only). See “RMS Threshold” on
page 53.
• Translate Hidden Entities Preference: Include entities from hidden CAD file
layers during translation. See “Translate Hidden Entities” on page 55.
View Menu
• Feature Window Compensation: Feature Windows include a Compensation
button to enable and disable probe compensation. See “Show Feature
Window” on page 70.
24
November 2010
• Feature Window Deviations: Feature Windows include normal (dN) and
radial (dR) deviations for circles and cylinders. See “Show Feature Window”
on page 70.
• Improved Preset Views: Preset views have been streamlined. See “Preset
Views” on page 75.
• Zoom All: CAM2 Q no longer includes the World Coordinate System (WCS)
when computing the extent of the CAD view. See “Zoom All” on page 74.
Measure Menu
• Automatic Feature Recognition: CAM2 Q can automatically recognize
features as you measure, so you can record measurements without first
invoking a measurement command. See “Automatic Feature Recognition” on
page 84.
• Comments: Add a comment to a feature using the FEATURE PROPERTIES
window. See “Comments” on page 80.
• Plane-Lock Scanning: Specify a depth value for plane projection features
(Measurement properties). See “Plane-Lock Scanning” on page 82.
• Display As Arc: You can display a circle as an arc of actual readings instead of
the complete circle. See “Display As Arc” on page 83.
• Features Panel: When you measure an existing feature, the feature will appear
in red. See “Features Panel” on page 88.
• Label Contents By Feature: The contents of labels are specifically tailored to
actual values, nominal values, or both. See “Labels” on page 94.
• Layers: Create, populate, and manage layers in the FEATURES panel. See
“Layers” on page 92.
• Measurement Window: Edit time and distance intervals during measurement.
See “Measurement Window” on page 85.
• Measuring a Compensate Axis Point: Measure a point with a special axis
compensation calculation. See “Measuring a Compensate Axis Point” on
page 122.
• Measuring a High/Low Point: Use constructed point-reducible features as
reference features. See “Measuring a High/Low Point” on page 119.
• Measuring a Polyline Group: Cross-section planes appear translucent so that
the probe can also be seen in the CAD view during the scanning process. See
“Measuring a Polyline Group” on page 125.
25
November 2010
• Measuring a Single Point Circle: Measure a single point circle by measuring
a single point and calculating a circle using the distance to the projection plane
and the probe diameter. See “Measuring a Single Point Circle” on page 128.
• Non-Contact Tube Measurement: Scan tubes with a laser probe. See
“Scannable Features” on page 84.
• Readings Panel: View individual point data for constructed features By Best
Fit. See “Readings” on page 95.
• Readings Panel: The Report exported from the READINGS Panel no longer
contains unit indicators. See “Readings” on page 95.
• RMS Values: RMS values of the last reading are viewable in the Measurement
Window. See “Live Measurement Results” on page 87.
• Solver Method: You can fit a feature so that all readings are outside or inside
the feature. See “Solver Method” on page 83.
• Tubing Breakpoints: You can view all tube breakpoints in the READINGS
panel. See “Breakpoints” on page 110.
• Tubing Segments: Tubing segments no longer appear in the FEATURES panel.
You can find the tube segments in the properties of the tube. See “Measure
• “Unsolved” Feature Status Indicator: In the FEATURES panel, unsolved
constructions and coordinate systems appear in gray. See “Feature Status
Indicator” on page 90.
Construct Menu
• Construct Line: By Axis Best Fit: You can use line-reducible features when
constructing lines by best fit. See “Construct Line: By Axis Best Fit” on
page 152.
• Length: From Features: Line-Line dimensions have been enhanced to handle
new 3D scenarios. See “Length: From Features” on page 174.
• Readings Panel: The READINGS panel contains readings for best fit
constructions. See “Readings” on page 19.
Coordinate Systems Menu

• Tubing: You can use tube breakpoints when creating a coordinate system. See
“Coordinate Systems Menu” on page 179.
26
November 2010
Alignments Menu
• Import/Export: You can import and export alignment files in text format
(*.xal). See “Import” on page 195.
• Iterative Alignment: You can use inspect surface points to create an RPS
alignment. See “Iterative” on page 192.
• Tubing: You can use tube breakpoints for Iterative, Three Feature, and
Coordinate System alignments. See “Alignments Menu” on page 189.
Device Menu
• Record End Click: The on-screen probe flashes red when you record an end
click. See “Record End Click” on page 204.
• Record Measurement: The on-screen probe flashes green when you record a
measurement. See “Record Measurement” on page 203.
• Tracker: You have direct access to an additional TrackerPad command.
• Bundle Adjustment. See “Bundle Adjustment” on page 206.
GD&T Menu
• Datum: You can now define a circle as a linear datum and a cone as a plane
datum. See “Datum” on page 214.
• Form Tolerances: GD&T form tolerances appear with the appropriate name
and image in the FEATURE INFORMATION panel, reports, and labels. See
“GD&T Tolerances” on page 213.
• Profile of a Line: Profile of a Line information appears for each line of a
Polyline Group. See “Profile of a Line” on page 217.
QuickTools
• Automating QuickTools Programs: Play a QuickTools program from a
command line without first opening CAM2 Q. See “Automating QuickTools
Programs” on page 226.
• Importing QuickTools From Learn Files: You can import SoftCheck Tool
files and Learn files created with CAM2 Measure X or CAM2 Measure 4.0
into the current measurement file for use in a QuickTools program. See
“Importing QuickTools From Learn Files” on page 224.
• Locking QuickTools Programs: Secure a QuickTools program with a
password to keep the program from being edited, overwritten, or deleted from
the measurement file. See “Locking QuickTools Programs” on page 226.
27
November 2010
• Move Device: You can record a Move Device command in a QuickTools
program. See “QuickTools Program Commands” on page 228.
Reporting
• Polyline Group: Polyline Groups display a separate sub-report for each
individual polyline, containing statistics, line chart with deviations, and a table
with individual points with deviations. See “Reporting” on page 235.
• Tabular Report Format Update: The Tabular report format has been
updated. See “Reporting” on page 235.
28
November 2010

The FILE menu contains the file (opening, saving, etc.),
import, and export commands. Some of these commands
are also available on the CAM2 Q toolbar and the File
toolbar at the top of your screen. See the View < Toolbars < Customize <
Toolbars Tab.
New
Selecting NEW creates a new measurement file. You cannot have multiple files
open at the same time, so if a file is already open when you select this command
you will be prompted to save that file. If an unsaved (New Document)
measurement file is open and you quit the program, you will receive a message to
save the measurement file.
Open
The OPEN command opens a CAM2 Q measurement file (*.fcd) that has been
previously created, named, and saved.
If you already have a measurement file open, CAM2 Q will prompt you to SAVE
the current file or close it without saving.
If a CAD file associated with a measurement file cannot be found when you open
the measurement file, CAM2 Q will prompt you to re-establish a link to the
CAD. If you do not re-establish a link, CAM2 Q will open the file without CAD.
NOTE: To use files created from other CAD systems, create a new
measurement file, translate the CAD to the Parasolid CAD format (*.x_t), and
add the CAD format file to the new measurement file. See “Translate CAD
Files” on page 33, and “CAD” on page 30.
Save
The SAVE command saves the current file as a CAM2 Q measurement file
(*.fcd). If you did not name the measurement file before invoking the Save
29
November 2010
command, the SAVE AS dialog box will appear. Type a file name in the SAVE AS
dialog box and click the SAVE button.
Save As
The SAVE AS command allows you to save a current measurement file under a
new file name. Type a file name in the SAVE AS dialog box and click the SAVE
button.
Import
The IMPORT menu allows you to add external files to the current measurement
file.
CAD
Select FILE < IMPORT < CAD to add Parasolid® CAD format data (*.x_t) to
your current measurement file. Select one or more CAD files in the ADD CAD
MODEL dialog, then click OPEN to translate them into Parasolid format and load
them into the current measurement file.
Large CAD files or CAD files that may take longer to load than other files should
be translated into the Parasolid format using the Translate CAD Files command.
For more information, see “Translate CAD Files” on page 33.
NOTE: By default, imported CAD is displayed with both shading and
wireframe information. To import files and change options use the FARO CAD
translator. See “Translate CAD Files” on page 33.
The CAM2 Q CAD translator has an option to use Healing, or error correction,
during the translation process. This option is a preference. See “Healing” on
page 55.
Points
Select FILE < IMPORT < POINTS to access the Import Point Data wizard and
import a text file (*.txt) containing point-reducible features into the current
measurement file. Use the wizard to select the directory location and the name of
the file to be imported, select the import configuration (including row offset,
30
November 2010
units, column order, and separators), and select the features to import as actual or
nominal.
Alignment
Select FILE < IMPORT < ALIGNMENT to insert an alignment file (*.fal) into
the current measurement file.
Tolerance Preference
Select FILE < IMPORT < TOLERANCE PREFERENCE to import a tolerance
preference file (*.xml) into the current measurement file. Choose an existing file:
• The tolerance preference file previews in a dialog box.
• Click IMPORT to update the tolerances.
NOTE: Select the APPLY TO ALL FEATURES check box to import and change
the tolerances for the features in your current measurement file.
Tube
Select FILE < IMPORT < TUBE to import a tube (*.txt) into the current
measurement file.
QuickTools
Select FILE < IMPORT < QUICKTOOLS <FROM LEARN FILES to import a
Learn file (QuickTools program made with CAM2 Measure X or CAM2
Measure 4.0) into the current measurement file. See “Importing QuickTools
From Learn Files” on page 224.
Export
The EXPORT menu allows you to export data from the current measurement file.
Points
Select FILE < EXPORT < POINTS to access the Export Point Data wizard and
export a text file (*.txt) containing point-reducible features from the current
measurement file. Use the wizard to select the features to export, select the export
31
November 2010
configuration (including units, decimal indicator, date, column order, and
separators), and select the directory location and the name of the file to be
exported. They export as text files ready to be imported into the program.
Measurement Data
Select FILE < EXPORT < MEASUREMENT DATA to export measurement
data to either a text file or a CAD file.
To Text File
The Export Measurement Data wizard exports a text file (*.txt) containing
feature data from the current measurement file. Use the wizard to select the
features to export, select the export configuration (including units, decimal
indicator, date, column order, and separators), and select the directory location
and the name of the file to be exported. They export as text files ready to be
imported into the program.
NOTE: If you are including this function as part of a QuickTools program, you
also have the option of assigning an automated save name prefix for when
users run the QuickTools program.
To CAD File
The Export CAD wizard exports a CAD file containing features from the current
measurement file. Use the wizard to select the features to export, select the file
format (Parasolid, IGES, Step, VDA), select the measurement unit, and select a
name and save location for the CAD file.
CAD to XGL
Select FILE < EXPORT < CAD TO XGL to export an XGL file from the CAD
model file in the current measurement file. For more information, see “CAD” on
page 30.
32

November 2010
Picture to File
Select FILE < EXPORT < PICTURE TO FILE to export a bitmap (*.bmp) image
of the CAD view from your current measurement file.
Tolerance Preference
Select FILE < EXPORT < TOLERANCE PREFERENCE to export a tolerance
preference file (*.xml) from your current measurement file.
A tolerance preference file consists of a set of upper and lower tolerances for
each feature type, and the option to make each toleranced item visible or
invisible.
Tube
Select FILE < EXPORT < TUBE to export tube data (*.txt) from the current
measurement file.
Translate CAD Files

The TRANSLATE CAD FILES command starts the FARO CAD Translator, a
separate application that converts your CAD files to the Parasolid® CAD data file
format (*.x_t).
Figure 2-1 FARO CAD Translator
33
November 2010
NOTE: You must translate all CAD files to the Parasolid CAD data file format.
To add the CAD parts to your current measurement file, use the INSERT <
CAD PARTS command. See “CAD” on page 30.
CAM2 Q supports CATIA v4 and v5, IGES, Inventor, Parasolid, Pro/E,
SolidWorks, STEP, Unigraphics, and VDA formats. For other CAD formats, use
Rhino software to import your file and save as an IGES file. If you have
problems translating CAD files, contact FARO Customer Service for help.
Add Files - Click the Add Files link and select your CAD files. You can select
multiple files to translate.
Remove Files - Select a file in the list and click the Remove Selected File(s) link
to remove one or more files from the list. This Does Not delete the CAD file from
your computer.
Target Folder - Select a file in the list and click the Target Folder button to
change the target location for each file. The target location is the directory and
name for the translated Parasolid CAD file (*.x_t). This location remains the
same until you change it.
NOTE: It is good practice to keep your translated CAD files and measurement
files in the same folder. Measurement files location is a preference. For more
information, see “Documents (FCD)” on page 40.
Start Translation - Select a file in the list and click the Start Translation link to
start the translation of the file.
Stop Translation - Select a file in the list and click the Stop Translation link to
stop the translation of the file.
The FARO CAD translator has an option to use Healing, or error correction,
during the translation process. This option is a preference. See “Healing” on
page 55.
Send Document
Select FILE < SEND DOCUMENT to e-mail the current file using the electronic
mail system on your computer. Any CAD model file that your measurement file
uses is not included in the message attachment. Make sure to send any CAD
model file in a separate message.
NOTE: Your e-mail recipient should save all files in the same folder on their
computer.
34

November 2010
Exit
Closes the CAM2 Q program. If an unsaved measurement file is open, you are
prompted to save or discard the file.
35
November 2010

The EDIT menu allows you to repeat a command, add special commands to
QuickTools, edit, file, feature, GD&T and CAD Part properties, and adjust the
CAM2 Q preference and settings. The FARO CAM2 Q Standard toolbar contains
additional commands that allow you to open a new or existing file and print the
screen view. See the View < Toolbars < Customize < Toolbars Tab.
Repeat
The REPEAT command starts the last used CAM2 Q command. You can also
press the ENTER hot key on the keyboard.
R
Clear All Readings
The CLEAR ALL READINGS command clears all readings from all entities in
the measurement file.
NOTE: To delete all of the readings from a specific feature, right-click the
feature and select DELETE READINGS. For more information, see “Shortcut
Menus” on page 254.
180°
Flip Vector
The FLIP VECTOR command flips the vector of a feature. This command flips
the plane vector of a plane-reducible feature or line vector of a line-reducible
feature.
NOTE: A Flip Vector state remains associated with a feature until all readings
are cleared using the “Clear All Readings” command. Manually deleting all the
readings (using the Readings tab) will not disassociate the “Flip Vector” state.
Vectors and Coordinate Systems

If the vector of a feature is used to define a coordinate system, and the coordinate
system is then used for an alignment, flipping the feature’s vector will not change
the displayed vector of the line since that is controlled by the alignment.
However, the alignment will change and features may shift.
37
November 2010
Vectors and Feature Properties
You can view the “Flip Vector” state of a feature by checking the Vector Flipped
checkbox in the Feature Editor dialog (accessed with the Properties command).
Feature Visibility
The FEATURE VISIBILITY command controls the visibility of feature and
feature groups in the CAD view. Select one or more features in the FEATURES
panel, then click FEATURE VISIBILITY to hide the selected feature(s). While
the selection is hidden, the features remain in the FEATURES panel but are not
shown in the CAD view. The eye icon appears gray for the selection, indicating
“hidden” status. Click the FEATURE VISIBILITY command again to show the
feature(s).
NOTE: You can also access this command in the FEATURES panel. See “Features
Panel” on page 88.
GD&T
Select a feature and run this command to add GD&T tolerancing to a feature. For
more information, see “GD&T Tolerances” on page 213.
Copy Tolerances
Select a feature and run this command to copy all tolerances for the feature. The
COPY TOLERANCES command is used in conjunction with the PASTE
TOLERANCES command.
NOTE: You have the option to include GD&T data when copying tolerances. For
more information, see “Copy GD&T Tolerances” on page 56.
Paste Tolerances
Select a feature, or multiple similar features, and run this command to paste a set
of tolerances copied from another feature. The PASTE TOLERANCES
command is used in conjunction with the COPY TOLERANCES command.
Preferences
Default preferences always load when you start CAM2 Q. These preferences can
be applied to the current measurement file, or saved as the default and loaded
each time CAM2 Q is started. There are seven preference groups: File, Display,
Panels, Measurement, CAD, Tolerance, and Report.
38
November 2010
When you change default Preferences, they appear with pencil icons to indicate
their changed status. The changed status persists until you save your changes or
exit Preferences without saving.
Figure 3-1 Preferences
Editing Preference Settings

To edit a preference setting, click a preference group to access the parameters,
then edit the parameters as desired. Click OK to confirm the settings for the
current measurement file, or click SAVE AS DEFAULT to load the preference
each time CAM2 Q is started.
NOTE: Click RESET TO DEFAULT to revert to the default settings most
recently saved.
File
The File preferences define auto-save configuration and the locations from which
document, CAD, alignment, device position, points, tube, and measurement data
are saved and loaded.
Click File in the left window of the PREFERENCES window to see the File
preferences.
To change any file location, click the associated button and browse to a folder.
Auto-Save of FCD Documents

This preference controls whether CAM2 Q automatically saves the active
measurement file (document), and if so, how often. By default, the auto-save
option is enabled at a 5 minute interval.
39

November 2010
To disable auto-save, clear the checkbox. To change the interval, enter a new
number in the box.
Documents (FCD)
This preference controls the default file location for document (*.fcd) files.
CAD
This preference controls the default file location for CAD files.
Alignments
This preference controls the default file location for alignment files.
Device Positions
This preference controls the default file location for device position files.
Points
This preference controls the default file location for points files.
Tube
This preference controls the default file location for tube files.
Measurements
This preference controls the default file location for measurement data.
Display
The Display preferences determine the way in which CAM2 Q displays entities,
dimensions, labels, and other visual elements.
Click Display in the left window of the PREFERENCES window to see the Display
preferences.
CAD View
Background Gradient
Top Color
40
November 2010
This preference specifies the top color of the background gradient. To change the
color, click in the drop-down window and select a color.
Bottom Color
This preference specifies the bottom color of the background gradient. To change
the color, click in the drop-down window and select a color.
Label Settings
Show Labels After Measurement
This preference specifies whether a label is shown whenever you measure a new
feature.
• Yes: (Default) A label automatically adds to the CAD window after a feature
solves.
• No: A label never adds to the CAD window.
Show Icon in Label
This preference specifies whether a label contains the feature’s icon.
• Yes: (Default) Labels show the feature icon to the left of the feature name.
• No: Labels do not show the feature icon to the left of the feature name.
Show Deviation in Simple Label
This preference specifies whether a label of a toleranced feature contains 3D
deviation.
• Yes: (Default) Simple labels show the 3D deviation for toleranced features.
• No: Simple labels do not show the 3D deviation for toleranced features.
Automatically Arrange
This preference specifies whether labels are automatically arranged each time
they are added or the view is changed.
• Yes: (Default) Labels automatically arrange (best fit) when they are added, or
when the CAD window changes.
• No: Label do not automatically arrange.
NOTE: To arrange labels as needed, select VIEW < ARRANGE LABELS or
press the L hot key on the keyboard. For more information, see “Labels” on
page 77.
Add or remove on-screen labels by right-clicking a feature and selecting LABEL.
Label Style
41

November 2010
This preference specifies the default label style.
• Show Simple Label Only: All labels are in the Simple style, showing the
feature name.
• Show Detailed Label Only: All labels are in the Detailed style, showing the
feature name and all selected feature parameters.
• Show Detailed Labels When Selected: (Default) All labels are in the Simple
style. Select a feature from the FEATURES panel or the CAD window to
temporarily change to the Detailed style.
CAD Settings
Show Construction Lines
This preference specifies whether construction lines are shown in the CAD
drawing.
• Yes: Construction lines are shown in the CAD drawing.
• No: (Default) Construction lines are not shown in the CAD drawing.
Render Quality
This preference specifies the balance between quality and performance of CAD
rendering. The default is Best Quality; however, users with large CAD files may
opt to decrease quality to gain an increase in system performance and a reduced
rendering time.
To change the rendering quality, click in the drop-down window and select a
value:
• Best Quality: The CAD renders in best detail with no performance
enhancement.
• Good Quality: The CAD renders in good detail with a slight performance
enhancement.
• Balanced: The CAD rendering and performance are evenly matched.
• Good Performance: The CAD renders in less detail with a good performance
enhancement.
• Best Performance: The CAD renders in lesser detail with the best
performance enhancement.
Size and Scale

Whisker Scale
42

November 2010
The scale value for whiskers. Each whisker is drawn using the deviation value.
This scale value increases that length so that the whisker is visible on the screen.
Point Size
This sets the size of all points in the measurement file. Click in the drop-down
window and select a size. This includes all point features and feature readings.
Inspect Surface Disk Size
The size of the disks drawn to represent inspect surface points. The color is
predetermined by the tolerance condition.
Vector Points
Arrow Size
This sets the size of all vector point arrows in the measurement file. Click in the
drop-down window and select a size. This includes all point features and feature
readings.
Disk Color
The color of the disks drawn on the CAD part. The default is white.
Disk Scale
The scale of the disks drawn on the CAD part; representing a number by which
the size of the disks will be scaled. Min. value: 0.01, Max. value 100. The default
is 1.
Measurement
Show Closest Point While Measuring
This preference determines whether CAM2 Q draws a line between the probe
and the closest CAD point.
• Yes: (Default) A line is drawn between the probe and the closest CAD point.
• No: No line is drawn between the probe and the closest CAD point.
Always Show Probe
This preference determines whether CAM2 Q shows the probe graphic on-
screen.
NOTE: When shown, the probe is represented as it appears on the device and is
displayed in a 1:1 scale. Changes to the probe diameter will be reflected in the
software.
• Yes: (Default) CAM2 Q shows the probe on-screen.
43
November 2010
• No: CAM2 Q does not show the probe on-screen.
Measuring Line Color
This preference specifies the color of the measuring line. To change the color,
click in the drop-down window and select a color.
Dimension Settings
This preference specifies the default font used for dimension annotations in the
CAD view.
• Use Font Size Proportional to Feature Size: (Default) CAM2 Q uses a font
size that scales with the size of the feature dimension.
• Use Custom Font Style: CAM2 Q uses a user-selected font style and size.
Click the button and select a font style and font size.
• Use Font Size Preset: CAM2 Q uses a preset size (Very Small, Small,
Medium, Large, or Very Large) for fonts.
Other
Highlight Features On Mouse Hover
This preference specifies whether CAD surfaces and features highlight when the
pointer is moved over them.
• Yes: (Default) CAD surfaces and features highlight when the pointer is moved
over them.
• No: CAD surfaces and features do not highlight when the pointer is moved
over them.
Units
The Units preferences determine the display of decimal places in the
MEASUREMENT Window and angle units in the measurement file.
NOTE: See “Customizing Units” on page 8 to change the measurement file’s
units.
Angle Unit
The Angle Unit preference controls the level of detail in which the measurement
file displays angles.
Click in the drop-down window and select a value:
• Degrees-Minutes-Seconds: (Default) The measurement file displays angles in
Degree-Minute-Second format (example: 90°5’52.34”).
44
November 2010
• Degree: The measurement file displays angles in Degree format (example:
90.10°).
• Radians: The measurement file displays angles in radians (example: 1.2 rad).
Length Unit
The Length Unit preference controls the default unit of measurement
(Millimeters, Centimeters, Meters, or Inches). The default is Inches.
Click the Customize button to configure the decimal places for a unit of
measurement.
For more information, see “Unit of Measure and Coordinate System” on page 8.
Coordinate Format
The Coordinate Format preference controls the default coordinate system
(Cartesian, Spherical, or Cylindrical). The default is Cartesian.
For more information, see “Coordinate Systems” on page 8.
Decimal Places
Unit Vector Decimal Places
The Unit Vector Decimal Places preference controls the number of decimal
places displayed for any vector.
To change this preference, input a new number.
Construction
The Construction preferences govern the components visible in construction
dialog boxes.
Include CAD Objects

Indicates whether CAD objects will be visible in construction dialog boxes.
• Yes: (Default) CAD objects will be visible in construction dialog boxes.
• No: CAD objects will not be visible in construction dialog boxes.
Include Coordinate System Components

Indicates whether Coordinate System components will be visible in construction
drop-down boxes.
• Yes: (Default) Coordinate system components will be visible in construction
drop-down boxes.
45

November 2010
• No: Coordinate system components will not be visible in construction drop-
down boxes.
Include Ancestry Types

Indicates which feature types will be visible in construction dialog boxes. To
change this preference, click in the drop-down window and select a value:
• All: (Default) All feature types will be visible in construction dialog boxes.
• Measured: Only measured features will be visible in construction dialog
boxes.
• Nominal: Only nominal features will be visible in construction dialog boxes.
Smart Labeling
The Smart Labeling preference allows you to create and edit templates that
govern naming conventions of specific features and feature groups.
To change a naming template for a feature, click the field to the right of a feature
and edit the naming template.
Panels
The Panels preferences determine the appearance and configuration of the panels
in CAM2 Q.
Click Panels in the left window of the PREFERENCES window to see the Panels
preferences.
Measurement Window
The MEASUREMENT Window preferences control the colors, fonts, and font
colors of both the MEASUREMENT window and the FEATURE window.
DRO
The DRO preferences control the background color, font, font color of the
MEASUREMENT window, decimal places, and the option to use a special Laser
Tracker-related cylindrical coordinate system.
NOTE: If you select a very large font for the measurement window prompt, you
may need to move the prompt’s scroll bar to read the text.
Feature DRO
The FEATURE DRO preferences control the background color, font, font color of
the FEATURE window and colors of feature tolerances.
46

November 2010
QuickTools
Font Settings
The QUICKTOOLS preference controls the font and font color of the QUICKTOOLS
message window.
Features
Font Settings
The FEATURES preference controls the font and font color of the features as listed
in the FEATURES panel.
Device
The Device preference determines the default measurement mode, and whether
CAM2 Q displays the DEVICE CONTROL panel on startup.
Default Measurement Mode
This preference defines how the measurement device performs measurement.
• Single Point Mode: The measurement device takes a single point.
• Distance Interval Mode: The measurement device takes points at a specified
distance interval.
• Time Interval Mode: The measurement device takes points at a specified time
interval (milliseconds).
Control Panel
This preference controls the behavior of the DEVICE CONTROL panel on CAM2 Q
startup.
• Yes: The DEVICE CONTROL panel automatically appears when CAM2 Q is
launched.
• No: (Default) The DEVICE CONTROL panel does not automatically appear
when CAM2 Q is launched.
Measurement
The Measurement preferences determine the measurement workflow.
Click Measurement in the left window of the PREFERENCES window to see the
Measurement preferences.
47
November 2010
General
Auto Repeat Last Measurement
This preference automatically repeats the most recent measurement command in
Measure mode.
• Yes: (Default) Last measurement command auto repeats.
• No: Last measurement command does not auto repeat.
NOTE: This is only active in Measure Mode. See “Measure/Template Mode”
on page 79.
Auto-Recognize Features
This preference controls Automatic Feature Recognition. See “Automatic
Feature Recognition” on page 84.
NOTE: You must disable Arm as Mouse to use this feature. See “Use Arm as
Mouse” on page 48.
• Yes: CAM2 Q automatically recognizes features (specify maximum form).
• No: (Default) CAM2 Q does not automatically recognize features.
Always Show Measure UI
This preference controls the appearance of the MEASURE PROPERTIES panel. See
“Measure Properties” on page 80.
• Yes: After choosing a Measurement command you can edit the values in the
MEASURE PROPERTIES panel.
• No: (Default) The default, or last set, of Measure Properties values are
automatically applied to each new measurement.
NOTE: Some commands always display this panel regardless of this
preference.
Measurement Sound
This preference determines whether CAM2 Q makes a sound when a
measurement device takes measurement readings and end clicks.
If the form of the feature you are measuring is out of tolerance, you will also hear
a special sound to indicate the out of tolerance condition.
• Yes: (Default) CAM2 Q makes sounds when the measurement device takes
measurement readings and end clicks.
• No: CAM2 Q does not make sounds when the measurement device takes
measurement readings and end clicks.
Use Arm as Mouse
48
November 2010
The Use Arm as Mouse preference controls the interaction of the FaroArm and
the CAM2 Q software.
When enabled, the position of the probe controls the mouse pointer in CAM2 Q.
The standard mouse also controls the pointer. CAM2 Q recognizes which input
device is active and selects that device for the pointer control. After starting a
measurement command, CAM2 Q only accepts control from the current
measurement input device and blocks any input except digitized points.
Arm as Mouse temporarily disables during the ADD READINGS command.
• Yes: The FaroArm is used as a mouse.
• No: (Default) The FaroArm is not used as a mouse.
Default Compensation Method
This preference specifies the default compensation method for measured
features.
• Use Sampled End Click: (Default) The BACK button, or H key, will define
probe compensation for each feature.
• Auto: Features compensate automatically.
NOTE: Auto compensation uses the orientation position of the probe in each
reading. When using this option, collect readings with the probe as
perpendicular to the surface as possible.
• Measure Inside: Features automatically compensate out for a hole.
• Measure Outside: Features automatically compensate in for a stud.
• None: No probe compensation.
Default Measure Mode
This preference controls the automatic adding of readings to each Measurement
command.
• Measure Mode: (Default) After choosing a Measurement command, the
feature is added to the file, the Measurement Window appears, and you are
prompted to add readings to the feature. See “Measurement Window” on
page 85.
• Template Mode: After choosing a Measurement command, the feature is
added to the file but you are not prompted to add readings to the feature.
Measurement Completion Mode
49
November 2010
This preference specifies the method in which CAM2 Q completes measurement.
Measurement may be completed after recording a fixed number of readings or
recording an end click.
• End Click: (Default) Measurement completes after an end click.
• Fixed Number of Readings: Measurement completes after a fixed number of
readings specified using the Auto Complete preference. See “Auto Complete”
on page 53.
Apply Compensation in Feature Windows
This preference governs whether CAM2 Q applies compensation in feature
windows.
• Yes: CAM2 Q automatically applies compensation in feature windows. All
deviations will be relative to the compensated location.
• No: CAM2 Q does not automatically apply compensation in feature windows.
All deviations will be relative to the probe center.
• Ask: (Default) You are asked if you want CAM2 Q to apply compensation in
feature windows. Unless you check the “Never ask me again” check box, the
software will continue to prompt you to do so.
Projection Plane
Use Last Plane
This preference controls the automatic assigning of the last measured plane
feature to the Measure Properties of the current feature. See “Measure
• Yes: (Default) The last measured plane becomes the default plane of projection
for subsequent feature measurements.
• No: Subsequent feature measurements are established with new planes of
projection.
Allow Constructed Actual Planes
This preference allows the use of planes constructed from actual features to be
used as projection planes.
• Yes: Planes constructed from actual features are usable as projection planes.
• No: (Default) Planes constructed from actual features are not usable as
projection planes.
50
November 2010
Default
This preference defines the default plane for features that require a plane to solve.
• None: The feature solves using the readings for the feature and the plane.
• Define: (Default) A plane feature is added to the file for the feature. You must
add readings to the plane to solve the feature.
Other
Measure on CAD Side
This preference specifies whether measurements will be taken on the part’s CAD
side, so you can measure surface points on the material side of a part and
compare the points to the CAD model.
The material thickness for the compensation is extracted from the material
properties, specified in CAD PART PROPERTIES, from which the Surface Point is
extracted. See “CAD Part Properties” on page 61.
• Yes: (Default) Measurements will be taken on the part’s CAD side.
• No: Measurements will not be taken on the part’s CAD side.
NOTE: If this preference is set to Yes, only the probe radius will affect the
compensation.
Automatically Take Reading
This preference controls whether CAM2 Q automatically takes a reading when
measuring vector points. See “Measuring a Vector Point” on page 121 and
“Measuring a Home In Point” on page 116.
• Yes: CAM2 Q automatically takes a reading when measuring vector points
(specify Home In Zone size).
• No: (Default) CAM2 Q does not automatically take a reading when measuring
vector points.
Home In Zone Size
This preference sets the default home in zone size. This value, in conjunction
with the point and vector, defines a cylindrical zone around the point within
which the user is expected to measure the point. The default value is 5mm.
To change this preference, click the right column and input a new number.
51

November 2010
Measurement Mode
Auto-Switch to Measure Mode
This preference governs the behavior of the software when you run the ADD
READINGS command while in TEMPLATE mode.
• Yes: The software will automatically switch to MEASURE mode and you
proceed to measure features.
• No: The software will not automatically switch to MEASURE mode, yet you
will be prompted to measure features.
• Ask: (Default) You are asked to switch to MEASURE mode. Unless you
check the “Never ask me again” check box, the software will continue to
prompt you each time you attempt to measure a feature in TEMPLATE mode.
Automatically Measure Features
This preference governs the behavior of the software when you switch to from
TEMPLATE to MEASURE mode.
• Yes: The software will automatically add readings to all the measured features
in the file.
• No: The software will not automatically add readings to all the measured
features in the file.
• Ask: (Default) You are asked if you want to add readings to all the measured
features in the file. Unless you check the “Never ask me again” check box, the
software will continue to prompt you each time you switch to from
TEMPLATE to MEASURE mode.
Include Previously Measured Features
This preference specifies whether the Measure All command includes previously
measured features.
• Yes: The software will include previously measured features when the
Measure All command is invoked.
• No: The software will exclude previously measured features when the
Measure All command is invoked.
• Ask: (Default) You are asked if you want to include previously measured
features in the Measure All command. Unless you check the “Never ask me
52
November 2010
again” check box, the software will continue to prompt you each time you
invoke the Measure All command.
Alignment
The Alignments preferences determine the behavior of iterative alignments.
Maximum Iterations
This preference controls the maximum iterations for iterative alignments.
Iterative Alignment Tolerance
This preference controls the default tolerance for iterative alignments.
Tracker
RMS Threshold
This preference specifies the upper limit of the Root Mean Square (RMS)
threshold to define acceptable reading quality. RMS values are visible in the
Measurement Window.
NOTE: This preference applies to the Laser Tracker only.
Auto Nominal
This preference controls the automatic association of the nearest nominal to a
measured feature - providing it falls within the tolerance zone.
NOTE: This function is not active until an Alignment has been created. See
“Create and Edit Alignments” on page 190.
• Automatically Associate Nominal: Determines whether CAM2 Q
automatically associates nominals to measured features.
• Yes: (Default) Nominals are automatically associated to measured
features.
• No: Nominals are not automatically associated to measured features.
• Orientation: The orientation tolerance for auto nominal. The default is 5°.
• Position: The position tolerance for auto nominal. The default is 0.1.
• Size: The size tolerance for auto nominal. The default is 0.1.
Auto Complete
This preference specifies the number of points per feature type to automatically
complete a measurement. When this number of readings is reached, the
measurement process terminates.
53
November 2010
When used in conjunction with automatic compensation (Default Compensation
Method set to Auto), auto complete provides for a streamlined measurement
process.
NOTE: Measurement Completion Mode must be enabled to use this functionality.
See “Measurement Completion Mode” on page 49.
To change the number of auto complete points for a feature:
• Click the number field to the right of a feature.
• Edit the number of points for the feature.
CAD
The CAD preferences determine the way CAM2 Q displays CAD files.
Click CAD in the left window of the PREFERENCES window to see the CAD
preferences.
Surface Stitching Option

This preference specifies the method in which CAD surfaces are “stitched” to
minimize error between feature lines.
• Match Geometry: CAD surfaces are stitched according to geometric data.
• Match Topology: (Default) CAD surfaces are stitched according to
topological structures.
CAD Part
The CAD Part preferences define properties for all loaded CAD parts.
Enabled
Indicates whether the CAD model is available for measurements and alignments.
• Yes: (Default) The CAD model is available for measurements and alignments.
• No: The CAD model is not available for measurements and alignments.
NOTE: If this preference is set to No, CAD contents will not considered for
picking or measurements.
Visible
Indicates whether the CAD part will be visible in the CAD view.
• Yes: (Default) The CAD part will be visible in the CAD view.
• No: The CAD part will not be visible in the CAD view.
54

November 2010
Material Composition
Indicates the default material composition of the CAD. To change this
preference, click in the drop-down window and select a value. The default value
is Steel.
Material Direction
Indicates the default CAD compensation. To change this preference, click in the
drop-down window and select a value:
• Above CAD Surface: (Default) The material begins at the sampled surface
and extends upward in a positive direction relative to the surface normal, i.e.
the CAD surface represents the “bottom face” of the material.
• Below CAD Surface: The material begins at the CAD surface and extends
downward in a negative direction relative to the surface normal, i.e. the CAD
surface represents the “top face” of the material.
Material Thickness
Indicates the default thickness of the CAD material. The default value is 3mm.
CAD Import
Translate Hidden Entities
Indicates whether the entities on hidden CAD file layers will be included in CAD
translation.
• Yes: Entities on hidden CAD file layers will be included in CAD translation.
• No: (Default) Entities on hidden CAD file layers will not be included in CAD
translation.
Healing
This preference enables healing of CAD model errors when importing CAD data.
You can specify the balance between quality and system performance. Large
CAD files may warrant a decrease in healing quality to gain an increase in
system performance and a reduced healing time.
To configure the healing quality, click in the drop-down window and select a
value:
• None: Healing is not enabled.
• Better Speed: (Default) The CAD heals in lesser detail with the best
performance enhancement.
• Better Quality: The CAD heals in best detail with no performance
enhancement. However, this can sometimes double the import time.
55

November 2010
Tolerance
The Tolerance preferences determine tolerance behavior and the default
tolerances for each feature type.
Click Tolerance in the left window of the PREFERENCES window to see the
Tolerance preferences.
General
Copy GD&T Tolerances
This preference specifies whether to include GD&T data when copying
tolerances from one feature to another (or others).
To change this preference, click in the drop-down window and select a value:
• Yes: The software will include GD&T data when copying tolerances.
• No: The software will not include GD&T data when copying tolerances.
• Ask: (Default) You are asked if you want to include GD&T data when copying
tolerances. Unless you check the “Never ask me again” check box, the
software will continue to prompt you each time you copy tolerances.
Datum Suggestions
This preference specifies the number of datums that the user will be allowed to
choose from when assigning datums to a feature. The default value is 3.
NOTE: CAM2 Q suggests the next N available Datum letters. For example, if the
user has elected 3 datum suggestions and has already assigned Datums A and D,
the next 3 datums suggested will be B, C and E.
Geometries
Tolerances associate to a geometry type regardless of how that geometry type is
created in the measurement file.
To change a default tolerance:
• Click the arrow to the left of a feature type to expand or collapse the tolerance
information.
• When collapsed:
• The value displayed represents a symmetrical tolerance for all properties
of that feature type.
• You can type in a value to override all tolerance values of all properties of
that feature type. For example, if a user enters 0.01mm for a circle, it will
define a +- 0.01mm tolerance for all circle properties.
56

November 2010
• You can associate a DIN or ISO tolerance classification per feature type.
When associating a tolerance classification to a feature, it will apply to all
applicable properties of that feature.
NOTE: The collapsed text will change to <custom> if any one value differs, in
absolute value, to any other for that feature type.
• When expanded:
• All properties of the type of feature are displayed.
• Two boxes contain the lower and upper tolerance for each property. Enter
tolerance values as appropriate.
• Check boxes indicate whether properties are enabled or disabled for
tolerancing. Place a check in the checkbox to enable; clear the checkbox to
disable.
• Click APPLY TO ALL to apply the modified tolerances to all features in the
measurement file.
NOTE: Geometry tolerance statistics (Maximum Error, Minimum Error, Form,
etc.) are the same for all feature types.
GD&T
Tolerances associate to a GD&T type. To change a default GD&T tolerance:
• Click the arrow to the right of a GD&T tolerance to expand or collapse the
tolerance information.
• When collapsed:
• The value displayed represents a symmetrical tolerance for all properties
of that GD&T type.
• You can associate a DIN or ISO tolerance classification per feature type.
When associating a tolerance classification to a feature, it will apply to all
applicable properties of that feature.
NOTE: The collapsed text will change to <custom> if any one value differs, in
absolute value, to any other for that feature type.
• When expanded:
• All properties of the type of GD&T tolerance are displayed.
• Two boxes contain the lower and upper tolerance for each property. Enter
tolerance values as appropriate.
57

November 2010
• Check boxes indicate whether properties are enabled or disabled for
tolerancing. Place a check in the checkbox to enable; clear the checkbox to
disable.
• Click APPLY TO ALL to apply the modified GD&T tolerances to all features
in the measurement file.
Report
The Report preference determines default formatting for reports, including logo
selection.
Click Report in the left window of the PREFERENCES window to see the Report
preferences.
Auto Report
Generation From Selection
This preference governs the automatic generation of a report template with
features selected in the CAD view. With this preference enabled, the user the user
highlights the features that are required in the report while still in CAD View.
When the user switches to the REPORT tab, the Report opens with the selected
features and data formatted for the feature components specified in the FEATURE
INFORMATION panel.
To change this preference, click in the drop-down window and select a value.
• Always: CAM2 Q will create a new report template each time the user
switches to the REPORT tab with one or more features selected.
• Ask: CAM2 Q will prompt the user whether to create a new report template
each time the user switches to the REPORT tab with one or more features
selected.
• No: CAM2 Q will not generate a report template.
• Once: (Default) CAM2 Q will create the report template once. All subsequent
changes to the REPORT tab will not result in the generation of a new report.
Default Format
With Alignment
This preference selects the report format that is used after an Alignment is
created.
58
November 2010
Without Alignment
This preference selects the report format that is used before an Alignment is
created.
Logo
Image Location
This preference selects the logo file for the report template.
To change this file, click the right column and select a different file.
Header
Info
INFORMATION
INFORMATION, INFORMATION,
Document Header Information

The DOCUMENT HEADER INFORMATION command allows you to view

and edit the current measurement file’s header information in the DOCUMENT
HEADER INFORMATION window, including Part Name, Session Name, Note,
Operator, Company Name, Address, Telephone Number, E-mail Address, Date,
Time, Ambient Temperature, and Active Alignment Error.
The information entered here also appears on CAM2 Q reports. For more
information, see “Reporting” on page 235.
In the DOCUMENT HEADER INFORMATION window, you can:
• Control the visibility of each item:
1 Clear the Visible checkbox to the left of an item to hide the item from view.
2 Place a check in the Visible checkbox to show the item.
• Change the values for each item:
1 Select the Header item
2 Click in the VALUE column and enter a new value.
3 Press ENTER to accept the changes.
NOTE: The values remain for every new file until you change them.
• Add custom Header items:
1 Click the ADD NEW button in the upper left corner of the DOCUMENT
PROPERTIES dialog box
2 Enter a name for the item.
3 Click in the VALUE column and enter a new value
4 Press ENTER to accept the changes.
59

November 2010
• Remove a custom Header item:
1 Select the Header item.
2 Click the DELETE button to remove the item from the list.
NOTE: You can only delete custom Header items.
• Reorder the Header items:
1 Select the Header item.
2 Click the UP and DOWN arrow keys to move the item up and down the list.
User Profiles
The USER PROFILES command accesses the USER PROFILE SELECTION
window. Use this window to select, load, save, and delete custom profiles.
User profiles contain custom screen layout settings, including the ordering and
position of control panels. There is a default CAM2 Q profile and layouts similar
to prior CAM2 versions (X and 4.0).
NOTE: When CAM2 Q loads the first time, you are prompted to select a User
Profile from the USER PROFILE SELECTION window. This profile will remain
effective each time you open a measurement file until you change it in the USER
PROFILE SELECTION window. The default profiles cannot be deleted; only
custom-made profiles may be deleted.
Figure 3-2 User Profile Selection Window
NOTE: The default user profiles shown above are not available in all language
versions of CAM2 Q.
60
November 2010
Properties
Select a Feature and use the PROPERTIES command to see and change
parameters of any feature or CAD part. See “Select a Feature” on page 277. This
command is also available in the Shortcut Menus. See “Shortcut Menus” on
page 254.
You can change the properties of measured features. See “Measure Properties”
on page 80.
CAUTION: While you can not alter the actual results of a measured feature,
adjusting these parameters can alter how the results calculate and display.
You can change the properties of constructed and nominal features. For more
information, see specific feature section later in this book.
NOTE: In the dialog boxes the CREATE button is replaced be the MODIFY
button. After changing any parameter, click the MODIFY button to save the
changes.
You can change the CAD Part Properties.
You can view the flipped vector state of the feature or CAD part by checking the
Vector Flipped checkbox.
CAD Part Properties

Use the CAD PART PROPERTIES command to access the EDIT CAD PART
PROPERTIES window. The EDIT CAD PART PROPERTIES window contains all
loaded CAD parts and the material properties for each CAD part.
Change the CAD Part properties preferences so that all CAD parts add with the
same properties. See “CAD Part” on page 54.
Composition: The thermal properties of the CAD material for use by
alignments.
Thickness: The thickness of the CAD material (in measurement file units).
Direction: The normal direction of the CAD surface.
• Above CAD Surface: The material begins at the sampled surface and extends
upward in a positive direction relative to the surface normal; the CAD surface
represents the “bottom face” of the material.
61
November 2010
• Below CAD Surface: The material begins at the CAD surface and extends
downward in a negative direction relative to the surface normal; the CAD
surface represents the “top face” of the material.
NOTE: As you measure the part, you can switch between these surfaces using
the Measure on CAD Side command. For more information, see “Measure on
CAD Side” on page 80.
Surface: The surface display color.
Wireframe: The wireframe display color.
Mirror On: The axis on which to mirror the CAD.
NOTE: Mirroring is a state of the CAD part, and must be either enabled or
disabled (not both). To view the mirrored and unmirrored CAD part
simultaneously, load the part twice and mirror one instance.
Visible: Indicates whether the CAD part is visible in the CAD view.
Enabled: Indicates whether the CAD model is available for use by
measurements and alignments.
NOTE: If the CAD is not enabled, it is not considered for picking or
measurements.
62

November 2010

The VIEW menu contains all the commands that affect how you see the contents
of your measurement file on the screen. It also allows you to control what you see
on the screen, and the user interface.
Status Bar
Displays or hides the Status Bar located at the bottom of the screen.
Toolbars
Select VIEW < TOOLBARS to see a submenu of the primary CAM2 Q toolbars.
Select or clear a menu item to show or hide a toolbar.
Standard
The Standard toolbar contains the NEW, OPEN, IMPORT CAD FILES, SAVE,
UNDO, REDO, and EDIT PREFERENCES& SETTINGS buttons.
Measurement
The Measurement toolbar contains the non-feature Measure icons. Use the
menus or the FEATURE CREATOR panel to select feature commands.
Projection Plane
The Projection Plane toolbar contains a drop-down window with the planes in the
measurement file. Select the Active Projection plane from this list.
Alignments
The Alignments toolbar contains a drop-down window with all alignments in the
measurement file, and the MANAGE ALIGNMENTS icon. Click the MANAGE
ALIGNMENTS icon to access the ALIGNMENTS panel.
Coordinate Systems
The Coordinate Systems toolbar contains a drop-down window with all active
coordinate systems in the measurement file and the COORDINATE SYSTEMS
WIZARD icon. Click the COORDINATE SYSTEMS WIZARD icon to access the
COORDINATE SYSTEMS WIZARD panel.
63
November 2010
Device Control
The Device Control toolbar contains the Device Control Panel button.
QuickTools
The QUICKTOOLS toolbar contains the NEW PROGRAM, PLAY, PAUSE, STOP,
RECORD, and EXPORT buttons.
Customize
Select VIEW < TOOLBARS < CUSTOMIZE to add or delete CAM2 Q menu
commands from toolbars and configure shortcut keys (Hot Keys).
NOTE: Right-clicking any toolbar also opens the TOOLBARS shortcut menu.
Commands Tab
On the COMMANDS tab, left-click any toolbar name or any other category in
the CATEGORIES window.
This displays a list of each command in the selected category or toolbar.
Clicking on a command in the COMMANDS window displays its tool tip in the
DESCRIPTION window.
Toolbars Tab
On the TOOLBARS tab, you can display a toolbar on the screen or remove it
from the screen, create new toolbars, rename them, or delete toolbars that you
had previously created.
• Click the RESET ALL button to set all of the CAM2 Q toolbars back to the
defaults. This does not change any custom toolbars you create.
• Double click any toolbar name, or click the check box, to display or hide it.
• Click the Show Text Labels check box to displays the command name under
each icon on the toolbar.
To create a new toolbar:
1 Click NEW on the TOOLBARS tab.
2 Type a name in the TOOLBAR NAME window and click OK. A new toolbar is
displayed on the screen.
3 Click the COMMANDS tab and select any category and drag any command
(icon) to the new toolbar.
4 Click the CLOSE button to finish.
64
November 2010
To rename a toolbar:
1 On the TOOLBARS tab select any toolbar name and click the RENAME
button.
2 In the TOOLBAR NAME window type another name for the toolbar and click
OK.
To delete a toolbar:
1 On the TOOLBARS tab select any toolbar you created and click the DELETE
button.
2 Click YES to confirm or NO to cancel.
Keyboard Tab
On the KEYBOARD tab, you can change the accelerator, or hot key, for any
CAM2 Q command.
• Click the RESET ALL button to set all of the CAM2 Q Hot Keys back to the
defaults.
To create a new hot key:
1 Select a command category from the CATEGORY drop-down combo box.
2 Select a command from the COMMAND list.
3 Click into the PRESS NEW SHORTCUT KEY box and press a key or combination
of keys.
4 Click the ASSIGN button.
To remove a hot key:
1 Select a command category from the CATEGORY drop-down combo box.
2 Select a command from the COMMAND list.
3 Select a hot key from the CURRENT KEY list.
4 Click the REMOVE button.
Menu Tab
On the MENU tab, you can select options for the CAM2 Q menus.
Click the RESET button to reset the CAM2 Q menus.
Menu options:
1 Select a option category from the MENU ANIMATIONS drop-down combo
box.
2 Select the MENU SHADOWS check box to enable graphical shadows on the
menus.
65
November 2010
Options Tab
On the OPTIONS tab, you can select display options for the CAM2 Q menus and
toolbars.
Toolbar
• Display, or hide screen tips (ToolTips).
• Show, or hide the hot keys in the screen tip.
• Select large icons, or clear the check box for small toolbar icons.
• Click the VISUALIZATIONS button to apply Visualizations, or “Skins” to the
menus and toolbars.
Personalized Menus and Toolbars
• Enable or disable the number of commands that show in each menu. When
active, the menu system shows only recently used commands.
• If MENUS SHOW RECENTLY USED COMMANDS FIRST is enabled,
select the check box, and after a short delay the full menu displays.
• Click the RESET MY USAGE DATA button to clear the list of recently used
commands.
Panels
Select VIEW < PANELS to see a submenu of the primary CAM2 Q control
panels. Select or clear a menu item to show or hide a panel.
Messages
The MESSAGES panel contains informational messages relating to the
measurement file.
Use the VIEW < PANELS < MESSAGE BAR FONT... command to change the
size of the font in the MESSAGES panel.
Features
The FEATURES panel details each feature in the file under Constructions, CAD,
Measurements, and Dimensions headings. For more information, see “Features
Feature Creator
The FEATURE CREATOR panel contains feature creation commands grouped by
Measure, Key-In, Pick From CAD, Construct, Dimension, and Tracker headings.
66
November 2010
Click a heading to access the commands. See “Measure Menu” on page 79,
“Key-In Menu” on page 131, “Pick From CAD Menu” on page 141, “Construct
Menu” on page 147, and “Dimension Menu” on page 171.
Feature Properties
The FEATURE PROPERTIES panel contains editable name, comments, projection
plane (if the feature is not a plane), probe compensation, and depth scanning
information for a selected feature. For more information, see “Measure
QuickTools
The QUICKTOOLS panel contains commands for creating, editing, and executing
QuickTools files. For more information, see “QuickTools” on page 223.
Active DRO
The ACTIVE DRO panel contains the current location of the measuring device’s
probe and updates as the probe moves through space. The numerical setup of the
DRO is a preference. See “Units” on page 44.
For more information, see “Measurement Window” on page 85.
Alignments
The ALIGNMENTS panel contains commands for creating, editing, importing,
exporting, and deleting alignments. For more information, see “Create and Edit
Alignments” on page 190.
67
November 2010
GD&T Tolerances
The GD&T TOLERANCES panel allows you to compare part measurements to one
or more datum(s) to ensure that specific design and tolerance requirements are
being met.
Figure 4-1 GD&T Tolerances
Switch Toolbar orientation.

Add a new GD&T Tolerance.
Delete the selected GD&T Tolerance.
Statistic Detail slider (controlling appearance of Orientation, Standard
Information, Tolerance bar, and Deviation).
GD&T Tolerance.
Tolerance value.
Condition for Position Tolerance.
NOTE: Some GD&T tolerances may be added to a feature even if it does not have
a nominal. For more information, see “GD&T Tolerances” on page 213.
Feature Information
The FEATURE INFORMATION panel contains a list of nominals and tolerancing
information for a selected feature (replicated in feature labels). See “Nominals
and Tolerances” on page 96.
NOTE: Only the tolerance value itself may be edited; any additional data used to
compute the GD&T Tolerance can only be edited in the GD&T panel. For more
information, see “GD&T Tolerances” on page 213.
68
November 2010
Edit CAD Part Properties

The EDIT CAD PART PROPERTIES panel contains all loaded CAD parts, the
material properties of each CAD part, and controls to modify the global
properties of any CAD part.
Figure 4-2 CAD Part Properties panel

For more information, see “CAD Part Properties” on page 61.
Readings
The READINGS panel contains a list of measurement readings and properties
(including XYZ, Deviation from Fit, Device Position, and Probe) for a selected
feature. For more information, see “Readings” on page 95.
Feature Properties
The FEATURE PROPERTIES panel contains the properties of any feature or CAD
part in the measurement file. For more information, see “Properties” on
page 61.
Device Manager
The DEVICE MANAGER panel contains a list and properties of active devices and
device positions. For more information, see “Device Manager” on page 197.
Manage Reset Points

The MANAGE RESET POINTS panel allows you to view, select, and manage and
reset points. For more information, see “Manage Reset Points” on page 205.
69
November 2010
x
Full Screen
x
Select VIEW < FULL SCREEN to enlarge the CAD tab to fit the entire screen.
You can also press the SHIFT + ALT + ENTER hot key on the keyboard.
• Press the CLOSE FULL SCREEN button or the ESC key to exit the full screen
mode.
Show Feature Window

Use the SHOW FEATURE WINDOW command to display a Feature window
for a selected feature. You can also press the D key on the keyboard.
Use a Feature window to:
• See the live deviations of a specific feature based on the current location of the
probe, including normal (dN) and radial (dR) deviations for circles and
cylinders.
• In an assembly, guide a part into position using the coordinate values of a
specific feature on the part.
NOTE: Each Feature window remains until individually closed.
Configure the Feature window using the three controls at the top of the window:
1 Show Options - In the upper left corner of the window, click the SHOW
OPTIONS drop-down and select, or deselect, values to show or hide different
deviation values.
2 Probe Compensation - In the middle is the PROBE COMPENSATION
button. Click this button to see the deviation values relative to the compensated
probe location; click again to see the deviation values relative to the probe
center.
NOTE: The Apply Compensation in Feature Windows preference determines
whether probe compensation should be applied to all future Feature windows.
See “Apply Compensation in Feature Windows” on page 50.
3 Lock to Feature - To the right is the LOCK TO FEATURE button. When
enabled, the Feature window stays locked to the current feature. When not
enabled, the Feature window will float to the closest feature (not including
CAD).
The deviation values change color:
• Green - the deviation is in tolerance.
70
November 2010
• Blue - the deviation is out of tolerance in the negative direction.
• Red - the deviation is out of tolerance in the positive direction.
NOTE: The values are uncompensated except for the 3D value for surfaces.
+
-
Feature Readings
Use the Feature Readings command to show/hide points that represent the
measured readings. You can also access this command by right-clicking on a
feature.
You can change the size of the feature reading point in the preferences command.
See “Point Size” on page 43.
Select a feature from the FEATURES panel, or the CAD View, and click this
command. The readings change color:
• Green (Pass) - reading is in tolerance
• Red - reading is above the upper tolerance
• Blue - reading is below the lower tolerance
The color shows the deviation of each reading to the feature, and uses the Form
tolerance. See “Tolerance” on page 56.
Feature Whiskers
Whiskers are a single line that visually represent distance data of a feature. There
are two types of whiskers:
• Whiskers - The Whisker shows the deviation of each reading to the feature.
• Nominal Whiskers - The Whisker shows the deviation of the measured feature
to its nominal.
NOTE: Nominal Whiskers will not display unless there is a nominal associated
to the measured feature.
You can change the scale of the feature whiskers in the Preferences and Settings
menu. See “Whisker Scale” on page 42.
Select a feature from the FEATURES panel, or the CAD View, and click either
Whisker command. The whiskers change color according to tolerance condition:
• Green - feature is in tolerance
• Red - measurement is above the upper tolerance
• Blue - measurement is below the lower tolerance
71
November 2010
You can also access this command by right-clicking on a feature.
Decrease
Select VIEW < FEATURE WHISKERS < DECREASE to decrease the whisker
scale. You can also press the MINUS SIGN (-) hot key on the keyboard.
Increase
Select VIEW < FEATURE WHISKERS < INCREASE to increase the whisker
scale. You can also press the PLUS SIGN (+) hot key on the keyboard.
-
Whiskers
Select VIEW < FEATURE WHISKERS < WHISKERS to show/hide whiskers
for each reading in a feature.
Select a feature from the FEATURES panel, or the CAD View, and select this
command. The whiskers change color according to tolerance condition:
• Red - reading is above the upper tolerance
• Blue - reading is below the lower tolerance
The color shows the deviation of each reading to the feature, and uses the
MinError and MaxError tolerance. See “Nominals and Tolerances” on page 96.
N +
-
Nominal Whiskers
Select VIEW < FEATURE WHISKERS < NOMINAL WHISKERS to show/
hide X, Y, and Z whisker lines that represent the distance from a measured/
constructed feature to its nominal feature. You must have a nominal feature
associated to the feature. See “Nominals and Tolerances” on page 96. You can
change the scale of the feature whiskers in the preferences command. See
“Whisker Scale” on page 42.
Select a feature from the FEATURES panel, or the CAD View, and select this
command. The whiskers change color according to tolerance condition:
72
November 2010
The color shows the deviation of each reading to the feature, and uses the X, Y,
and Z tolerance. See “Nominals and Tolerances” on page 96.
Pan
Each PAN command moves the view window around the CAD tab. You can also
use the AERIAL3DVIEW window. See “Screen Layout” on page 10.
Left
Select VIEW < PAN < LEFT to move the view window to the left by a fixed
increment. You can also press the LEFT ARROW hot key on the keyboard.
Right
Select VIEW < PAN < RIGHT to move the current view window to the right by
a fixed increment. You can also press the RIGHT ARROW hot key on the
keyboard.
Up
Select VIEW < PAN < UP to move the current view window up by a fixed
increment. You can also press the UP ARROW hot key on the keyboard.
Down
Select VIEW < PAN < DOWN to move the current view window down by a
fixed increment. You can also press the DOWN ARROW hot key on the
keyboard.
Zoom
Each ZOOM command increases or decreases the viewing size of the CAD tab.
73
November 2010
Zoom All
Select VIEW < ZOOM < ALL to change the view so that all features in the CAD
tab are visible. You can also press the E hot key on the keyboard.
NOTE: CAM2 Q does not include the World Coordinate System (WCS) when
computing the extent of the CAD view.
Zoom In
Select VIEW < ZOOM < IN to enlarge the view on the screen by a fixed
increment. You can also press the I hot key on the keyboard.
NOTE: Use the IN - FINE command to enlarge the view by a smaller
increment.
Alternate hot keys for ZOOM IN are on the numeric keypad:
PLUS SIGN (+) for coarse.
CTRL + PLUS SIGN (+) for fine.
Zoom Out
Select VIEW < ZOOM < OUT to decrease the view on the screen by a fixed
increment. You can also press the O hot key on the keyboard.
NOTE: Use the OUT - FINE command to decrease the view by a smaller
increment.
Alternate hot keys for ZOOM OUT are on the numeric keypad:
MINUS SIGN (-) for coarse.
CTRL + MINUS SIGN (-) for fine.
Zoom To Window
Select VIEW < ZOOM < ZOOM TO WINDOW to zoom to a user-defined
window of the CAD view. You can also press the W key on the keyboard.
1 Move the mouse pointer to the area of the screen where you want to begin.
2 Click and hold the LEFT MOUSE button.
3 Drag the mouse to create a window for the view.
You can also use the keyboard and mouse to zoom the view without using this
command. To zoom to a window:
74
November 2010
1 Press and hold the SHIFT key on the keyboard.
2 Click and hold the LEFT MOUSE button.
3 Drag the mouse to create a window for the view.
5 Release the SHIFT key to end this command.
Preset Views
Each PRESET VIEW command rotates the view to a fixed position. All VIEW
commands respond to the current alignment.
+X/-X View
Select VIEW < PRESET VIEWS < +X/-X VIEW to set the positive XZ plane
parallel to the screen. Select the command again to set the negative XZ plane.
You can also press the 4 hot key on the keyboard.
+Y/-Y View
Select VIEW < PRESET VIEWS < +Y/-Y VIEW to set the YZ plane parallel to
the screen. Select the command again to set the negative YZ plane. You can also
press the 5 hot key on the keyboard.
+Z/-Z View
Select VIEW < PRESET VIEWS < +Z/-Z VIEW to set the XY plane parallel to
the screen. Select the command again to set the negative XY plane. You can also
press the 6 hot key on the keyboard.
Isometric SE
Select VIEW < PRESET VIEWS < ISOMETRIC to set a southeast isometric
view looking at the current alignment parallel to the screen. You can also press
the 7 hot key on the keyboard.
75
November 2010
Isometric SW
Select VIEW < PRESET VIEWS < ISOMETRIC to set a southwest isometric
Isometric NE
Select VIEW < PRESET VIEWS < ISOMETRIC to set a northeast isometric
Isometric NW
Select VIEW < PRESET VIEWS < ISOMETRIC to set a northwest isometric
Reset View
Select VIEW < RESET VIEW to return the view to the default settings of your
current preset view. You can also press the R hot key on the keyboard.
Shaded View
Select VIEW < SHADED VIEW to set the current view to a shaded view. The
Shaded view is the default view. You can also press the S hot key on the keyboard
to switch between the three shaded and wireframe views.
76
November 2010
Wireframe View
Select VIEW < WIREFRAME VIEW to set the current view to a wireframe, or
non-shaded view. You can also press the S hot key on the keyboard to switch
between the three shaded and wireframe views.
Shaded + Wireframe View

Select VIEW < SHADED + WIREFRAME VIEW to set the current view to a
shaded view with a wireframe. You can also press the S hot key on the keyboard
to switch between the three shaded and wireframe views.
Cycle Shading
Select VIEW < CYCLE SHADING to switch between the three shaded and
wireframe views. You can also press the S hot key on the keyboard.
Grid
Select VIEW < GRID to show or hide the grid in the current view. You can also
press the NUMBER SIGN (#) hot key on the keyboard. The grid is only visible in
the +X/-X View, +Y/-Y View or +Z/-Z View Preset Views. See “Preset Views”
on page 75.
Labels
Use the Labels commands to arrange, show, hide, and control the detail level of
labels.
Arrange Labels
Select VIEW < ARRANGE LABELS to “best fit” the on-screen labels in the
current view. See “Labels” on page 94. You can also press the L hot key on the
keyboard.
Add or remove on-screen labels by right-clicking a feature and selecting LABEL.
77
November 2010
NOTE: You can configure the appearance of labels and enable them to auto-
arrange via the Display preferences in the EDIT < PREFERENCES &
SETTINGS menu. For more information, see “Display” on page 40.
Show All Labels

Select VIEW < SHOW ALL LABELS to make all on-screen labels visible in the
current view.
Hide All Labels

Select VIEW < HIDE ALL LABELS to remove all on-screen labels from the
current view.
Simple Labels
Select VIEW < SIMPLE LABELS to reduce the detail of all on-screen labels in
the current view.
Detailed Labels
Select VIEW < DETAILED LABELS to expand the detail of all on-screen labels
in the current view.
Export to Image
Select VIEW < EXPORT TO IMAGE to export the current view to an image file
(PNG, JPEG, or BMP format).
78
November 2010

One section of the FEATURE CREATOR panel, on the right-hand side of your
screen, contains the MEASURE commands. These commands are also available
in the MEASURE menu across the top of the screen.
• Click a command to add a measure feature to the measurement file. Click
multiple times to quickly add features.
• Some MEASURE commands also are assigned to Hot Keys on your keyboard.
See “Hot Keys” on page 251.
NOTE: When describing functions of the MEASURE menu, the terms
measuring and digitizing are used interchangeably.
Measure/Template Mode
The Measure/Template Mode command sets the behavior of the Measure
commands. Every Measure command adds a feature to the measurement file, and
this command enables (Measure Mode) or disables (Template Mode) the
automatic adding of readings to the feature. See “Add Readings” on page 129.
The default mode is a preference. See “Default Measure Mode” on page 49.
In the MEASUREMENT toolbar these modes are represented by a single toolbar
button. If the toolbar button is selected (highlighted) MEASURE mode is active.
When TEMPLATE mode is active, a red border and “Template Mode” text
appear around the CAD tab of the MAIN window. For more information, see
“Screen Layout” on page 10.
Measure Mode
Select a Measurement command from the FEATURE CREATOR, or the
MEASURE menu, and that measured feature adds to the measurement file. The
current device’s MEASUREMENT Window automatically opens and you can begin
to add readings to the feature. Select multiple measurement commands and each
will be added to the MEASUREMENT Window in the order that you select the
commands.
Template Mode
Select a Measurement command from the FEATURE CREATOR, or the
MEASURE menu, and that measured feature adds to the measurement file. Add
79
November 2010
readings to the feature manually with the ADD READINGS command. For more
information, see “Add Readings” on page 129.
Measure on CAD Side

The Measure on CAD Side command enables you to measure a side of a part
with a common material thickness (plastics, sheet metal, etc.) that you cannot
touch with your measurement device.
Specify the composition and global thickness of your material by editing the
CAD Part Properties of your CAD file. See “CAD Part Properties” on page 61.
Measure Properties
Most measured features have three properties: Select Plane, Measure on CAD
Side, and Probe Compensation. Plane projection features also have Depth
Scanning properties. Properties for other features are described later in this
chapter.
You can edit the properties of an existing measured feature:
• Select a feature from the FEATURES panel or the CAD View.
• Click EDIT < PROPERTIES. You can also right-click the feature in the
FEATURES panel and select PROPERTIES from the shortcut menu. In the
FEATURE PROPERTIES panel you can:
• Edit the name.
• Select or clear the Measure on CAD Side check box.
• Select a projection plane (2D features only).
• Change the probe compensation.
By default, the FEATURE PROPERTIES panel does not appear during each measure
command. See “Always Show Measure UI” on page 48.
NOTE: Some features always require you to set properties before creating the
feature and ignore this preference.
Comments
The FEATURE PROPERTIES panel contains a Comments field into which you can
type a textual comment. Features with comments are identified by a comment
icon in the FEATURES panel. You can view the comment quickly by moving the
pointer over the icon.
80
November 2010
NOTE: You can include your comment in the feature’s label by selecting the
Show Comments In Label check box.
Select Plane
All two-dimensional (2D) features are entities in which the digitized readings are
projected to a plane. All measurement readings are projected onto this plane
before best fit calculations are started.
In the Active Projection Plane toolbar, click the drop-down menu and select a
option:
• Select a Plane. See “Select a Plane” on page 277.
NOTE: Constructed actual planes may be available. A preference controls this
option. See “Allow Constructed Actual Planes” on page 50.
• Choosing <Define> add an additional feature to the measurement file. You
will digitize a plane before you digitize the points of the feature. Note the
messages in the Prompt area in the Measurement Window for the active
device. See “Measuring a Plane” on page 101.
• Choosing NONE uses the same points of the feature to create a plane.
See “Default” on page 51, and “Use Last Plane” on page 50.
2D FEATURES: circles, ellipses, slots, 2D lines, planar points, high/low points,
and 2D polylines.
Figure 5-1 Digitized readings projected to a plane
To offset a projection plane, first measure a plane and then construct a parallel
plane. See “Construct Plane: By Offset” on page 149.
81
November 2010
Measure on CAD Side

Select this check box if you are measuring a side of a part with a common
material thickness (plastics, sheet metal, etc.) that you cannot touch with your
measurement device.
Set the composition and global thickness of your material by editing the CAD
Part Properties of your CAD file. See “CAD Part Properties” on page 61.
Probe Compensation
The coordinates of all readings digitized with a spherical probe are located at the
center of the probe. CAM2 Q calculates for the difference between the center and
circumference of the probe when you press the BACK button, or H key. There
are five methods to define the probe compensation:
• Auto: automatically compensates using the orientation position of the probe
in each reading. When using this option, collect readings with the probe as
perpendicular to the surface as possible.
• Sampled End Click: press the BACK button, or H key to define probe
compensation for each feature.
• Measured Inside: automatically compensates out for a hole.
• Measured Outside: automatically compensates in for a stud.
• None: no probe compensation.
Press the BACK button, or H key, to end any measurement command. The probe
compensation is calculated after any best fitting of the measured feature. The
current probe compensation method is a preference. See “Default Compensation
Method” on page 49.
NOTE: Some measured features do not require probe compensation. Pressing
the BACK button, or H key, stops the ADD READINGS command. See “Add
Readings” on page 129.
Plane-Lock Scanning
Plane-lock Scanning enables you to specify a depth value for a plane projection
feature. As you measure the feature, CAM2 Q will automatically record a
measurement whenever the probe traverses a plane offset a given depth value
below the projection plane. Plane-lock Scanning is especially helpful when
measuring thin sheet metal planar features.
Plane-lock Scanning options are as follows:
82
November 2010
• Enable Plane-lock Scanning: Enables Plane-lock Scanning. If selected,
you will measure on the offset plane. If cleared, you will measure on the
projection plane.
• Plane Offset: (used in conjunction with Enable Plane-lock Scanning) The
depth value for the offset plane.
• Enable Sound: Provides sound guidance with distance to depth plane. This
option is not available if Enable Plane-lock Scanning is cleared.
• Measure on Offset Plane: Records a measurement when the center of probe
crosses the offset plane. This option is not available if Enable Plane-lock
Scanning is cleared.
NOTE: The Plane-lock Scanning offset option is only applicable to plane
projection features (Circle, 2D Line, Round Slot, Rectangular Slot, Ellipse, and
Planar Point).
Display As Arc
This option allows you to display a circle as an arc using only the actual readings
taken.
• When cleared (default), the circle will draw as normal.
• When selected, the circle will only cover the span of the readings.
Solver Method
This option allows you to best-fit a feature so that all readings are outside
(maximum) or inside the feature (minimum), and applies to the following feature
types: Circle, Sphere, Plane, 2D Line, Cylinder and Cone.
Laser Probe Measurement

CAM2 Q allows direct feature measurement with a laser probe, extracting
features from the laser probe data. Many laser probes are often referred to as laser
line probes.
1 Calibrate your laser probe using the Device Control Panel. For more
information, see “Device Control Panel” on page 201.
2 Set CAM2 Q to either Measure Mode or Template Mode. For more
information, see “Measure/Template Mode” on page 79.
3 From the Menu or FEATURE CREATOR panel, select the feature to measure.
Depending on your mode:
• the feature adds to the FEATURES list.
83
November 2010
OR
• the feature adds to the FEATURES list and you are immediately prompted to
measure.
4 Digitize your part while staying within the measurement range of the laser
probe. Watch the indicator in the RANGE FINDER dialog box as you move the
laser probe. After you press the BACK button, calculated readings add to the
feature from the laser probe data.
Scannable Features
The following features may be scanned with a laser probe: planes, circles, edge
lines, corner points, spheres, cylinders, tubes, and point clouds. Selecting any
other feature types will automatically switch to the ball probe.
NOTE: To measure a corner point, use the MEASURE < POINT command and
scan all three planes. The corner point is calculated at the intersection of the
three planes.
Z
Y X
Figure 5-2 Corner Point Calculation

See “Measuring a Point” on page 103.
Automatic Feature Recognition

CAM2 Q can provide an extremely simplified measurement workflow by
automatically recognizing features as you measure. When you enable automatic
feature recognition, you can begin recording measurements without first
invoking a measurement command.
NOTE: Automatic feature recognition is enabled and configured in Preferences.
You must disable Arm as Mouse to use this feature. For more information, see
“Auto-Recognize Features” on page 48 and “Use Arm as Mouse” on page 48.
84
November 2010
1 Record a measurement using your measurement device. The Measurement
Window appears. See “Measurement Window” on page 85.
2 Continue to record measurements, and the Measurement Window shows the
results and appropriate feature name as CAM2 Q computes the geometry that
best fits the recorded measurements.
NOTE: You can override CAM2 Q’s automatic computation by clicking the
Geometry Override dropdown in the Measurement Window to manually select
a geometry type. Available geometry types depend on the threshold set in
Preferences.
3 When you finish recording measurements, record an end click to terminate the
measurement of the feature.
Measurement Window
The MEASUREMENT Window opens automatically with each measurement
command. Each measurement device, connected to CAM2 Q, has a unique
MEASUREMENT Window. Look in the title area of the window to see the serial
number, or name, of the device.
Figure 5-3 Measurement Window
Setup
The MEASUREMENT Window displays the Rectangular XYZ and Form values
by default, which update as you record measurements. In the upper left corner of
the window, click the SHOW OPTIONS drop-down and select, or deselect, values
to show or hide different values. Some of these values use tolerances, For
example:
• The Form value has an Out of Tolerance indicator to the right of the value.
After you add one more than the minimum number of readings, the value
calculates and shows In, Above or Below tolerance using the features current
form tolerance value. For more information, see “Tolerances” on page 99.
85
November 2010
Show/hide the Geometric Data - geometric data and statistics associated with
the current measurement.
Show/hide the device’s Digital ReadOut (DRO) - the current location of the
measuring device’s probe and updates as the probe moves through space. The
numerical setup of the DRO is a preference. See “Units” on page 44.
Show/hide the Measurement Image - the image for the current measurement.
For more information, see “Image Creator” on page 231.
Show/hide the Measurement Prompt - the text area that contains informational
messages relating to the current measurement.
Measuring
Record Measurement. This is the same as pressing the FRONT button on the
FaroArm, or the G key, on your computer keyboard.
Record End Click. This is the same as pressing the BACK button on the
FaroArm, or the H key, on your computer keyboard.
Remove Last Point. You can also press the BACKSPACE key on your
computer keyboard.
NOTE: Press and hold the BACK button on the FaroArm to remove multiple
readings in reverse order.
Sizing
Full Screen. Maximize the MEASUREMENT Window to fill the entire computer
screen. Click this button again to return to the original size.
Geometry Override
Use the GEOMETRY OVERRIDE drop-down window to override CAM2 Q’s
Automatic Feature Recognition by manually selecting a geometry type. See
“Automatic Feature Recognition” on page 84.
NOTE: Automatic recognition is enabled and configured in Preferences. See
“Auto-Recognize Features” on page 48.
Scanning
Use the MODE drop-down window to switch the reading collection mode
during the measurement process. Options for the modes are located in the
DEVICE CONTROL panel. See the CAM2 Q chapter in the user manual of your
current measuring device for more information.
86
November 2010
• Single Point: press the FRONT button, or the G key, to collect a single
reading.
• Time Interval: press the FRONT button, or the G key, to start the time
interval. Collect a single reading over time.
• Distance Interval: press the FRONT button, or the G key, to start the
distance interval. Collect a single reading when the probe moves a distance.
Cancel
Closing the MEASUREMENT Window cancels the measurement.
Feature Changes During Measurement

During the adding of readings, or measurement, of a feature it is possible to
change the following using the drop-down list boxes in the MEASUREMENT
Window:
• The projection plane of any 2D feature;
• The projection surface for an Inspect Surface or Inspect Surface Point feature;
and
• Probe settings
before the feature solves. This is useful if you are measuring many of the same
type of feature that slight differences or special needs.
Live Measurement Results

The MEASUREMENT Window provides real-time feedback of the geometry
currently being measured. RMS values of the last reading display in the window
(Laser Tracker only). For more information, see “RMS Threshold” on page 53.
Geometric values appear in the window as soon as the minimum number of
points required to solve the feature have been recorded. The values displayed in
the window automatically update each time a new reading is recorded.
NOTE: For large numbers of readings at a high rate (such as scanning), the user
must pause for a sufficient period of time to allow the geometry to solve without
affecting the rate of point collection.
Automatic Probe Compensation

Solved geometry must be automatically probe-compensated to accurately
represent the measured geometry; as such, automatic probe compensation is the
default for all measured features. In this mode, the BACK button click will only
87
November 2010
be used to end the measurement of a feature, not to indicate the compensation
direction.
Sampled End Click compensation may be used when the automatic or forced
inside/outside compensation techniques do not suffice. In this scenario,
geometric values shown while measuring may not match the resulting geometry
solved after the end click is taken. The current probe compensation method is a
preference. See “Default Compensation Method” on page 49.
NOTE: Measurement of geometry that always requires a single sample will
automatically complete after the first sample is taken.
Features Panel
On the left side of the screen is the FEATURES panel. This panel is divided into
two sections: CAD Parts and Features.
The CAD Parts section shows every CAD feature in your measurement file. The
Features section shows every measured, constructed, and nominal feature in your
measurement file. A graphic to the left of the feature name indicates the feature
type:
• Measured/Constructed/Dimension: The geometric graphic to the left of
the feature name.
88
November 2010
• Nominal: The geometric graphic to the left of the feature name and a target
graphic to the right of the feature name.
Figure 5-4 Features Panel
NOTE: This content of this panel changes if you select the REPORT tab. For
more information, see “Report Lists” on page 238.
Selecting Features
Selecting a Feature on the Features panel highlights the feature in the CAD
window.
• To select a single feature, click the name of the feature with the LEFT MOUSE
button.
• To select multiple features in consecutive order, hold down the SHIFT key and
left-click the first (top) feature, then click the last feature you want.
• To select a group of features not in consecutive order, hold down the CTRL
key and left-click each feature you want selected.
Double-click a feature to edit its Properties. For more information, see
“Properties” on page 61.
Right-click on a selected feature, or multiple features, to quickly start some
commands from the Shortcut Menus. For more information, see “Shortcut
Menus” on page 254.
89
November 2010
Naming a Feature
Every feature in a measurement file is given a default name. To change a feature
name:
1 Select a feature from the FEATURES panel, or the CAD View.
2 Click the feature name again, or press the F2 key to edit the name.
3 Type a new name and press the ENTER key to continue.
Renaming Multiple Features

You have the option to rename multiple features at once. To change multiple
feature names:
1 Select multiple features from the FEATURES panel, or the CAD View.
2 Right-click the selection and choose Rename.
3 Type a new name to be applied to all of the features and click OK.
Feature Status Indicator

There are several visual indicators that show you a quick status of the features in
your measurement file.
When you measure an existing feature, the feature will appear in red.
To the left of the feature is a geometric icon to indicate the feature type. If this
icon and the feature name appear in gray, the feature is unsolved. See “Unsolved
Features” on page 276.
To the right of some features is a Status Indicator graphic. This shows you a
quick status of the features in your measurement file. The graphic depends on the
status of the feature:
• Black target - Nominal feature.
• Green check mark - the feature is in tolerance.
• Flag - the feature is out of tolerance or unsolved.
• Gray - the feature has no data, or not enough to solve.
• Red - measurement is above the upper tolerance.
• Blue - measurement is below the lower tolerance.
NOTE: Gray and Green flags are straight, Blue lean to the left and Red lean to
the right.
90
November 2010
Show and Hide Features
To the extreme right of all features is the VISIBILITY icon (eye icon). Click the
VISIBILITY icon to hide a feature. Once hidden, the icon and feature name appear
gray. Click the VISIBILITY icon again to show the feature.
When hidden, features remain in the feature tree but are not shown in the CAD
view.
Feature Association
When you use CAM2 Q to compare actual (measured and constructed) data to
nominal data, both features associate. The association name automatically uses
the nominal feature name. Changing the nominal feature name updates the
associated name. To associate a measured and nominal feature:
• Drag any nominal feature to a measured or constructed feature.
• Select the measured feature and use the FEATURE INFORMATION panel. See
“Nominals and Tolerances” on page 96.
• Select a nominal feature and add a MEASURE command.
In the feature association, a prefix automatically appends each feature name:
“Actual” to the measured feature, and “Nominal” to the nominal feature.
• Click the ARROW button to the left of the feature association’s name to
expand and collapse the association and hide the features.
NOTE: The Properties of a feature association are the measured or constructed
feature properties. See “Properties” on page 61. Deleting an association name
only deletes the measured or constructed feature. Expand the association and
select each contained feature to delete the nominal feature.
Reordering Features
You can change the order of features as shown in the FEATURES Panel.
1 Select a feature, or multiple features, in the FEATURES panel or CAD View to
move.
2 Click the Up arrow at the bottom of the panel to move the feature up in the list;
or, click the Down arrow to move the feature down in the list.
3 You can press and hold the SHIFT key and drag the feature up and down the
list.
NOTE: Dragging a feature without pressing and holding the SHIFT key is for
grouping nominal and measured/constructed features.
91
November 2010
Feature Grouping
When you work with a large number of features, it can be helpful to organize
them using groups. To create a feature group folder:
• Click the New Folder icon in the FEATURES panel.
• If desired, edit the default name (Group 1).
• Drag any feature or group onto the folder and release the mouse button.
NOTE: The Smart Labeling and Feature Visibility commands also apply to
folders. For more information, see “Smart Labeling” on page 46 and “Feature
Visibility” on page 38.
Folder Properties
You can use folders to report features in multiple coordinate systems within the
same report. Right-click a folder and select Properties to view the Feature Editor
window for the folder. In this window, you can assign a coordinate system,
coordinate system type, and unit of measurement for the contents of the folder.
Capture View Data

Right-click a folder and select Capture View Data to assign a specific CAD view
to the folder. To change the captured view, change the view as desired, right-click
the folder and select Capture View Data.
In the report, this CAD view adds just above the features in the group. See “CAD
Picture” on page 240.
Layers
The section at the bottom of the FEATURES panel controls the properties of
layers. Click the drop-down arrow on the lower left of the FEATURES panel to
expand the Layer options.
Use layers as a way to group and organize features. You can show and hide
layers to help simplify your CAD view. Changes made to layers are saved along
with the CAM2 Q measurement file and are not saved to the CAD in the
measurement file.
Creating a New Layer

1 Click the NEW button to create a new layer.
2 Enter a name for the layer.
92
November 2010
3 To select a layer color for on-screen viewing, choose a color from the
OVERRIDE COLOR drop-down. You can also clear the color which sets the
color to White.
4 Check the Visible box to make the layer visible on-screen.
5 Click OK.
Editing a Layer
1 Highlight the layer and click the EDIT button, or double-click on the layer
name.
2 Edit a name for the layer, edit the override color from the drop-down, and
enable or disable the visibility of the layer.
3 Click OK.
Adding Features To A Layer

To add features to a layer, right-click a feature in the Features Panel, point to
Assign a Layer, and select a layer in the Layer drop-down.
You can also left-click any item from the Features Panel, drag it onto a layer, and
release the mouse button.
Viewing Features On A Layer

To view all features associated with a layer, click the drop-down arrow to the left
of the layer name to expand the layer contents.
To the extreme right of all layers is the VISIBILITY icon (eye icon). Click the
VISIBILITY icon to hide a layer. Once hidden, the icon and layer name appear
gray. Click the VISIBILITY icon again to show the layer.
When hidden, the layer is not shown in the CAD view.
Deleting a Layer
To delete a layer, highlight the layer and click the DELETE button.
93
November 2010
Labels
After adding the minimum number of readings to solve the feature, and an end
click point, the feature draws on the CAD view and an on-screen label adds to the
measurement file.
Figure 5-5 Feature Labels
This label shows the current data for the feature and the border changes color to
show any Out of Tolerance condition:
• Green - the feature is in tolerance
Select a feature, or multiple features, and each label shows relevant values for the
feature. If the feature contains actual values, the label shows actual values. If the
feature contains nominal values, the label shows nominal values. If the feature
contains both actual and nominal values, the label shows actual values, nominal
values, and deviation.
NOTE: XYZ positional data does not show without a solved alignment.
94
November 2010
When a feature is not selected, the label only shows the feature name. Move the
pointer over the label to temporarily show all of the values. Add or Remove
values from the labels using the FEATURE INFORMATION panel. See “Nominals
To move a label, drag the label around the CAD view or press L to automatically
arrange the label in the view.
To show or hide a label, right-click the current feature in the FEATURES panel or
the CAD view, and select LABEL from the shortcut menu. Right-click again and
select DETAILED LABEL to change the label to the detailed format.
There are many preferences to control the visibility, content and behavior of the
feature labels. See “Label Settings” on page 41.
Readings
Readings are the individual digitized points of the feature.
NOTE: Selecting a “By Best Fit” constructed feature shows each individual
feature and its data to the constructed feature.
Figure 5-6 Readings panel
Select a feature, or multiple features, from the FEATURES panel and use the
READINGS panel to:
1 Analyze the readings of a feature.
• The default sort order of the rows is by the ID column. This is also the order
of the readings as they were added to the feature. Click a column to sort the
readings by that column, and click again to reverse the sort.
2 Remove a reading from the feature and re-calculate the feature using the
remaining readings.
• Clear the check box in the ON column to remove a reading. Click the
APPLY button to re-calculate the feature using the selected features.
3 Change the probe of existing readings.
• Select from the List the readings. See “Select from the List” on page 276.
• Click the EDIT PROBE SETTINGS button.
95
November 2010
• In the EDIT PROBE SETTINGS dialog box, change the probe settings and click
OK. You can also enter values manually for any offsets.
4 Permanently delete a reading.
• Select a reading, right-click and select the DELETE command from the
shortcut menu.
NOTE: The EDIT < CLEAR ALL READINGS command deletes all readings
from every feature in your file. See “Clear All Readings” on page 37.
5 Generate a report of the readings of a feature, or multiple features.
• Click the REPORT button to quickly generate a report. For more
information, see “Standard Report Window Commands” on page 239.
6 Aim the FARO Laser Tracker to the location of an individual reading.
• Select a reading, right-click and select the AIM command to point the laser
at the location of the reading.
Panel Settings
Change the order of the columns by dragging the top of a column to the left or
right. Resize a column by dragging the top edge of a column to the left or right.
Hide a column by dragging the top of a column down to the bottom of the
READINGS panel.
Right-click on the top of any column to get a shortcut menu:
1 Select Sort Ascending to Sort Descending to change the sort order of the
readings.
2 Select Column Chooser to see a list of hidden columns. To unhide a column,
drag the column from the list back to the READINGS panel.
3 Select Best Fit to automatically size the column.
4 Select Best Fit (all columns) to automatically size all the columns in the
READINGS panel.
Nominals and Tolerances

Add and edit nominal and tolerance information to a feature in the FEATURE
INFORMATION panel. Use this panel to:
• Add single or multiple nominal features to a feature.
• Type in nominal values and create a nominal feature.
• Change the default Upper and Lower tolerance values for each actual result
and see the Deviation values from nominal.
96
November 2010
• Select or clear individual values for a feature. This controls visibility of the
values on the on-screen label and the report.
• Associate a DIN or ISO tolerance classification to a feature. Selecting a
tolerance class in either the lower or upper tolerance column will set the
tolerance values for both upper and lower tolerances. When associating a
tolerance classification to a feature, it will apply to all applicable properties of
that feature.
Figure 5-7 Feature Information panel
NOTE: You can select multiple features and edit each in the panel. See
“Selecting Features” on page 89.
Panel Settings
Click the PLUS or MINUS button in the first column of the panel to expand or
collapse the feature’s values. Each value has a check box, clear this check box to
remove it from the on-screen label and the report.
Use the VIEW button at the bottom of the FEATURE INFORMATION panel to:
• Show Toleranced: only show selected tolerances
• Show All: show all tolerance values
• Expand All: expands each feature to show all values
• Collapse All: collapses each feature and hides all values
Single Nominal
1 Select a feature from the FEATURES panel or the CAD view.
2 In the top row of the FEATURE INFORMATION panel, click the drop-down arrow
in the Nominals Feature column.
3 Select a Feature. See “Select a Feature” on page 277.
NOTE: Clicking the X button in the Nominals Feature column removes the
nominal feature from the current feature.
97
November 2010
Multiple Nominals
2 In each row of the FEATURE INFORMATION panel, click the drop-down arrow in
the Nominals Feature column. Use the scroll bar on the right side of the panel
to move down the list and see other values.
3 Select a Feature. See “Select a Feature” on page 277.
NOTE: Clicking the X button in the Nominals Feature column removes the
nominal feature from the current feature.
Typing Nominal Values

2 In each row of the FEATURE INFORMATION panel, click in the Nominal column.
Type a numeric nominal value and press the ENTER key. Use the scroll bar on
the right side of the panel to move down the list and see other values.
Adding a nominal feature to a measured, or constructed, feature creates a group
in the Features Panel. See “Features Panel” on page 88.
Dynamic Nominals
In a few instances, the nominal feature is more complex the measured feature. In
some Measured features CAM2 Q automatically associates a complex nominal to
a simple measured feature. When this happens the simple measured feature is
projected (shortest distance) to the complex nominal. The Actual to Nominal data
is the simple measured feature and the projected simple nominal feature.
An example is the Inspect Surface Point command. The measured point and an
associated nominal surface. The projected nominal point is the closest point
anywhere on the surface. See “Measuring an Inspect Surface Point” on
page 104.
Automatic Nominals
Once an Alignment is complete, any new measured feature is compared to all
nominals and CAD parts in the drawing file. For more information, see
“Alignments Menu” on page 189.
If a similar nominal feature is found it is automatically associated. If there is a
feature in a CAD part, that feature automatically adds as a nominal and
associated to the measured feature. Automatic Nominals is a preference with
default search vales. See “Auto Nominal” on page 53.
98
November 2010
Tolerances
NOTE: In addition to traditional rectangular tolerances, CAM2 Q also supports
many GD&T tolerances. For more information, see “GD&T Tolerances” on
page 213.
Change tolerance values for an individual or selected group of features. Change
the default tolerance values for the entire file in the PREFERENCES &
SETTINGS command. See “Tolerance” on page 56.
1 Select a feature in the FEATURES panel or from the CAD window.
2 In the FEATURE INFORMATION panel, select or clear the check box in the first
column for each value to tolerance.
3 Change an individual tolerance value by clicking in the LOWER or UPPER cell
and typing a numeric value.
The OOT (Out of Tolerance) and Tolerance columns show the measured to
nominal deviations. Each feature parameter cell changes color to show any Out
of Tolerance condition:
• Green (Pass) - measurement is within the upper and lower tolerance
The Tolerance column graphically shows the amount of tolerance that is
consumed by the deviation (Pass), or the amount above or below tolerance. If the
deviation is more than four times the tolerance a plus or minus sign is added to
the bar.
NOTE: You will not see some feature values in the on-screen label and the
report if an Alignment has not been completed. See “Create and Edit
Alignments” on page 190.
Changing Multiple Values

You can change the lower and upper tolerance value for multiple values of a
feature:
2 In the FEATURE INFORMATION panel, hold down the SHIFT key and left-click
the first (top) parameter, then click the last parameter you want. For example,
the lower tolerance X Y and Z locations.
3 Type a numeric value into any tolerance field and press ENTER.
You can change the lower and upper tolerance for all values of a feature:
99
November 2010
2 In the FEATURE INFORMATION panel, left-click the empty cell at the top of the
lower or upper tolerance column.
3 Type a numeric value into any tolerance field and press ENTER.
Coordinate Systems and Tolerances

One coordinate system may show elements in tolerance that another coordinate
system may show out of tolerance. For more information, see “Unit of Measure
and Coordinate System” on page 8.
100
November 2010
Measuring a Plane
You can also press the F3 hot key on the keyboard.
Projection Plane needed? See “Select No
Plane” on page 81.
Probe Compensation needed? See Yes
“Probe Compensation” on page 82.
Minimum Readings to Solve 3
See “Scanning” on page 86.
XYZ Results Center point of Plane
Vector The surface normal
(perpendicular to the
plane)
Comp
1 3 2
Comp 2
See “Best Fit Plane” on page 273.
101
November 2010
Measuring a 2D Line
Projection Plane needed? See “Select Yes
XYZ Results End1 of the Line
End2 of the Line
Vector The Line from beginning
to end
1 2
Comp
The first two digitized points determine the vector direction of the line. End 1 is
the furthest point in the negative direction and End 2 is the furthest point in the
positive direction.
See “Best Fit Line” on page 273.
102
November 2010
Measuring a Point
Probe Compensation needed? See No
XYZ Results The Point
Vector none
See “Best Fit Point” on page 273.
103
November 2010
Measuring an Inspect Surface Point

Use this command to measure a single point on surface at any location. To
measure in an exact area of a surface, use the Home In command. See
“Measuring a Home In Point” on page 116. To measure multiple points (point
cloud) on your CAD model in a single feature, use the Inspect Surface command.
See “Inspect Surface” on page 129.
This command requires a nominal surface from a CAD model. The default
surface is the CAD model - any available surface. You can select a specific
surface in the FEATURES panel, or the CAD View before starting this command.
XYZ Results The Point:
The measured surface
point compensated along
the surface normal.
Vector The vector of the surface at
the measured point.
Comp
• If the AUTOMATICALLY CREATE NOMINAL check box is selected, a nominal

surface point is automatically added to your file, and grouped with the Actual
Inspect Surface point. It is the closest point on the surface. See “Dynamic
Nominals” on page 98.
A round disk represents the Inspect Surface Point measurement. The disk color is
predetermined by the tolerance condition. The size of the disk is a preference. See
“Size and Scale” on page 42.
104
November 2010
Measuring a Circle
XYZ Results Center point of Circle
Vector Same as Plane
1
Comp
See “Best Fit Circle” on page 271.
105
November 2010
Measuring a Sphere
XYZ Results Center point of Sphere
Vector none
Comp
3 1
2
See “Best Fit Sphere” on page 275.
106
November 2010
Measuring a Cylinder
XYZ Results Center of Cylinder at first
end.
Vector Center Line of Cylinder
from bottom to top
1
2 3
2
4
Comp
+ Vector
Comp 5
1
3 4
6 6
5
The first two digitized points determine the vector direction of the cylinder. See
“Best Fit Cylinder” on page 272.
107
November 2010
Measuring a Torus
XYZ Results Center Point
Vector
1
2
Comp
3
9
8
7 6
5
4
1 Digitize three points at one cross-section of the torus.

2 Digitize three points at a second cross-section of the torus.
3 Digitize three points at a third cross-section of the torus.
NOTE: You must digitize the first nine points in the correct order. Digitize any
additional points anywhere on the torus.
108
November 2010
Measuring a Tube
You can measure a round tube with a series of simple feature measurements. The
measured planes (END-B and END-A) and cylinders (tube segments) are
combined to construct the tube, then the round tube diameter and bend radius
values are applied to create the final tube feature. All features automatically add
to a group. See “Feature Grouping” on page 92.
NOTE: This command will not work in Template Mode, so CAM2 Q
automatically switches to Measurement Mode if necessary. See “Measure/
Template Mode” on page 79.
NOTE: Two tube segments are required to create a tube feature.
1 Enter the information for the tube feature:
• Enter the name for the tube.
• Enter an exact tube diameter, or CAM2 Q will average the measured
diameters from the tube.
• Choose existing planes for the starting (END-B) and ending (END-A) or <
Define > to measure each plane.
• Choose an existing nominal tube feature, if you have an existing nominal
tube in the file.
• Enter a Bend Radius.
• Click CREATE to create the tube and begin measuring.
2 Measure the plane at END-B. See “Measuring a Plane” on page 101.
3 Measure each straight segment of the tube as a cylinder. Be sure to measure
these cylinders in the proper order (END-B to END-A). See “Measuring a
Cylinder” on page 107.
NOTE: Do not digitize any points on any curved sections unless CAM2 Q
instructs you to do so. Measure curved sections as a Torus. See “Measuring a
Torus” on page 108. If the tubing part preference is set to measure all bends,
then you will measure all the curved sections.
A cylinder measurement is always expected since there are many cylinders that
can form a round tube. When you cancel the cylinder measurement, you will see
a message that the cylinder measurement was unsuccessful. If you have no more
segments to measure, click NO to end the cylinder measurement and continue
with the plane measurement at END-A.
4 Measure the plane at END-A. See “Measuring a Plane” on page 101.
109
November 2010
NOTE: You can scan the planes and cylinders of a round tube. See “Scanning”
on page 86.
Construction
A round tube constructs along this polyline from start to end using the diameter
value.
For more information, see “Construct Tube: From Features” on page 167.
Breakpoints
After measuring all the tube segments, breakpoints automatically add to the
drawing file and are viewable in the READINGS panel. Breakpoints are
constructed points and are the intersection of tube segments along the tube:
• END-B and the first straight segment.
• First and second segment, second and third, third and fourth, etc.
• A radius constructs at the intersection point using the bend radius value.
• END-A and the last straight segment.
A polyline constructs from through all of the breakpoints from END-B to END-
A.
Alignment
If you have selected a nominal tube, a Three Feature alignment automatically
adds to the drawing file and solves. See “Three Feature” on page 194.
If you do not have a nominal tube, you should create a coordinate system using
the first, last, and another breakpoint with the Coordinate System Wizard. See
“Coordinate System Wizard” on page 179.
110
November 2010
Measuring a Cone
XYZ Results Apex of Cone
Vector Center Line of Cone from
Apex
1
2 3
2
4 Comp
Comp
1
5 4
6
6
3
5
See “Best Fit Cone” on page 271.
111
November 2010
Measuring a Round Slot

XYZ Results Center point of Slot
Length and Diameter
4
5
3
6 Comp
2
1
+ Vector
NOTE: You can digitize points on the straight sides of the round slot.
The length of the round slot reported is from end to end. The length can also be
reported from arc center to arc center by editing the Measure Properties of the
round slot. See “Measure Properties” on page 80.
The first two digitized points determine the vector direction of the line. See “Best
Fit Round Slot” on page 274.
112
November 2010
Measuring a Rectangular Slot

XYZ Results Center point of Slot
Length and Width
5 4
Comp
6 3
1 2
+ Vector
The first two digitized points determine the vector direction of the line. See “Best
Fit Rectangular Slot” on page 274.
113
November 2010
Measuring an Ellipse
XYZ Results Center point of Ellipse
3
Comp
5 4
See “Best Fit Ellipse” on page 272.
114
November 2010
Measuring a 3D Line
XYZ Results End1 of the Line
End2 of the Line
Vector The Line from beginning
to end
1 2
The first two digitized points determine the vector direction of the line. End 1 is
the furthest point in the negative direction and End 2 is the furthest point in the
positive direction.
See “Best Fit Line” on page 273.
115
November 2010
Measuring a Planar Point

Probe Compensation needed? See No, the point is
“Probe Compensation” on page 82. automatically projected to
the selected plane.
Vector none
Measuring a Home In Point

Use this command to measure a surface at a specific nominal location. To
measure a surface at any location, use the Inspect Surface command. See
“Measuring an Inspect Surface Point” on page 104.
NOTE: You must create a nominal point or nominal vector point before starting
this command.
You always see the MEASURE HOME IN POINT properties dialog box regardless
of the Always Show Measure UI preference setting. See “Always Show Measure
UI” on page 48.
NOTE: You may find it helpful to enable Wireframe View to aid in identifying
the Home In point. For more information, see “Wireframe View” on page 77.
• Name: Type in a name for the Home In Point.
• Approach Type: The location of the compensation point determines probe
compensation direction. Compensation will be along the approach vector but
the “away versus towards” is determined by the compensation point.
• Key-In - Type the IJK values in the APPROACH VECTOR box. See “Typing
values in different units and coordinate systems” on page 279.
116
November 2010
• Select Surface - Select a Feature. See “Select a Feature” on page 277. To
Sample (measure) the surface of the part before measuring the point, select
<Define>.
• Target Point: Select a Point. See “Select a Point” on page 278. This point is
the specific location, or “target point” on the surface.
• Surface: Select a Surface. See “Select a Surface” on page 277. This is
unavailable if the KEY-IN radio button is selected.
• Home In Zone Diameter: The Home In Zone Diameter is the diameter of a
cylindrical zone created from the nominal point and the surface normal.
• When the probe is in this zone, you can measure the surface. A point is not
recorded if the probe is outside the zone.
• Rotation Angle: You may find that you have to rotate the view on the screen
before you can Home In on a point. To rotate the view, enter a Rotation Angle.
• Approach Vector: Type the IJK values in the APPROACH VECTOR box. See
“Typing values in different units and coordinate systems” on page 279. This is
unavailable if the SELECT SURFACE radio button is selected.
• Click the CREATE button to add the feature to your measurement file.
117
November 2010
Measuring Points
Click CREATE in the HOME IN POINT dialog box to add the feature to your
measurement file.
Figure 5-8 Measuring a Home-In Point
1 You now see the nominal point, the Home In Zone and the current position of
your probe.
NOTE: CAD files may be oriented opposite of the Home-In Point.
2 Place the probe on the surface of the part and move it into the Home In Zone.
Watch the screen and listen for the Home In Sound.
NOTE: The 3D distance from the probe to the point, and the depth to the point
appear in the MEASUREMENT Window during the measurement of each Home
In point.
3 Measure the surface:
• Press the FRONT button, or G key, to measure the surface point. You can
digitize 1 to 3 points - the closest reading to the nominal point is used for the
measured point.
118
November 2010
• Pull away from the surface and press the BACK button, or H key, to define
probe compensation.
NOTE: It is possible to be within the Home In zone and not be touching the
surface, ensure that the device is touching your part.
Measuring a High/Low Point

Use this command to measure a set of points and calculate the three-dimensional
(3D) distance between the feature and the furthest/closest point away from that
feature.
NOTE: This command calculates 3D distance (the absolute distance between
two points), not 3D displacement.
You always see the MEASUREMENT POINT properties dialog box regardless of the
Always Show Measure UI preference setting. See “Always Show Measure UI”
on page 48.
• Select HIGH POINT or LOW POINT.
• Select the Reference feature type.
• Select a Reference feature. See “Select” on page 276.
• Select the Probe Compensation. See “Probe Compensation” on page 82.
The three-dimensional
(3D) distance between the
feature and the furthest/
closest point away from
that feature.
Vector none
119
November 2010
Comp Comp
Figure 5-9 Measuring a High Point Figure 5-10 Measuring a Low Point
NOTE: If you select Plane-Reducible for the Feature Type, <Define> is a

selection in the REFERENCE FEATURE drop-down. Select <Define> to
measure a plane as the Reference feature before measuring the point. See
“Measuring a Plane” on page 101.
Measuring a Surface Point

XYZ Results The center point of the
mini plane
Vector The surface normal
(perpendicular to the mini
plane)
Measure three or more points in a small area on the surface. The points best fit
into a mini plane. See “Best Fit Plane” on page 273.
Only use this command to measure points when you do not have a CAD model.
To measure surfaces, use the Inspect Surface Point, Home In Point or Vector
Point commands. These commands use or create exact nominal points on CAD
surfaces. See “Measuring an Inspect Surface Point” on page 104, “Measuring a
Home In Point” on page 116 and “Measuring a Vector Point” on page 121.
120
November 2010
Measuring a Surface Edge Point

See “Probe Compensation” on page 82. Yes
The digitized point
compensated to the surface
edge.
Vector none
• If the AUTOMATICALLY CREATE NOMINAL check box is selected, a nominal
surface point is automatically added to your file, and grouped with the Actual
Surface Edge point. It is the closest point on the surface edge. See “Dynamic
Nominals” on page 98.
Measuring a Vector Point

Use this command to measure a surface at a specific nominal location by
selecting an existing nominal Vector Point. See “Vector Point” on page 132 and
“Vector Point” on page 142. To measure a point on a surface, anywhere on the
surface, use the Inspect Surface command. See “Measuring an Inspect Surface
Point” on page 104.
You can use Vector Points in an Iterative Alignment. See “Iterative” on
page 192.
You always see the MEASURE VECTOR POINT properties dialog box regardless of
the Always Show Measure UI preference setting. See “Always Show Measure
UI” on page 48.
• Name: Type in a name for the Vector Point.
• Nominal Point: Select a Point. See “Select a Point” on page 278. Select an
existing nominal Vector Point.
121
• Home In Zone Diameter: The Home In Zone Diameter is the
diameter of a cylindrical zone created from the nominal Vector Point.
• Click the CREATE button to add the feature to your measurement
file.
Measuring Points
Adding Readings to Vector Points differs slightly depending on the
Alignment.
• If an Alignment does not exist or exists but is not solved; the Vector
Point highlights.
• Touch the surface with the device in the approximate location.
• Press the FRONT button, or G key, to measure the surface point.
You can digitize 1 to 3 points - the closest reading to the nominal
point is used for the measured point.
• Pull away from the surface and press the BACK button, or H key to
define probe compensation.
• If an Alignment exists and is solved CAM2 Q guides you to the
nominal point. See “Measuring Points” on page 118.
A round disk represents the Vector Point measurement. The disk color
and size is a preference. See “Size and Scale” on page 42.
NOTE: If the Automatically Take Reading preference is enabled,
CAM2 Q will automatically measure a Vector Point when the probe is
inside the home in zone. See “Automatically Take Reading” on page 51.
Measuring a Compensate Axis Point

Use this command to measure a point with a special axis compensation
calculation.
See “Probe Compensation” on page 82. Yes
November 2010

Vector none
+X
Comp
+Y
The compensation of the point will always be made along the main coordinate
system axis (X, Y or Z) most parallel to the compensation direction; therefore,
points are only compensated in the X, Y, or Z directions with this command. The
choice of the axis and direction (+/-) will depend on the largest component of the
retract vector.
See “Measuring a Surface Point” on page 120 to compensate for probe radius in
other directions.
CAUTION: This command should only be used by expert users; it can be a
source of large errors in the measurement process.
Measuring a Point Cloud

Use this command to measure single or multiple points (point cloud) for Export.
See “Export” on page 31. Readings, Nominals and Tolerances are not available
with this feature.
To measure a surface and compare to a nominal surface use the INSPECT
SURFACE POINT or INSPECT SURFACE command. See “Measuring an
Inspect Surface Point” on page 104, and “Inspect Surface” on page 129.
123
November 2010
Measuring a Polyline
XYZ Results (Must be a feature with an The Point:
associated nominal surface) The digitized point
compensated along the
surface normal.
the measured point.
Use this command to measure a single 2D or 3D polyline. To measure multiple
polylines, or cross-sections, use the Polyline Group command. See “Measuring a
Polyline Group” on page 125.
• Name: Type in a name for the Polyline.
• 2D Plane: Select the 2D Plane check box and select an existing plane. See
“Select a Plane” on page 277. All measurement readings will project to the
plane before the polyline is calculated.
• Select Surfaces: Select the SURFACES check box and select the CAD
Assembly or individual surfaces from the list. See “Select from the List” on
page 276. The surfaces will become the nominal surface for the polyline. Each
point of the polyline is automatically associated to the closest nominal surface.
• Minimum Scan Distance: Enter a distance value. CAM2 Q removes any
point that is too close to the next.
• Auto Nominal Maximum Distance: Enter a distance value. A surface is not
associated to any point of the polyline if the point is outside this distance.
• Maximum Scan Distance: Enter a distance value. While recording
measurements, CAM2 Q ignores any point that is too far from the first.
• Select the Probe Compensation. See “Probe Compensation” on page 82.
• Select the Type.
• Measure on CAD Side: Select the Measure on CAD Side check box to
measure the polyline on the part’s CAD side.
124
November 2010
Measuring a Polyline Group

Minimum Readings to Solve each 2
Polyline
XYZ Results (Must be a feature with an The Point:
associated nominal surface) The digitized point
compensated along the
surface normal.
the measured point.
Use this command to measure multiple polylines or cross-sections. Cross-
sections appear as translucent planes during measurement. To measure a single
2D or 3D polyline, use the Polyline command. See “Measuring a Polyline” on
page 124.
• Name: Type in a name for the Polyline Group.
• Project to Surface: Select the PROJECT TO SURFACE check box and select the
CAD Assembly or individual surfaces from the list. See “Select from the List”
on page 276. The surfaces will become the nominal surface for the polyline
group. Each polyline point is automatically compensated to the closest nominal
surface. By default, the projection surface will be the entire CAD Assembly.
• Automatically Create Nominal: Select the Automatically Create Nominal
check box to create a nominal polyline in addition to the polyline group. The
nominal polyline will be projected to the CAD if a CAD surface is selected.
• Measure on CAD Side: Select the Measure on CAD Side check box to
measure the polyline group on the part’s CAD side.
• Select the Probe Compensation Method. See “Probe Compensation” on
page 82.
• Polyline Lock: Select the Polyline Lock check box to select a polyline lock
type:
• Parallel
125
November 2010
• Base Plane: Select a Plane. See “Select a Plane” on page 277. This
defines the direction of all parallel planes and the base position for all
planes.
• Base Distance: Enter a value to define an offset relative to the base plane
where the first lock plane will start. Using a positive value will determine
an offset in the positive direction relative to the plane normal and a
negative value will do the opposite.
• Distance Between Planes: Enter the distance between the planes to be
defined.
• Number of Planes: Enter the number of cross-sectional planes for the
polyline group.
• Planes on Negative Side of Base Plane: Select the Planes on Negative
side of Base Plane check box to define planes in the positive sense and flip
them to negative plane direction.
• Radial
• Rotation Line: Select a Line. See “Select a Line” on page 278. This
defines the radial cross-sectional plane.
• Zero Angle Direction: Select a line-reducible feature. The plane defined
by this vector and the rotation line will define the base plane.
• Rotation Angle (Degrees): Enter the angle between the planes.
• Number of Planes: Enter the number of cross-sectional planes for the
polyline group.
• Planes on Negative Side of Base Plane: Select the Planes on Negative
side of Base Plane check box to define planes in the positive sense and flip
them to negative plane direction.
• Cylinder
• Axis Line: Select a Line. See “Select a Line” on page 278. This defines
the axis for all defined cylinders.
• Cylinder Sections Distance: Enter the radial distance between each of the
cylinders.
• Number of Cylinders: Enter the number of cylinders to be created.
• Minimum Scan Distance: Enter a distance value. CAM2 Q removes any
point that is too close to the next.
• Maximum Scan Distance: Enter a distance value. While recording
measurements, CAM2 Q ignores any point that is to far from the first.
• Auto Nominal Maximum Distance: Enter a distance value. A surface is not
associated to any point of the polyline group if the point is outside this
distance.
126

November 2010
Polyline Group Examples

Parallel Locked Planes
Figure 5-11 Parallel Locked Plane Polylines
Radial Locked Planes
Figure 5-12 Radial Locked Plane Polylines
127
November 2010
Normal Locked Planes
Figure 5-13 Normal Locked Plane Polylines
Measuring a Single Point Circle

Use this command to measure a single point in a hole that is smaller than the
probe diameter. The circle diameter then calculates by using the distance to the
projection plane and the probe diameter from the measured center of the probe.
Vector Same as plane
NOTE: The probe should be well-seated in the hole when digitizing the point.
Ensure that your probe is sufficiently larger than the hole to be measured.
128
November 2010
Inspect Surface
Use this command to measure single or multiple points (point cloud) on your
CAD model. To measure a single point on a surface at any location, use the
Inspect Surface Point command. See “Measuring an Inspect Surface Point” on
page 104. To measure in an exact area of a surface, use the Home In command.
See “Measuring a Home In Point” on page 116.
Each reading for this feature will automatically create a nominal point on the
closest surface of your CAD model. The end click determines the compensation
vector of the digitized point(s).
NOTE: Surface points measured away from a selected surface appear as edge
points.
A round disk represents each reading of the Inspect Surface measurement. The
disk color is predetermined by the tolerance condition. The size of the disk is a
preference. See “Size and Scale” on page 42.
Add Readings
Use this command to add readings to an existing measured feature. You can also
press the INSERT hot key on the keyboard.
1 Select a feature in the FEATURES panel or the CAD window.
2 Select MEASURE < ADD READINGS. You can also right-click the feature in
the FEATURES panel and select ADD READINGS from the shortcut menu. If
the probe is visible on-screen, it will flash green when you add readings.
3 Use your measuring device and add more readings to the feature using the
FRONT button, or G key.
4 Press the BACK button, or H key to finish. If the probe is visible on-screen, it
will flash red when you press the BACK button or H key.
NOTE: You can also use the buttons in the Measurement Window. For more
information, see “Measurement Window” on page 85.
NOTE: Pressing the BACK button, or H key may also define the Probe
Compensation. For more information, see “Probe Compensation” on page 82.
If you select multiple features the measurement order follow the position of the
features in the FEATURES panel. For more information, see “Reordering
129
November 2010
Using Multiple Devices

If you have multiple devices connected to CAM2 Q, use the shortcut menu to
select a specific device.
2 Right-click the feature and select the ADD READINGS FROM flyout.
3 Select a measurement device and add readings to the feature.
Measure All
Use this command to measure, or add readings, to every feature in your file. The
measurement order follow the position of the features in the FEATURES panel.
For more information, see “Reordering Features” on page 91.
1 Select MEASURE < MEASURE ALL.
2 Use your measuring device and add readings to the first feature in the
FEATURES panel.
3 Press the BACK button, or H key to finish.
Remeasure
Use this command to replace all readings of an existing measured feature.
2 Select MEASURE < REMEASURE. You can also right-click the feature in the
FEATURES panel and select REMEASURE from the shortcut menu.
3 Use your measuring device and add readings to the feature.
4 Press the BACK button, or H key to finish.
If you select multiple features the measurement order follow the position of the
features in the FEATURES panel. For more information, see “Reordering
130
November 2010

screen, contains the KEY-IN commands. These commands are also available in
the KEY-IN menu across the top of the screen.
Use these commands to create Nominal features using data on drawings or
spreadsheets.
0.0
Plane
Requires: three sets of XYZ values, or one XYZ value and a normal vector
value.
• Name: Type in a name for the constructed plane.
• Plane: Select a radio button:
• Points: Type in the XYZ values. See “Typing values in different units and
coordinate systems” on page 279.
OR
• Point: Type in the XYZ value. See “Typing values in different units and
• Normal: Type in the XYZ values. See “Typing values in different units and
• Click the CREATE button to create the line.
NOTE: The vector of the constructed plane is determined by the right-hand
rule. See “Right-Hand Rule” on page 275.
0.0
Line
Requires: two points.
• Name: Type in a name for the constructed line.
• Point on Line: Select a radio button:
• Point2 on Line: Type in the XYZ values. See “Typing values in different
units and coordinate systems” on page 279.
OR
131
November 2010
• Line Vector: Type in the IJK values. See “Typing values in different units
and coordinate systems” on page 279.
• Length: Type in the length value. See “Typing values in different units” on
page 279.
0.0
Point
Requires: an X, Y, and Z value.
• Name: Type in a name for the constructed point.
• Points: Type in the XYZ values. See “Typing values in different units and
• Click the CREATE button to create the point.
0.0
Vector Point
Requires: an X, Y, and Z value and a normal vector.
• Name: Type in a name for the vector point.
• Point: Type in the XYZ values. See “Typing values in different units and
• Vector: Determine from CAD or Type in:
• From CAD: Select the DETERMINE VECTOR FROM CAD check box to
calculate the point’s vector from a CAD model.
• Vector: Type in the IJK values. See “Typing values in different units and
• Home In Zone Size: Type in the size of the vector point’s home in zone (the
cylindrical zone around the point within which the user is expected to measure
the point).
NOTE: You can configure a default size using the Home In Zone Size
preference. See “Home In Zone Size” on page 51.
• Click the CREATE button to create the vector point.
132
November 2010
0.0
Circle
Requires: an XYZ coordinate, a vector, and a diameter.
• Name: Type in a name for the constructed circle.
• Circle: Type in the XYZ values. See “Typing values in different units and
• Normal: Type in the IJK values. See “Typing values in different units and
• Diameter: Type in the diameter value. See “Typing values in different units”
on page 279.
• Click the CREATE button to create the circle.
The constructed circle is located at the entered values in the current coordinate
system.
0.0
Sphere
Requires: a diameter and X, Y, and Z values.
• Name: Type in a name for the constructed sphere.
• Center: Type in the XYZ values. See “Typing values in different units and
on page 279.
• Click the CREATE button to create the sphere.
0.0
Cylinder
Requires: a diameter, and two center points, or a vector and a length.
• Name: Type in a name for the constructed cylinder.
• Point on Axis: Select a radio button:
• Point 2 on Axis: Type in the XYZ values. See “Typing values in different
OR
133
November 2010
• Axis Vector: Type in the IJK values. See “Typing values in different units
page 279.
on page 279.
• Click the CREATE button to create the cylinder.
0.0
Torus
Requires: a center point, direction number of the torus axis, major diameter,
minor diameter, start vector, and sweep angle.
• Name: Type in a name for the constructed torus.
• Center Point: Type in the XYZ values. See “Typing values in different units
• Point on Axis: Select a radio button:
• Point on Axis: Type in the XYZ values. See “Typing values in different units
OR
• Axis (Normal): Type in the IJK values. See “Typing values in different units
• Major Diameter: Type in the outermost or largest diameter of the torus.
• Minor Diameter: Type in the innermost or smallest diameter of the torus.
• Start Vector: Type in the IJK values. See “Typing values in different units and
• Sweep Angle: Type in the size of the segment to construct. Full sweep angle
(360°) constructs the whole torus.
• Click the CREATE button to create the torus.
XYZ
Tube
Requires: a diameter, PTB or XYZ, and bend radius.
NOTE: PTB is sometimes labeled as yBC.
134
November 2010
• Tube Diameter: Type in the diameter of the tube.
• Default Bend Radius: Type in the default value for the tube’s bend radius.
This value will automatically populate the Bend Radius field as you input PTB
or XYZ data.
• Key-in Tube Data As: Select a radio button:
• PTB: Type in the Pull, Turn, Bend, and Bend Radius values. See “Typing
values in different units and coordinate systems” on page 279.
OR
• XYZ: Type in the Breakpoints and Bend Radius values. See “Typing values
in different units and coordinate systems” on page 279.
• Click the CREATE button to create the tube.
0.0
Cone
Requires: see the options below.
• Name: Type in a name for the constructed cone.
There are five different methods for this construction. Select from the
CONSTRUCT CONE BY drop-down:
Apex, Axis, Distance to Apex and Angle

• Apex: Type in the XYZ values. See “Typing values in different units and
• Axis Direction: Type in the IJK values. See “Typing values in different units
• Distance to Apex: Type in a distance value.
• Angle: Type in the angle value. See “Typing values in different units” on
page 279.
• Half Angle: Clear this check box if you are entering the full angle of the
cone.
• Click the CREATE button to create the cone.
The constructed cone is located at the entered values in the selected coordinate
system.
135
November 2010
Apex, Axis Position and Angle
• Apex: Type in the XYZ values. See “Typing values in different units and
• Axis Position: Type in the XYZ values. See “Typing values in different units
page 279.
cone.
system.
Axis, Point on Axis, Diameter at Point and Angle

• Diameter at Point: Type in a diameter value. See “Typing values in different
units” on page 279.
page 279.
cone.
system.
Axis, Point on Axis, Distance to Apex and Diameter at Point

• Distance to Apex: Type in a distance value. See “Typing values in different
136
November 2010
• Diameter at Point: Type in a diameter value. See “Typing values in different
system.
Axis, Axis Position, Distance from Point to Apex and Angle

• Axis Position: Type in the XYZ values. See “Typing values in different units
• Distance from Point to Apex: Type in a distance value. See “Typing values
in different units” on page 279.
page 279.
cone.
system.
0.0
Round Slot
Requires: a center point, the vector of the major and minor axes, and the length
and the diameter of the round slot.
• Name: Type in a name for the constructed rectangular slot.
• Axis: Type in the IJK values. See “Typing values in different units and
page 279.
137
November 2010
• Diameter: Type in the length value. See “Typing values in different units” on
page 279.
• Select or clear the Length is End to End check box.
• Click the CREATE button to create the round slot.
Length is End to End
Length is End to End
Figure 6-1 Round Slot
0.0
Rectangular Slot
and the width of the rectangular slot.
page 279.
• Width: Type in the length value. See “Typing values in different units” on
page 279.
• Click the CREATE button to create the rectangular slot.
0.0
Ellipse
of the major and minor axes.
138
November 2010
• Name: Type in a name for the constructed ellipse.
• Major: Type in the major length value. See “Typing values in different units”
on page 279.
• Minor: Type in the minor length value. See “Typing values in different units”
on page 279.
Coordinate System
You can construct a coordinate system using values. See “Coordinate System: By
Key-In” on page 187.
139
November 2010

screen, contains the PICK FROM CAD commands. These commands are also
available in the PICK FROM CAD menu across the top of the screen.
Use these commands to create Nominal features from CAD models that you add
to the measurement file. For more information, see “CAD” on page 30.
Plane
Create a constructed plane from a CAD model. Select the feature, or select a
nominal point on a surface, surface trim line, polyline, or spline to create the
feature.
• Add Statistics: Check this box to add geometric statistics (tolerancing
information) to the constructed plane.
• Points: Select a nominal point to create the feature. See “Select Nominal
Points” on page 278.
NOTE: The vector of the plane is determined by the CAD view at the time you
construct the plane. If necessary, use the Flip Vector command to change the
vector of the constructed plane. See “Flip Vector” on page 37.
Line
Create a constructed line from a CAD model. Select the feature, or select a
nominal point on a surface trim line, polyline, or spline to create the feature.
information) to the constructed line.
NOTE: The vector of the line is determined by the CAD view at the time you
construct the line. If necessary, use the Flip Vector command to change the
vector of the constructed line. See “Flip Vector” on page 37.
141
November 2010
Point
Create a constructed point from a CAD model.
information) to the constructed point.
Vector Point
Create a vector point from a CAD model.
• Name: Type in a name for the vector point.
• Home In Zone Size: Type in the size of the vector point’s home in zone (the
cylindrical zone around the point within which the user is expected to measure
the point).
NOTE: You can configure a default size using the Home In Zone Size
preference. See “Home In Zone Size” on page 51.
• Click on any CAD surface to create the vector point.
Circle
Create a constructed circle from a CAD model. Select the feature, or select a
information) to the constructed circle.
NOTE: The vector of the circle is determined by the CAD view at the time you
construct the circle. If necessary, use the Flip Vector command to change the
vector of the constructed circle. See “Flip Vector” on page 37.
142
November 2010
Sphere
Create a constructed sphere from a CAD model. Select the feature, or select a
information) to the constructed sphere.
Cylinder
Create a constructed cylinder from a CAD model. Select the feature, or select a
information) to the constructed cylinder.
NOTE: The vector of the cylinder is determined by the CAD view at the time
you construct the cylinder. If necessary, use the Flip Vector command to
change the vector of the constructed cylinder. See “Flip Vector” on page 37.
Torus
Create a constructed torus from a CAD model. Select the feature, or select a
information) to the constructed torus.
143
November 2010
Cone
Create a constructed cone from a CAD model. Select the feature, or select a
information) to the constructed cone.
NOTE: The vector of the cone is determined by the CAD view at the time you
construct the cone. If necessary, use the Flip Vector command to change the
vector of the constructed cone. See “Flip Vector” on page 37.
Round Slot
Create a constructed round slot from a CAD model. Select the feature, or select a
• Name: Type in a name for the constructed round slot.
information) to the constructed round slot.
NOTE: The vector of the slot is determined by the CAD view at the time you
construct the slot. If necessary, use the Flip Vector command to change the
vector of the constructed slot. See “Flip Vector” on page 37.
Rectangular Slot
Create a constructed rectangular slot from a CAD model. Select the feature, or
select a nominal point on a surface trim line, polyline, or spline to create the
feature.
144
November 2010
information) to the constructed rectangular slot.
NOTE: The vector of the slot is determined by the CAD view at the time you
construct the slot. If necessary, use the Flip Vector command to change the
vector of the constructed slot. See “Flip Vector” on page 37.
Ellipse
Create a constructed ellipse from a CAD model. Select the feature, or select a
information) to the constructed ellipse.
NOTE: The vector of the ellipse is determined by the CAD view at the time you
construct the ellipse. If necessary, use the Flip Vector command to change the
vector of the constructed ellipse. See “Flip Vector” on page 37.
145
November 2010

screen, contains the CONSTRUCT commands. These commands are also
available in the CONSTRUCT menu across the top of the screen. The Construct
menu consists of nine feature commands that “flyout” to additional Construction
commands. You can use Constructed features in other constructions, dimensions,
coordinate systems, or measurements.
Automatic Constructions
CAM2 Q automatically creates a construction when you create a construction
feature using nominal features and then create and measure measured features
associated to the individual nominal features. See “Pick From CAD Menu” on
page 141 and “Key-In Menu” on page 131.
For Example:
• Add nominals to your measurement file, four circles in a bolt pattern.
• Construct a circle by best fit using those four circles. This is a nominal
constructed circle.
• Add Measurements to the four nominal circles.
• Add Readings to each of the four measured circles.
• A Constructed feature, by best fit, using the four measured circles
automatically adds to the measurement file and associates to the nominal
constructed circle.
Using Actual and Nominal Features

If you select a combination of Actual (measured and constructed) and Nominal
features in any CONSTRUCT command, a drop-down arrow adds to the
CREATE button in the dialog box. Select CREATE AS NOMINAL or CREATE AS
ACTUAL from the drop-down list.
CAUTION: Although at times it may be necessary to mix nominal, measured,
and constructed features when creating constructions, do it rarely and with
caution because mixing types of features to create a construction might cause
inaccuracies in your measurement data.
Construct Plane
A plane is constructed from point-reducible features, entered values, the
intersection of features, or a CAD model.
147
November 2010
Construct Plane: By 3 Points and 3 Offsets

Requires: three points and three offset distances.
• Points: Select a Point. See “Select a Point” on page 278.
• Offsets: Enter positive or negative offset distances. See “Typing values in
different units and coordinate systems” on page 279.
• Click the CREATE button to create the plane.
The plane is constructed so the perpendicular distance from the plane to the
selected points, using the offset values. The direction of the offset is determined
by the selected points, and follows the right-hand rule. See “Right-Hand Rule”
on page 275.
NOTE: A plane can be constructed above or below the three points, which is
why the order that the points are selected determines which plane is created.
Z
Y X
Figure 8-1 Construct Plane: By 3 Points and 3 Offsets
Construct Plane: By Best Fit

Requires: three point-reducible features.
• Points: Select from the List. See “Select from the List” on page 276.
• After you add the minimum number of features a preview feature draws in
the MAIN window and the dialog box displays preview feature data.
148
November 2010
The selected features are constructed into a Best Fit Plane. See “Best Fit Plane”
on page 273. Use the READINGS panel to see the point data of the feature. For
more information, see “Readings” on page 95.
Construct Plane: By Bisection

Requires: two planes.
• Planes: Select a Plane. See “Select a Plane” on page 277.
• If the two planes are not parallel, another plane is constructed equidistantly
from both planes.
• If the two planes are parallel, another plane is constructed midway between
the two planes, with the same vector as the first plane.
Z
Y X
Figure 8-2 Construct Plane: By Bisection

NOTE: There are two possible solutions that are determined by the vector of
the selected planes. For more information, see “Flip Vector” on page 37.
Construct Plane: By Offset

Requires: a plane and an offset value, a point and an offset distance, or a vector
and an offset value.
• Plane: Select a Plane. See “Select a Plane” on page 277.
149
November 2010
• Offset: Select a radio button:
• Absolute Offset: Enter a positive or negative offset distance. See “Typing
values in different units” on page 279.
OR
• Point: Select a Point. See “Select a Point” on page 278.
• Offset: Enter a positive or negative offset distance. See “Typing values in
different units” on page 279.
OR
• Along Normal: Select a Plane. See “Select a Plane” on page 277.
• Offset: Enter a positive or negative offset distance. See “Typing values in
To construct a parallel plane, select the plane as a vector and type in an offset
value.
Z
Y X
Figure 8-3 Construct Plane: By Offset
Construct Plane: Perpendicular

Requires: a line (two points) and a point.
• Line: Select a radio button:
• Line: Select a Line. See “Select a Line” on page 278.
OR
150
November 2010
The plane is constructed perpendicular to the line and through the point. The
normal vector of the constructed plane is the same as the vector of the selected
line.
Z
Y X
Figure 8-4 Construct Plane: Perpendicular
Construct Line
A line is constructed from point-reducible features, entered values, the
Construct Line: By Best Fit

Requires: point-reducible or line-reducible features for a 3D line, and point-
reducible or line-reducible features and a plane for a 2D line.
• Points/Lines: Select from the List. See “Select from the List” on page 276.
• Plane: Select a Plane. See “Select a Plane” on page 277. Or clear the USE
PLANE check box.
If the USE PLANE check box is selected, the features are projected to the plane
before constructed into a Best Fit Line. Otherwise, the features are fit to a plane.
See “Best Fit Line” on page 273. Use the READINGS panel to see the point data
of the feature. For more information, see “Readings” on page 95. Use the
151
November 2010
READINGS panel to see the point data of the feature. For more information, see
“Readings” on page 95.
Construct Line: By Axis Best Fit

Use this command to determine best-fit centerlines for shafts or gears containing
different-sized cylinders.
Requires: line-reducible features for a 3D line, and line-reducible features and a
plane for a 2D line.
• Lines: Select from the List. See “Select from the List” on page 276.
PLANE check box.
before constructed into a Best Fit Line. Otherwise, the features are fit to a plane.
See “Best Fit Line” on page 273. Use the READINGS panel to see the point data
of the feature. For more information, see “Readings” on page 95. Use the
READINGS panel to see the point data of the feature. For more information, see
Construct Line: By Bisection

Requires: a line and another line.
• Lines: Select a Line. See “Select a Line” on page 278.
• If the two lines are not parallel, another line is constructed equidistantly from
both lines.
152
November 2010
• If the two lines are parallel, another line is constructed midway between the
two lines, with the same vector as the first line.
Z
Y X
Figure 8-5 Construct Line: By Bisection

NOTE: There are two possible solutions that are determined by the vector of
the selected lines. For more information, see “Flip Vector” on page 37.
Construct Line: By Intersection of Two Planes

Requires: two planes.
The line is constructed from the intersection of the two selected planes.
Z
Y X
Figure 8-6 Construct Line: By Intersection of Two Planes
153
November 2010
Construct Line: By Offset

Requires: a plane, two points, and/or two offsets.
• Offsets: Enter a positive or negative offset distance. See “Typing values in
OR
• Offsets: Enter positive or negative offset distances. See “Typing values in
The line is constructed by the order of the selected points and follows the right-
hand rule. This command is often used to construct a coordinate axis from two
points at a known distance from that axis. See “Right-Hand Rule” on page 275.
NOTE: There are two possible solutions that are determined by the order you
select the points.
Z
Y X
Figure 8-7 Construct Line: By Offset
Construct Line: By Projection

Requires: a plane and a line (two points).
154
November 2010
• Line: Select a radio button:
OR
The line is constructed from the projection of the selected line to the selected
plane.
Z
Y X
Figure 8-8 Construct Line: By Projection
Construct Line: Parallel

Requires: a line (or two points) and another point and/or an offset, or a distance
in an existing plane.
• Source Line: Select a radio button:
OR
• New Line: Select a radio button:
OR
155
November 2010
• Offset: Type in the XYZ values. See “Typing values in different units and
OR
• Offset: Type in the XYZ values. See “Typing values in different units and
The line is constructed parallel to the selected line and through the point, or
parallel to the selected line in the selected plane.
Z
Y X
Figure 8-9 Construct Line: Parallel
Construct Line: Perpendicular

Requires: a plane and a point.
156
November 2010
The line is constructed perpendicular to the selected plane and through the point,
or perpendicular to the selected line and through the point.
Z
Y X
Figure 8-10 Construct Line: Perpendicular
Construct Point
A point is constructed from point-reducible features, entered values, the
Construct Point: By Best Fit

Requires: point-reducible features.
The selected features are constructed into a Best Fit Point. See “Best Fit Point”
Construct Point: By Bisection

Requires: two features.
• Features: Select a Feature. See “Select a Feature” on page 277.
157
November 2010
• The point is constructed between the two selected points, or the MidPoint.
Z
Y X
Figure 8-11 Construct Point: By Bisection
Construct Point: By Intersection

Requires: two features or three planes.
• Point: Select a radio button:
OR
Two Feature Examples

The point is constructed at the intersection of two lines.
Z
Y X
Figure 8-12 Construct Point: Two Lines

NOTE: If the two lines do not intersect, a point is created at the midpoint of the
segment and is defined by the shortest distance between the lines.
158
November 2010
The point is constructed at the intersection of the two circles.
Z
Y X
Figure 8-13 Construct Point: Two Circles

NOTE: There are two possible solutions for this point based on the order in
which the circles are selected. The constructed point is determined by the right-
hand rule. See “Right-Hand Rule” on page 275.
The point is constructed at the intersection of the line and a plane.
Z
Y X
Figure 8-14 Construct Point: Line and Plane

• Line and Circle: the line is projected to the plane of the circle and the point is
constructed where the line exits the circle.
• Line and Cylinder: where the line exits the cylinder.
• Line and Sphere: where the line exits the sphere.
NOTE: Since the point is constructed at the exit point (second intersection) the
vector direction of the line is important. For more information, see “Flip
Vector” on page 37.
159
November 2010
Three Planes Example
The point is constructed at the intersection of three planes.
Z
Y X
Figure 8-15 Construct Point: Three Planes
Construct Point: By Offset

Requires: a point and a 3D offset distances.
OR
• Along Line: Select a Line. See “Select a Line” on page 278.
• Distance: Enter positive or negative offset distances. See “Typing values in
OR
• Offset: Enter positive or negative offset distances. See “Typing values in
160
November 2010
The point is constructed offset from the selected point.
Z
Y X
Figure 8-16 Construct Point: By Offset
Construct Point: By Projection

Requires: a point and a feature.
• Feature: Select a Feature. See “Select a Feature” on page 277.
Point Projection Examples

The point is constructed from the projection of the selected point to the selected
line.
Z
Y X
Figure 8-17 Construct Point: Point Project to a Line
161
November 2010
The point is constructed from the projection of the selected point to the selected
plane, or surface. If you select the X, Y, or Z axis you may also select any
coordinate system to guide the projection.
Z
Y X
Figure 8-18 Construct Point: Point Project to a Plane/Surface
Construct Circle
A circle is constructed from point-reducible features, the intersection of features,
entered values, or a CAD model.
Circle Vectors
Some CONSTRUCT < CIRCLE commands have an option to select the vector
direction of the constructed circle. This vector direction is for the finished
constructed circle - not the direction of the construction.
Construct Circle: By Best Fit

Requires: a plane and a minimum of three point-reducible features.
PLANE check box.
• Click the CREATE button to create the dimension.
162
November 2010
before constructed into a Best Fit Circle. Otherwise, the features are fit to a plane.
See “Best Fit Circle” on page 271. Use the READINGS panel to see the point data
of the feature. For more information, see “Readings” on page 95.
Construct Circle: By Intersection of a Plane and a

Feature
Requires: a plane and a sphere, a plane and a cone, or a plane and a cylinder.
NOTE: This constructs a best fit circle at the intersection of the plane and the
feature. It does not create an ellipse. See “Construct Ellipse: By Intersection”
on page 170.
• Sphere, Cone, Cylinder: Select a Feature. See “Select a Feature” on
page 277.
• Lock Plane of Circle: The intersection points can project to one of two planes.
Select a radio button:
• In Plane of Feature 1
• Perpendicular to Feature 2
Z
Y X
Figure 8-19 Construct Circle: Plane Intersect
163
November 2010
Construct Circle: By Offset

Requires: a circle and a 3D offset.
• Circle: Select a Feature. See “Select a Feature” on page 277.
• Absolute Offset: Type in positive or negative X, Y, and Z offset distances.
See “Typing values in different units and coordinate systems” on page 279.
• Offset Along a Line: Select a Line. See “Select a Line” on page 278. Type
in an offset distance. See “Typing values in different units and coordinate
systems” on page 279.
• Offset Along a Normal: Select a Plane. See “Select a Plane” on page 277.
Type in an offset distance. See “Typing values in different units and
• Flip Vector: Reverse the vector of the constructed circle by selecting this
check box. See “Circle Vectors” on page 162.
• New Diameter: Change the diameter of the constructed circle by selecting this
check box and typing in the diameter value. See “Typing values in different
Construct Circle: By Coaxial Intersection

Requires: two intersecting coaxial cones, or the intersection of a coaxial cone
and cylinder.
NOTE: Features must be located and orientated relative to each other so that
their surfaces of revolution intersect.
• Angle Tolerance: Type in the angle to determine co-linearity (maximum 5°).
• Click the CREATE button to create the circle.
Construct Circle: From Cone

Requires: a cone, and a distance, diameter, or feature.
164
November 2010
• Cone: Select a Feature. See “Select a Feature” on page 277.
• Distance: Type in a positive or negative distance. The distance you enter is
measured from the apex of the cone. The diameter of the circle is determined
by the diameter of the cone at the constructed center point of the circle. See
“Typing values in different units” on page 279.
• Diameter: Type in a diameter. The circle is constructed at the position within
the cone. See “Typing values in different units” on page 279.
• Feature: Select a Feature. See “Select a Feature” on page 277. The selected
features diameter is used, and the circle is constructed at the position within the
cone.
Construct Sphere
A sphere is constructed from point-reducible features, entered values, or a CAD
model.
Construct Sphere: By Best Fit

Requires: five point-reducible features.
The selected features are constructed into a Best Fit Sphere. See “Best Fit
Sphere” on page 275. Use the READINGS panel to see the point data of the
Construct Sphere: By Offset

Requires: a sphere, two points, and/or two offsets.
165
November 2010
• Feature: Select a Feature. See “Select a Feature” on page 277.
OR
• Along Line: Select a Line. See “Select a Line” on page 278.
• Distance: Enter positive or negative offset distances. See “Typing values in
OR
• Offset: Enter positive or negative offset distances. See “Typing values in
• New Diameter: Change the diameter of the constructed circle by selecting this
check box and typing in the diameter value. See “Typing values in different
Construct Cylinder
A cylinder is constructed from point-reducible features, entered values, or a CAD
model.
Construct Cylinder: By Best Fit

Requires: a minimum of three point-reducible features.
The selected features are constructed into a Best Fit Cylinder. See “Best Fit
Cylinder” on page 272. Use the READINGS panel to see the point data of the
166
November 2010
Construct Torus
A torus is constructed from existing features.
Construct Torus: By Best Fit

Requires: a minimum of nine point-reducible features.
• Click the CREATE button to create the torus.
The selected features are constructed into a Best Fit Torus. See “Best Fit Torus”
Construct Tube
A tube is constructed from existing measured or nominal features.
Construct Tube: From Features

Requires: two planes, two or more cylinders, a tube diameter and a tube bend
radius.
• Name: Type in a name for the constructed tube.
• Diameter: Enter a value, or automatically use the average diameter from the
features.
• Start Plane: Select a Plane. This is END-B. See “Select a Plane” on page 277.
• End Plane: Select a Plane. This is END-A. See “Select a Plane” on page 277.
• Bend Radius: Enter the Bend Radius of the tube.
• Straight Segment: Select a Feature. Select each feature and then click ENTER
to add more features. Select the cylinders in order from start to end. See
“Select a Feature” on page 277.
• Click the CREATE button to create the tube.
167
November 2010
Breakpoints
Breakpoints are constructed points and are the intersection of features along the
tube:
• END-B and the first straight segment.
• First and second segment, second and third, third and fourth, etc.
• A radius constructs at the intersection point using the bend radius value.
• END-A and the last straight segment.
A polyline constructs from through all of the breakpoints from END-B to END-
A.
Construction
A round tube constructs along this polyline from start to end using the diameter
value.
Construct Cone
A cone is constructed from point-reducible features, entered values, or a CAD
model.
Construct Cone: By Best Fit

Requires: a minimum of six point-reducible features.
The selected features are constructed into a Best Fit Cone. See “Best Fit Cone”
Construct Slot
Rectangular and round slots are constructed from existing features or a CAD
model.
168
November 2010
Construct Rectangular Slot: By Best Fit

Requires: six point-reducible features.
the Main window and the dialog box displays preview feature data.
• Click the CREATE button to create the rectangular slot.
The selected features are constructed into a Best Fit Rectangular Slot. See “Best
Fit Rectangular Slot” on page 274. Use the READINGS panel to see the point data
of the feature. For more information, see “Readings” on page 95.
Construct Round Slot: By Best Fit

Requires: six point-reducible features.
• Name: Type in a name for the constructed round slot.
• Click the CREATE button to create the round slot.
The selected features are constructed into a Best Fit Round Slot. See “Best Fit
Round Slot” on page 274. Use the READINGS panel to see the point data of the
Construct Ellipse
An ellipse is created from point-reducible features, entered values, or a CAD
model.
Construct Ellipse: By Best Fit

Requires: a minimum of three point-reducible features.
169
November 2010
• Click the CREATE button to create the ellipse.
The selected features are constructed into a Best Fit Ellipse. See “Best Fit
Ellipse” on page 272. Use the READINGS panel to see the point data of the
Construct Ellipse: By Intersection

Requires: a cylinder and a plane.
• Cylinder: Select a Feature. See “Select a Feature” on page 277.
Z
Y X
Figure 8-20 Construct Ellipse: By Intersect
Construct Coordinate System

You can construct a coordinate system using the existing features in a file. See
“Coordinate Systems Menu” on page 179.
170
November 2010

screen, contains the DIMENSION commands. These commands are also
available in the DIMENSION menu across the top of the screen. The Dimension
menu consists of two feature commands that “flyout” to additional Dimension
commands. Dimensions appear on the screen with the dimension data. The
number of digits in the dimension data is a preference. See “Units” on page 44.
Automatic Dimension
CAM2 Q automatically creates a dimension when you create a dimension feature
using nominal features and then create and measure measured features associated
to the individual nominal features. See “Pick From CAD Menu” on page 141 and
“Key-In Menu” on page 131.
For Example:
• Add nominals to your measurement file, two circles.
• Add a length dimension between those two circles. This is a nominal
dimension.
• Add Measurements to the two nominal circles.
• Add Readings to each of the two measured circles.
• A Dimension feature, length: from features, using the two measured circles
automatically adds to the measurement file and associates to the nominal
dimension.
Angle
Angle commands calculate the angular difference between two features.
0.0
Angle: By Key-In
Requires: a numeric value.
• Name: Type in a name for the angle dimension.
• Angle: Type in the value.
171
November 2010
Angle: From Features

Requires: two features or three points.
• Name: Type in a name for the angle dimension. Select the TWO FEATURES or
THREE POINTS radio button.
OR
Two Features Example

The angle dimension is the angle between the two lines.
NOTE: If the lines do not intersect, the calculated angle is the projection of the
first line to the second line.
90° 0’ 16.06”
Figure 9-1 Angle: Line/Line

The angle dimension is the angle between the line and the plane.
90° 30’ 26.62”
Figure 9-2 Angle: Line/Plane
172

November 2010
The angle dimension is the angle between the two planes.
90° 16’ 51.32”
Figure 9-3 Angle: Plane/Plane
Three Points Example

The angle dimension is constructed from the first point to the second, using the
third point as the apex.
45° 1’ 38.3”
Figure 9-4 Angle: Three Points
Length
Length commands calculate the length between two features and report changes
in X, Y, and Z axis and the 3D distance.
0.0
Length: By Key-In
Requires: a numeric value.
173
November 2010
• Name: Type in a name for the length dimension.
• Length: Type in the value. See “Typing values in different units” on page 279.
Length: From Features

Requires: two features.
• Name: Type in a name for the length dimension.
• Length: Select a Feature. See “Select a Feature” on page 277. Select plane,
line or point for each feature. See “Select” on page 276.
Two Feature Examples

Line-Line
The length dimension is the shortest distance from the first to the second line.
25.23mm
Figure 9-5 Length: Line/Line

Coplanar Lines
If the lines are coplanar, the length is measured from the center point of one line
to the center point of the other line.
NOTE: If the lines do not intersect, the length dimension is the shortest vertical
distance between the two lines. If the lines are greater than 3 degrees deviation
from parallel, the length cannot solve. See “Figure 9-5, Length: Line/Line.
Parallel Lines
The resulting dimension is the distance between the parallel lines. Measured lines
will never be exactly parallel, so the two lines are analyzed to see if they are not
174
November 2010
parallel before the final calculation is displayed. This calculation will give you a
non-zero result.
Skew Lines
Skew lines do not lie on the same plane. In such cases, the result will be the
shortest distance between the lines as if they were infinite. If the lines intersect,
the length dimension will be 0.
Co-Planar Non-Parallel Lines
All lines that are co-planar and non-parallel will intersect, so normally this would
create a 0 length; however, the resulting dimension is the distance from the mid-
point of the first line to the second line as if it were infinite.
NOTE: The result of co-planar non-parallel lines may not provide repeatable
results.
Plane-Plane
The length dimension is the perpendicular length from the center point of the first
plane to the second plane.
25.23mm
Figure 9-6 Length: Plane/Plane

NOTE: If the planes do not intersect, the length dimension is the shortest
vertical distance between the two planes. If the planes are greater than 3
degrees deviation from parallel, the length cannot solve. See “Figure 9-6,
Length: Plane/Plane.
Point-Line
175

November 2010
The length dimension is the shortest distance between the point and the line.
65.61mm
Figure 9-7 Length: Point/Line

Point-Point
The length dimension is the shortest distance between the two points.
269.96mm
Figure 9-8 Length: Point/Point

Point-Plane
The length dimension is the shortest distance between the point and the plane.
95.72mm
Figure 9-9 Length: Point/Plane
176

November 2010
Point-Surface
The length dimension is the shortest distance between the point and the surface.
95.72mm
Figure 9-10 Length: Point/Surface

NOTE: A surface has boundaries, so the shortest distance is the distance from
the point to the surface or surface edge.
177
November 2010

The Coordinate Systems menu consists commands that “flyout” to additional
Coordinate System commands.
CAUTION: Although, at times it may be necessary to mix nominal,
measured, and constructed features when creating constructions, do it with
caution. Mixing types of features to create a construction might cause
inaccuracies in your measurement data.
Coordinate System Wizard

Using the existing features in a file, you can construct a coordinate system. You
can also press the C hot key on the keyboard to create a coordinate system. The
default coordinate system is World, which is the same coordinate system as your
measurement device.
• Nominal Coordinate Systems, NCS, are generated from nominal and/or
constructed features.
• Measured/Constructed Coordinate Systems, MCS, are generated from
measured and/or constructed features.
If you are using multiple coordinate systems in your measurement file, quickly
switch between each coordinate system by choosing it from the COORDINATE
SYSTEM drop-down window. This drop-down window is a toolbar, and its default
location is just under the pull-down menus at the top of the CAM2 Q window.
Alignment Using Coordinate Systems

One way to align Measured data with Nominal CAD data:
1 Create a Coordinate System from the Nominal CAD data. This is known as the
Nominal Coordinate System (NCS).
2 Create a Measured Coordinate System from the measured/constructed data.
This is known as the Measured Coordinate System (MCS).
3 Create a new Coordinate System alignment and select these two coordinate
systems in the command. See “Coordinate System” on page 191.
NOTE: CAM2 Q only supports right-hand rule coordinate systems. See “Right-
Hand Rule” on page 275.
179
November 2010
Basic Tab
Use the BASIC tab when you have a plane, a line, and a point that define the
coordinate system.
Requires: three features that define a coordinate system.
• Name: Type in a name for the coordinate system.
• Plane Feature: Select a Plane. See “Select a Plane” on page 277. You can
also select the coordinate axis that this feature defines. The default Axis value
is +Z.
• Line Feature: Select a Line. See “Select a Line” on page 278. You can also
select the coordinate axis that this feature defines. The default Axis value is
+X.
• Point Feature: Select a Point. See “Select a Point” on page 278.
Other Functions:
• Align With: Select a Coordinate System. See “Select a Coordinate System” on
page 279. The coordinate system automatically aligns with another existing
coordinate system. The default value is World. For more information, see
“Coordinate System” on page 191.
NOTE: After you create a coordinate system alignment by checking the Align
With checkbox and clicking OK, clearing the checkbox will not remove the
alignment.
• Offset: Select the check box and type the XYZ location for the origin of the
new coordinate system. See “Typing values in different units and coordinate
• Rotation: Select the check box and type the amount of rotation around any of
the three axes. (Negative values are allowed.)
NOTE: If you select both OFFSET and ROTATE ABOUT check boxes, you can
select to offset or rotate first.
Click the OK button to create the coordinate system. The features construct a
coordinate system. Any coordinate system offset and rotation follows the right-
NOTE: If you select a hybrid of measured and nominal features as Primary,
Secondary, and Origin features, you have the option of creating the coordinate
system as Actual or Nominal. Click the drop-down arrow on the OK button to
create the coordinate system as Actual or Nominal.
180
November 2010
Basic Coordinate System Examples
The coordinate system constructs in the plane. All features temporarily project to
the plane in the construction of the coordinate system.
Plane/Line/Point
This is commonly referred to as the 3-2-1 coordinate system: 3 points (plane) - 2
points (line) - 1 point (point).
• Plane Feature: a plane.
• Line Feature: a line.
• Point Feature: a point. This defines the origin (0,0,0) of the coordinate
system.
Z
Y X
Figure 10-1 Plane/Line/Point
Advanced Tab
Use the ADVANCED tab when you have features for, or features that construct a
plane, a line, or a point that define the coordinate system.
Requires: features that define a coordinate system.
• Primary: Click the PLANE or LINE icon. Select a Feature. See “Select a
Feature” on page 277. You can select the coordinate axis that this feature
defines. The default Axis value is +Z. You can type in an offset value for the
feature.
• PLANE icon: Select features that define a plane. Three point- reducible,
two line-reducible, two point and one line-reducible, or a plane. The right-
hand rule determines the axis direction of the plane when you use multiple
features. See “Right-Hand Rule” on page 275.
181
November 2010
• LINE icon: Select features that define a line. Two point-reducible or a

line. The order of the two points determines the axis direction of the line.
• Secondary: Click the PLANE or LINE icon. Select a Feature. See

“Select a Feature” on page 277. You can select the coordinate axis that this
feature defines. The default Axis value is +X. You can type in an offset value
for the feature.
• PLANE icon: Select features that define a plane. Three point- reducible,
two line-reducible, two point and one line-reducible, or a plane. The right-
hand rule determines the axis direction of the plane when you use multiple
features. See “Right-Hand Rule” on page 275.
• LINE icon: Select features that define a line. Two point-reducible or a

line. The order of the two points determines the axis direction of the line.
• Origin: Select a Feature. See “Select a Feature” on page 277.
• Hold Position: the coordinate system is at the center of the feature.
• Hold to Primary: the coordinate system is at the closest point on the
primary feature from the origin feature.
• Hold to Secondary: the coordinate system is at the closest point on the
secondary feature from the origin feature.
• Hold to Key-In: the coordinate system corresponds to the location (primary,
secondary and origin) keyed-in by the user.
Other Functions:
NOTE: If you select both OFFSET and ROTATION check boxes, you can select to
offset or rotate first.
182
November 2010
Click the OK button to create the coordinate system. The features construct a
coordinate system. Any coordinate system offset and rotation follows the right-
Advanced Coordinate System Examples

Plane/Line (two points)/Point
This is commonly referred to as the 3-2-1 coordinate system: 3 points (plane) - 2
points (line) - 1 point (point).
• Primary: a plane.
• Secondary: two points. Point 1 to Point 2 define the axis.
• Origin: a point. This defines origin (0,0,0) of the coordinate system.
Z
Y X
Figure 10-2 Plane/Line (two points)/Point

Plane/Plane/Plane
This is commonly referred to as the 3 Plane coordinate system.
• Secondary: a second plane. The intersection of the first and second plane
defines the axis.
183
November 2010
• Origin: a third plane. This defines the origin (0,0,0) of the coordinate system.
The origin is the intersection of the axis and the third plane.
Z
Y X
Figure 10-3 Plane/Plane/Plane

Point/Point/Point
This is commonly referred to as the 3 Point coordinate system.
• Primary: three points. Point 1, to Point 2, to Point 3 define the plane.
• Secondary: two points. Point 1 to Point 2 define the axis.
• Origin: a point. This defines origin (0,0,0) of the coordinate system.
Z
Y X
Figure 10-4 Point/Point/Point

Plane/Line/Point Hold Secondary
This is commonly referred to as the Perpendicular Intersection coordinate
system.
• Secondary: a line.
184
November 2010
• Origin: a point. Select the HOLD SECONDARY radio button. This defines origin
(0,0,0) of the coordinate system and moves it to the nearest point on the line.
Z
Y X
Figure 10-5 Plane/Line/Point Hold Secondary

Plane/Line/Line
This is commonly referred to as the Line/Line Intersect coordinate system.
• Primary Feature: a plane.
• Secondary Feature: a line.
• Origin Feature: a second line. This defines the origin (0,0,0) of the coordinate
system. The origin is the point at which the second line intersects the first line.
Z
Y X
Figure 10-6 Plane/Line/Line

Plane/Line/Cylinder
This is commonly referred to as the Bore coordinate system.
• Primary Feature: This defines the plane.
• Secondary Feature: This defines the axis.
185
November 2010
• Origin Feature: This defines the origin (0,0,0) of the coordinate system. The
origin is the point at which the cylinder intersects the plane.
Z
Y X
Figure 10-7 Plane/Line/Cylinder
Coordinate System: By Offset

Create a new coordinate system by rotating and/or offsetting (moving) an
existing coordinate system.
• Select a Coordinate System. See “Select a Coordinate System” on page 279.
NOTE: If you select both OFFSET and ROTATE ABOUT check boxes, you can
select to offset or rotate first.
• Click the CREATE button to create the coordinate system.
Offset and Rotation are applied according to the right-hand rule. See “Right-
Hand Rule” on page 275.
186
November 2010
0.0
0.0
0.0
Coordinate System: By Key-In

0.0
Type the coordinates of the new origin, a point on the X axis and a point on the
XY plane to define the coordinate system.
• Origin: Type in the XYZ values. See “Typing values in different units and
• Point on X Axis: Type in the XYZ values. See “Typing values in different
• Point on XY Plane: Type in the XYZ values. See “Typing values in different
• Click the CREATE button to create the coordinate system.
187
November 2010

Alignments - nominal data (CAD) is matched to measured data (Part). These are
often called “Coordinate System” alignments. This can be a best fit of features or
an exact fit of constructed coordinate systems. See “Alignment Using Coordinate
Systems” on page 179.
• Coordinate System
• Iterative
• Three Feature
Alignments use all the active readings of measured features, regardless of the
device position. Editing the readings of an alignment feature (feature used in an
alignment command) causes a recalculation of the alignment. See “Readings” on
page 95.
After completing an Alignment you should run a PRESET VIEW command. See
“Preset Views” on page 75. This will help you see the part as you are measuring.
NOTE: CAM2 Q only supports right-hand rule coordinate systems.
If you are using multiple alignments in your measurement file, quickly switch
between each coordinate system by choosing it from the ALIGNMENT drop-down
window. This drop-down window is a toolbar, and its default location is just
under the pull-down menus at the top of the CAM2 Q window.
Coordinate Systems
For simplicity, there are two coordinate systems for use in a Coordinate System
Alignment:
1 World Coordinate System (WCS) - a coordinate system containing the
associated nominal features. This is the default coordinate system of a new file.
2 Measured Coordinate System (MCS) - a coordinate system containing the
Measured and Constructed features. See “Alignment Using Coordinate
NOTE: You can also construct a Nominal Coordinate System (NCS) using a
Coordinate System Wizard command. See “Coordinate System Wizard” on
page 179.
189
November 2010
Create and Edit Alignments

Select ALIGNMENTS < CREATE/EDIT to access the ALIGNMENTS panel. The
ALIGNMENTS panel consists of three boxes: The CREATE ALIGNMENTS box, the
EXISTING ALIGNMENTS box, and the DETAILS box. You can also press the A hot
key on the keyboard.
‘
Figure 11-1 Alignments panel
Alignment Requirements
Alignments require Measured/Constructed features with associated nominals, or
two Constructed Coordinate Systems (Measured and Nominal). These
alignments move the Measured/Constructed features to their nominals according
to the position of each feature.
• The CREATE ALIGNMENTS box contains four buttons for each creation method:
Iterative, Coordinate System, Three Feature, and Import.
• The EXISTING ALIGNMENTS box contains a list of created alignments. The
active alignment is shown in bold. Highlight an alignment to view the
alignment’s properties in the DETAILS box.
• The DETAILS box contains properties pertaining to the alignment highlighted in
the EXISTING ALIGNMENTS box, including Name, Status, Temperature, and
Material.
Status
The Status of the alignment is Undefined until you assign parameters to the
alignment’s features and click APPLY/SOLVE. The Status becomes Defined
once the alignment solves.
190
November 2010
NOTE: If you have a Defined alignment (e.g. iterative alignment with a
minimum of 3 features required) and you delete one or more features from the
alignment’s features list, the alignment status will become Undefined.
Set Active
From the ALIGNMENTS panel, highlight an alignment in the Existing Alignments
box and click the SET ACTIVE button to make that alignment current.
NOTE: The active alignment will appear in bold text in the EXISTING
ALIGNMENTS box
NOTE: To “clear” the alignment, select NONE from the ALIGNMENT drop-
down window. This drop-down window is a toolbar, and its default location is
just under the pull-down menus at the top of the CAM2 Q window.
Recalculation
When you edit one or more features comprising an alignment, CAM2 Q
automatically recalculates the alignment based on the updated information.
NOTE: Recalculation may be time-consuming depending on the complexity of
the alignment. You may find it beneficial to remove the alignment, edit the
component features, and then re-create the alignment.
Delete
Click the DELETE button to delete any selected Alignment.
Export
Click the EXPORT button to save the current Alignment to a text file (*.xal) on
your computer. Use the ALIGNMENT < IMPORT command to add this
alignment to any other file.
Coordinate System
Requires: a Constructed and a Nominal coordinate system.
• Measured Coordinate System: Select a Coordinate System. See “Select a
Coordinate System” on page 279.
• Nominal Coordinate System: Select a Coordinate System. See “Select a
Coordinate System” on page 279.
191
November 2010
The Measured Coordinate System (MCS) moves to the Nominal Coordinate
System (NCS) or the World Coordinate System (WCS). See “Coordinate
NOTE: In most cases, the MCS to NCS alignment removes the need for
rotating and translating a Constructed Coordinate System to match the World
Coordinate System.
Iterative
In the ALIGNMENTS panel click the ITERATIVE button, or select
ALIGNMENTS < ITERATIVE from the pull-down menus.
Requires: three or more point-reducible features with associated nominals, or
four inspect surface/vector points and one feature point (RPS alignment).
Figure 11-2 Alignments panel - Iterative
NOTE: If a measured feature does not have a nominal, you must add one to
continue. For more information, see “Nominals and Tolerances” on page 96.
Point cloud features generated with the Inspect Surface command may be used
in an iterative alignment. For more information, see “Inspect Surface” on
page 129.
Home-in points with nominal surface points cannot be used in an iterative
alignment; you can only home in to a nominal point.
Details box:
• Select a Feature. See “Select a Feature” on page 277.
• You can also select features from the CAD View, or the FEATURES panel
before running the command:
• Select the features.
192
November 2010
• Create an Iterative alignment.
• Click the ADD FEATURE button in the DETAILS box.
• Remove any feature by clicking the X next to the drop-down arrow to the right
of the feature name.
Options box:
• Enter a Maximum Iterations number for the calculations, or use the default
value. Use this number if your alignment calculation seems to “loop” between
two or more solutions. Change the default value by using the Preference
command. See “Maximum Iterations” on page 53.
• Enter a Tolerance for the Iterative best fit error of the Measured to Nominal
features, or use the default value. Change the default value by using the
Preference command. See “Iterative Alignment Tolerance” on page 53.
• Click the APPLY/SOLVE button.
Results box:
• The NUMBER OF ITERATIONS of the alignment solution.
• The maximum ERROR between the measured and nominal features.
NOTE: The 3D, X, Y, and Z errors for each feature to its nominal are listed to
the right of the feature name.
• Any calculated SCALE of the alignment solution.
Set Weights
Each feature can have an X, Y, and Z coordinate value used with a higher priority
in the calculation.
• Select the SET WEIGHTS check box to add the Weights columns to the feature
list.
• Enter a value for the X, Y, and Z coordinate value for each feature. The default
value is 1; input a number greater than 1 to emphasize a weight.
NOTE: When you check the SET WEIGHTS check box, CAM2 Q will
automatically calculate weight values for measured vector points. For more
information, see “Measuring a Vector Point” on page 121. For all other
feature types, weights of 1,1,1 are set by default. You can then change the
values.
Fit Scale
You can select to scale the measured features during the best fit calculations. The
scale is the ratio between the measured features and their nominal features.
193
November 2010
• Select the FIT SCALE check box to scale measured features during best fit
calculations.
Material Temperature
CAM2 Q adjusts measurements to the current part temperature entered. A
nominal temperature of 20°C (68°F) is used. The ability to scale for temperature
allows you to measure parts in areas that are either warmer or cooler. The
measurement results are adjusted for thermal expansion or contraction.
To scale for material temperature changes:
• In the DETAILS box, click the drop-down arrow and select a material from the
library of materials. You will see the coefficient of linear expansion next to the
material name. You cannot change this value.
• Enter the temperature of the part, and select Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit (°F)
from the drop-down arrow.
NOTE: If the material you are using is not available in the library and you know
the coefficient of linear expansion of the material you are using, click the
PLUS (+) button next to the MATERIALS drop-down arrow. In the CREATE
NEW MATERIAL dialog box, enter a name and coefficient of linear expansion
value for the new material. Click OK to add this material to the library.
Three Feature
Requires: three features with associated nominals. The type of features is
determined by the Alignment method.
• Method: Select an Alignment method.
• Features: Select a Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary feature. See “Select” on
page 276.
NOTE: Associated nominals are required for this command. If a measured
feature does not have a nominal, you must add one to continue. For more
information, see “Nominals and Tolerances” on page 96.’
The alignment solves as:
• The primary feature moves exactly to its nominal. There will be no alignment
error between this actual and nominal feature.
• The secondary feature moves as close to its nominal without moving the
primary feature. There may be some alignment error between this actual and
nominal feature.
194

November 2010
• The tertiary feature moves as close to its nominal without moving the primary
of secondary features. Most of the alignment error is between this actual and
nominal feature.
Import
Select ALIGNMENT < IMPORT to create the current alignment from a file.
• Select an existing Alignment file and click APPLY/SOLVE.
195
November 2010

The DEVICE menu contains all the commands used to configure a measuring
device. These commands are also available on the Devices toolbar and the
Device Position toolbar. See the View < Toolbars < Customize < Toolbars Tab.
The DEVICE CONTROL panel contains a list of all active devices with the
properties of each associated device.
Device Manager
Select DEVICE < DEVICE MANAGER from the DEVICE menu to access the
DEVICE MANAGER panel. Use the DEVICE MANAGER panel to update device
properties (including edit a device name, disconnect and remap a device, show
the MEASUREMENT window), and export, import, or configure a device position.
Device Properties
The Properties portion of the DEVICE MANAGER panel allows you to edit a device
name, disconnect and remap a device, show the MEASUREMENT window, and
configure a device position.
Edit a Device Name

To edit the name of a device, click in the Name box and input the name as
desired.
NOTE: The device name entered here persists throughout the measurement file.
Remap a Device
To remap a device to CAM2 Q, click the REMAP button to the right of the Serial
Number box. The status of the device will update in the Status box as
“Connected”.
Disconnect a Device
To disconnect a device from CAM2 Q, click the DISCONNECT button to the
right of the Serial Number box. The status of the device will update in the Status
box as “Disconnected”.
197
November 2010
Show/Hide Measurement Window
To constantly show the MEASUREMENT window, select the SHOW
MEASUREMENT WINDOW checkbox. Clear this checkbox to only show the
window during an ADD READINGS command. For more information, see “Add
Device Position
Select the device’s position to access the Device Position commands in the
DEVICE MANAGER panel.
Device Position stores the location of the device relative to the measurements of
your part. If you move or change the device, the MOVE DEVICE command
creates another device position, allowing you to continue measuring in the same
file. You can also continue measuring to the same feature from another device
position. See “Add Readings” on page 129.
All readings of measured features are labeled with the current device position. If
you create another device position and add readings to a measured feature, you
can see the readings sorted by device position. See “Readings” on page 95.
If you edit or redefine a device position, only the readings in that device position
are updated. All of this is independent of any Coordinate System, but any
updated features that are included in the alignment cause a recalculation of the
alignment.
NOTE: The default device position (Device Position) for each device is in
every new file and may not be deleted.
Move Device
Select DEVICE < MOVE DEVICE from the DEVICE menu to access the
DEVICE MANAGER panel. Use the DEVICE MANAGER panel to configure
positions for the device(s) contained in the measurement file. You can also press
the M hot key on the keyboard.
Device Position
A Device Position is the location of the measurement device relative to the
measurements of your part. To continue measuring in the same measurement file
after moving or changing a device, you must create another device position.
198
November 2010
NOTE: Selecting DEVICE < MOVE DEVICE from the DEVICE menu
automatically creates a New Device Position for you to configure. This new
device position exists until you highlight it and click REMOVE.
Set an Active Device Position

To designate the device position as active, click the SET ACTIVE button to the
right of the Name box. The status of the device position will update in the
Devices/Positions box as “Active”.
Clear a Device Position

To clear the device position, click the CLEAR button to the right of the Name
box.
Moving Device Position

To create a new device position, perform the following steps:
1 Measure a minimum of three features with the device in the current device
position.
NOTE: You can only use points, spheres, and point-reducible plane projection
features. See“Measuring a Sphere” on page 106 and “Measuring a Point” on
page 103.
2 Move the measurement device to a new location.
3 Select DEVICE < MOVE DEVICE. The DEVICE MANAGER panel appears
with a New Device Position already selected.
4 If desired, input a name for the new device position in the NAME box.
5 In the DEFINE WITH FEATURES tab or the DEFINE WITH TRACKARM tab, select
at least three features measured in Step 1 to be remeasured from the new device
position.
6 Check the USE NOMINAL checkbox to compute the device position using a
nominal feature.
7 Click REMEASURE ALL to remeasure all of the selected features, or click
REMEASURE SELECTED to remeasure a subset of the selected features (you
must select a minimum of three).
NOTE: You can reorder the features using the up and down arrows to the left of
the feature list.
8 Remeasure the features as prompted by the MEASUREMENT window.
199
November 2010
NOTE: If you are using any 2D features you must remeasure each 2D features
projection plane. Pay attention to the prompts in the MEASUREMENT window.
9 Click SOLVE.
NOTE: FARO advocates the use of only precision-made, repeatable tooling to
define device positions. The FARO tooling kit is comprised of precision
spheres and/or “cone” mounts with magnetic bases, which serve as highly
repeatable artifacts to minimize error in the device relocation process.
Measured features such as circles greatly increase the risk of error in the device
relocation process due to potential errors in measurement and manufacturing
defects. Errors in the device relocation process will compound, which in turn
will compromise the accuracy of all subsequent measurements taken on the
part.
Export and Import Device Position

Once you create the device position using the DEVICE MANAGER panel, you may
export the device position to a CAM2 Q device position file (*.fdp) or CAM2
Measure X device position file (*.xdp) to be recalled later.
NOTE: The default import/export directory is configured in the PREFERENCES
window.
Import a Device Position

To import a device position from a CAM2 Q device position file (*.fdp) or
CAM2 Measure X device position file (*.xdp), click the IMPORT button to the
right of the Status box. Browse to the device position file and click Open.
Export a Device Position

To export a device position to a CAM2 Q device position file (*.fdp) or CAM2
Measure X device position file (*.xdp), click the EXPORT button to the right of
the Status box. Enter a name for the device position file and click Save.
Once a device position file is exported, it can be imported into any measurement
file or recalled into a QuickTools program.
Save and Load Device Setup

CAM2 Q allows measurement with more than one device, each with a unique
device position, within a single measurement file. Once you create positions for
each device, you can save and load these setups for future use.
200
November 2010
NOTE: The default import/export directory is configured in the PREFERENCES
window.
Save Setup
Once you create device positions for each device in the measurement file using
the DEVICE MANAGER panel, click SAVE SETUP. This saves the relationship
between multiple, fixed devices for future use.
Load Setup
Click LOAD SETUP to load saved positions for multiple devices.
NOTE: If the measurement file does not contain the same devices with which
you initially saved the setup, the LOAD SETUP button is grayed out.
Device Control Panel

Select DEVICE < DEVICE CONTROL PANEL from the DEVICE menu to
access the DEVICE CONTROL panel. The DEVICE CONTROL panel contains a list
of all active (detected) devices with the properties of each associated device. You
can also press the P hot key on the keyboard.
Figure 12-1 Device Control Panel
• Click the >> button to hide the list of devices.

• Click the << button to show the list of devices.
Add a Device
From the DEVICE CONTROL panel, click the ADD NEW DEVICE button. Select
an eligible device from the ADD NEW DEVICE dialog and click CONNECT.
201
November 2010
See the CAM2 Q chapter in the current device’s manual for more details.
Measurement Mode Setting

This preference defines how the measurement device performs measurement.
• Single Point Mode: The measurement device takes a single point.
• Distance Based Mode: The measurement device takes points at a specified
distance interval (specify the distance).
• Time Based Mode: The measurement device takes points at a specified time
interval (specify the time in milliseconds).
Multiple Devices
You can connect and use multiple measurement devices simultaneously, with a
single software license, without changing computers and merging data. You can
connect any combination of FaroArms and/or FARO Laser Trackers.
NOTE: If you are using multiple FARO Laser Trackers, you must map two hot
keys for each additional FARO Laser Tracker. See “Keyboard Tab” on page 65.
This procedure to connect and define multiple devices involves measuring a set
of features with each device, assigning features from the second as nominals to
the features from the first, and then using the MOVE DEVICE command to
define the position. For more information, see “Move Device” on page 198.
To configure multiple devices for simultaneous measurement, perform the
following steps:
1 Connect all cables for each devices to your computer, power on your devices,
computer and start CAM2 Q.
2 Locate the three point-reducible features and ensure that each device can reach
each feature. You can use more than three features.
Now connect and define your measuring devices in the CAM2 Q file:
1 Open the DEVICE CONTROL PANEL and manually connect any device that
has not automatically loaded. For more information, see “Device Control
2 Create the three point-reducible features for each device. Rename each feature
and add the device’s name to the name of each feature.
3 Measure each feature with the proper device. Right-click each feature, select
ADD READINGS FROM... and select the proper device. For more
information, see “Add Readings” on page 129.
202

November 2010
Set the features from the second device as nominals to the features from the first
device:
1 In the FEATURES panel, select all of the features from the first device.
2 In the FEATURE INFORMATION panel, select the first feature from the first
device and click the drop-down arrow under the NOMINAL FEATURE column.
Select the first feature from the second device.
3 Repeat for the other features from the first device.
Define the default device:
1 Select DEVICE < MOVE DEVICE, the DEVICE MANAGER panel opens and
displays all of the connected devices. If any are missing, click the ADD button
to manually add each device.
2 Select each device and enter a unique name for each in the NAME box. The
default name is the serial number for the device, which helps you differentiate
between devices.
3 Select any of the devices and click the MAKE DEFAULT button to make this
device the default. Usually, this is the device that measures the most features
on your part, or simply the first device in the list.
4 Select the default device and click the NEW POSITION button and add a NEW
DEVICE POSITION.
5 Add the point-reducible features to the DEVICE MANAGER panel list. Select the
USE NOMINAL check box for each feature.
6 Click the SOLVE button to calculate the new position of the first device.
Add another device in the same manner with the point-reducible features from
the this device as nominals to the features from the second device.
Record Measurement
The DEVICE < RECORD MEASUREMENT command records a measurement
with the current device. This is the same as pressing the FRONT button on the
FaroArm, or the G key on your computer keyboard.
If the probe is visible on-screen, it will flash green when you record a
measurement.
203
November 2010
Record End Click

The DEVICE < RECORD END CLICK command records an end click, or
retract point, with the current device. This is the same as pressing the BACK
button on the FaroArm, or the H key on your computer keyboard.
If the probe is visible on-screen, it will flash red when you add record and end
click.
Change Adapter
The DEVICE < CHANGE ADAPTER command inserts a prompt within a
QuickTools program to change the probe adapter. For more information, see
“Change Adapter” on page 228.
Tracker
The TRACKER submenu contains all the commands necessary to interface with
your FARO Laser Tracker using CAM2 Q.
Laser Tracker support is supplied by a dedicated plug-in to the CAM2 Q
software. The plug-in is installed only if the user chooses to install support for
Laser Tracker hardware; as such, this TRACKER submenu will not appear if the
plug-in is not installed.
To obtain the Laser Tracker plug-in, contact FARO Customer Service.
Adding Readings
Use commands to control the Laser Tracker instead of hardware buttons. Buttons
(and their associated hot keys) on the Measurement Window are used for
recording a reading (G), recording an end click (H), and removing the last
reading (Backspace). For more information, see “Measurement Window” on
page 85.
NOTE: If you are using multiple FARO Laser Trackers, you can assign unique hot
keys for each device. For more information, see “Keyboard Tab” on page 65.
204
November 2010
Aim
Select TRACKER < AIM to aim the Laser Tracker at a selected feature. The
AIM command allows you to select a feature from the FEATURES panel or the
CAD window, and aim the Laser Tracker at the center of the selected feature.
The Laser Tracker must be the active device in the DEVICE CONTROL panel to
start this command.
With two or more measurement devices connected, AIM functionality is
optimized if the devices are related using device positions. For more information,
see “Device Position” on page 198.
NOTE: An AIM button is included in the READINGS panel to allow aiming at
individual readings of measured features. See “Readings” on page 95.
Reset
The RESET command moves the Laser Tracker to the current Reset Point
location. If there is a current Reset Point defined, the Laser Tracker executes an
AIM command using the specified reset point as the target. If there is no Reset
Point, a HOME command is executed and the Laser Tracker returns to the home
position for the selected SMR family.
Search
The SEARCH command prompts the Laser Tracker to begin a search pattern in
an attempt to locate a SMR. Search parameters are specified in the preferences.
Manage Reset Points

The Manage Reset Points command allows the user to configure an optional
Reset Point. If set, the Reset Point acts as an override for the home location. The
user may revert the Reset Point back to home.
NOTE: Using the Home position for a reset is not the same as using an overridden
Reset Point.
205
November 2010
Select TRACKER < MANAGE RESET POINTS to show the MANAGE RESET
POINTS panel.
Measure Level
The Measure Level command is a type of hybrid measurement/construction
command that uses the built-in level functionality of the Laser Tracker to
produce a plane level to the ground (relative to the Laser Tracker) and through
the origin. You can use this feature as an Active Projection plane. See “Select
It is not possible to add readings to a level feature, nor is it possible to edit a level
feature by re-sampling the Laser Tracker to obtain a new level vector.
Select TRACKER < MEASURE LEVEL to make the MEASURE LEVEL panel
visible.
NOTE: The MEASURE LEVEL command also appears in a dedicated Tracker
group in the Feature Creator (if the Laser Tracker plug-in is loaded.)
Motor On Off
The Motor On/Off command switches on or off the motors that control the
movement of the FARO Laser Tracker’s laser beam.
Set Backsight
The Set Backsight command switches the FARO Laser Tracker to Backsight
mode.
Drive Beam
The Drive Beam command moves the FARO Laser Tracker’s laser beam.
Bundle Adjustment
The Bundle Adjustment command adjusts multiple device positions at once by
refining redundant measurements into the best possible point coordinates. This
command becomes available when you have four or more device positions
defined with at least four points each.
CAM2 Q will bring up a Wizard to assist in setting up the alignment.
206

November 2010
1 Select the device positions.
2 Select the targets from the list of all measured targets.
3 Configure the Bundle Adjustment calculation parameters:
• Calculation Mode
• Sequential - Bundle Adjustment is performed every time before
calculation of initial guess for next transformation matrix. This setting
increases accuracy, especially for long chains of Device Positions.
• One Step - Initial guesses for all transformation matrices are calculated,
then bundle adjustment is performed once for all data. This setting
increases computation speed.
• Parameterization Mode
• Euler Angles (3 parameters)
• Quaternions (4 parameters)
• Error tolerance
• Input Tolerance Error - This parameter enforces that all readings taken on
a single point from a single Device Position must all be located within a
sphere with a diameter less than this value.
• Results Tolerance Error - Once the Bundle Adjustment is solved, all
resulting readings for each target must be located within a sphere with a
diameter less than this value.
• Device Errors
• These values represent the standard reported errors of angular and radial
measurements for the Tracker. These values should only be modified if
known.
4 View connectivity of all positions on the Target Relationship Map.
NOTE: A line connecting 2 positions represents the existence of common targets
between those two positions. At this point, CAM2 Q provides an idea of how
good the outcome of the Bundle Adjustment may be. If any error situation is
identified, explanatory text will appear in the right-hand column.
5 View the results of the Bundle Adjustment in the Results window. Use the
Print button print the contents of the Results window.
Survey
Surveying is an automated, repetitive measurement process used to track the
position(s) of one or more targets over time. The output is a statistical analysis of
207
November 2010
the change in positions for each target. Optionally, Survey may be used to
automatically reposition a measurement device once sufficient movement has
been detected.
Survey support is supplied by a dedicated plug-in to the CAM2 Q software. The
plug-in is installed only if the user chooses to install support for Laser Tracker
hardware; as such, this SURVEY tab will not appear if the plug-in is not
installed.
To obtain the Laser Tracker plug-in, contact FARO Customer Service.
Active Survey
The Active Survey box contains the name of the currently active survey. To
change the active survey, click the drop-down and select a different survey.
Types of Survey
Drift Monitor
• May be done as continuous inspection (user defined number of cycles) or on
demand; retains all data for statistical analysis.
Periodic Inspection
• A single, “clean” run through a set of points compared to nominal data;
automation of the measurement process.
Tool Building
• Used for locating a detail relative to nominal data; continuous inspection.
Custom
• User-configured preferences that persist for later use. You can name,
configure, and save custom surveys using Survey Setup.
Survey Setup
Click the SETUP SURVEY OPTIONS button in the Survey Type box. From the
SURVEY SETUP dialog, you can configure the following:
• Display Label: The label for the survey.
• Feature Dwell Time: The amount of time (in seconds) the Laser Tracker
should remain on the target after acquiring its position.
208

November 2010
• Cycle Time: The amount of time (in seconds, minutes, or hours) to wait
between ending one cycle and beginning the next.
• Moving Average Size: Determines the number of previous samples used to
compute the moving average value (to show recent trends instead of the entire
history of the measurement).
• Feature DRO: Determines the DRO use for the survey:
• On: (Default) A feature DRO is shown for each point in the survey.
• Off: No feature DROs are shown.
• Single: A single feature DRO is shown during the survey and switches
from point to point as the survey progresses.
• Replace Readings: Determines the method to retain or replace readings:
• Replace Previous: (Default) Each cycle will completely replace the
readings from the previous cycle.
• Append: The point feature will accumulate readings from each cycle of
the survey, and the geometry of the feature will be an average of those
readings.
• Disable Previous: Geometry will be the same as the Replace Previous
option, but old readings will be retained in an unused state.
• Compare to Nominal: Determines whether the drift value will be compared
to the nominal:
• Yes: The drift value will be computed as drift from the nominal.
• No: The drift value will be computed as the drift from the starting position
of the feature.
• Auto Search: Determines whether the Laser Tracker will search automatically
for a missing target:
• Yes: The Laser Tracker will automatically search for a missed target using
the standard search pattern.
• No: The Laser Tracker will not attempt to locate a target that is not found
immediately after aiming at the expected target location.
• Exclude Missing Targets: Determines whether the Laser Tracker will skip
targets missed during the current survey on subsequent surveys:
• Yes: Any target missed during a particular cycle of the survey will be
skipped on subsequent cycles.
• No: No missed target will be skipped on subsequent cycles.
209
November 2010
• Pause Between Cycles: Determines whether the survey will automatically
pause between cycles.
• Yes: The survey will automatically pause between cycles. In order to
proceed to the next cycle in the survey the user must press the play button.
• No: The survey will not pause between cycles.
NOTE: If Pause Between Cycles is enabled, the Cycle Time option is
ignored/disabled.
• Stopping Conditions: Determines criteria by which the survey should
automatically stop:
• Stop After a Fixed Number of Cycles: Enter number of cycles.
• Stop After Missing Target: Enter target number.
• Stop After Specific Time: Date/Time based (hard stopping date/time).
• Move Device Conditions: Determines conditions with which to perform a
Move Device command:
• Move After This Many Fixed Cycles: Enter number of cycles.
• Move After Maximum Deviation: Enter maximum deviation of any
reference point.
NOTE: You need at least 3 reference points to set Move Device conditions.
For more information, see “Moving Device Position With a Survey” on
page 211.
When you have set up the survey, you can click OK to use the settings for the
current survey, or click SAVE to save the settings to the survey template for
future use.
Performing a Survey
While the survey is running, there are a few buttons to control the survey
command options.
Add Points to the Survey

In the FEATURES panel, the points in the top half are included in the survey (In
Survey); the points in the bottom half are not (Not In Survey).
To add a point to the survey, click the arrow to the left of the point in the Not In
Survey box. The point appears in the In Survey box. All operations are multi-
select capable, so you can add multiple points at the same time.
210
November 2010
The points are reported in the order they appear in the list. You can reorder the
points in the In Survey box by clicking a point and then clicking the up and down
arrows.
Survey Controls
Three buttons at the top left of the Survey window give you the controls you need
to start, pause, and stop a survey:
• Play: Runs the survey from its current state until a stopping condition is met or
you pause or stop the survey. If a survey is played from a paused state, the
survey will simply resume. If it is played from a stopped state, the survey data
will be reset.
• Pause: Suspends the survey temporarily in its current state.
• Stop: Ends the survey as though the stopping condition had been reached.
Moving Device Position With a Survey

You can create a new Device Position with a survey by designating at least three
of the survey points as reference points.
1 Click the star icon to the right of a point in the In Survey box. The star appears
yellow, indicating that the point is designated as a reference.
NOTE: Click the yellow star to remove this designation.
2 Repeat Step 1 for at least two other points in the survey.
3 In the Survey Setup dialog, input the number of cycles you want completed
before the move is done in the Move Device Conditions box, and click OK.
See “Survey Setup” on page 208.
The device move is automated in the survey. You can view the results of the new
device position in the Device Manager.
For more information, see “Move Device” on page 198.
Reporting Survey Results

When you’ve successfully completed your survey, click the SUMMARY button
to view a brief summary of the data you’ve compiled. From there, click the
PRINT REPORT button to access the PREVIEW dialog. Use the PREVIEW dialog
to preview the layout and print, export, or e-mail the contents.
For more information, see“Standard Report Window Commands” on page 239,
“E-mailing/Saving a Report” on page 239, and “Printing a Report” on
page 239.
211
November 2010

The GD&T (Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing) panel consists of a drop-
down menu of commands for a part that is toleranced using the GD&T system.
For more information, see “GD&T Tolerances” on page 68. The GD&T system
accurately displays dimensions and tolerances in a specific graphical format on a
drawing.
• GD&T is represented by a series of symbols that have specific meanings.
• GD&T tolerances allow you to measure parts and compare them to a datum to
ensure that specific design and tolerance requirements are being met. See
“Datum” on page 214.
To use GD&T tolerancing in CAM2 Q:
• Add a feature to your measurement file.
• Select a feature from the FEATURES panel, or the CAD View, and add
individual GD&T tolerances in the GD&T TOLERANCES panel.
• GD&T tolerances and results add to each feature in the report.
• GD&T form tolerances appear with the appropriate name and image in the
FEATURE INFORMATION panel, reports, and labels.
CAM2 Q includes the following GD&T tolerances:
GD&T Tolerance GD&T Command
Form
Circularity
Cylindricity
Flatness
Straightness
Profile
Profile of a Surface
Profile of a Line
213
November 2010
GD&T Tolerance GD&T Command
Orientation
Angularity
Concentricity
Parallelism
Perpendicularity
Runout
Total Runout
Position
Position
Regardless of Feature Size (RFS)
Maximum Material Condition (MMC)
Least Material Condition (LMC)
For more information, see “GD&T Tolerances” on page 257.
Exact Feature Length

The Orientation GD&T tolerances use the location of the readings to calculate
the length of the feature. Sometimes this is not very accurate because it is
difficult to digitize on an edge of your part. To enter an exact length for a feature:
1 Create an Orientation GD&T tolerance.
2 Right-Click the feature in the GD&T panel and select OVERRIDE LENGTH from
the shortcut menu.
3 Select the OVERRIDE LENGTH check box and in the length value. See “Typing
The GD&T tolerance calculates the readings and the exact length of the feature.
Datum
The datum is the theoretically exact plane or line (axis) from which a
dimensional measurement is made, and is used for comparison in the Orientation,
Runout, and Position GD&T tolerances. The Form and Profile GD&T tolerances
do not require a datum because they use simple geometry for comparison.
214
November 2010
To define a datum:
1 Select an existing feature from the FEATURES panel, or the CAD View.
2 Right-Click the feature and select ASSIGN DATUM from the shortcut menu.
3 Select the type of datum for the feature; PLANE or LINE.
4 Select the letter to identify the Datum; only unassigned Datum letters are
available.
To delete a datum:
1 Select an existing feature from the FEATURES panel, or the CAD View.
2 Right-Click the feature and select ASSIGN DATUM from the shortcut menu.
3 Select NONE from the shortcut menu to remove a Datum letter from a feature.
Circularity
To tolerance the measured form of a circle:
1 Select an existing circle in the FEATURES panel, or the CAD View.
2 In the GD&T TOLERANCES panel, click the NEW GD&T TOLERANCE button
and select CIRCULARITY. See “GD&T Tolerances” on page 68.
3 Type a tolerance from your drawing, or use the default.
To remove any GD&T tolerance:
1 Select an existing GD&T tolerance.
2 In the GD&T TOLERANCES panel, click the REMOVE GD&T TOLERANCE
button.
For more information, see “Circularity” on page 258.
Cylindricity
To tolerance the measured form of a cylinder:
1 Select an existing cylinder in the FEATURES panel, or the CAD View.
and select CYLINDRICITY. See “GD&T Tolerances” on page 68.
215
November 2010
button.
For more information, see “Cylindricity” on page 263.
Flatness
To tolerance the measured form of a plane:
1 Select an existing plane in the FEATURES panel, or the CAD View.
and select FLATNESS. See “GD&T Tolerances” on page 68.
button.
For more information, see “Flatness” on page 259.
Straightness
To tolerance the measured form of a line:
1 Select an existing line in the FEATURES panel, or the CAD View.
and select STRAIGHTNESS. See “GD&T Tolerances” on page 68.
button.
For more information, see “Straightness” on page 260.
216
November 2010
To tolerance the profile of a surface:
1 Select an existing point cloud feature in the FEATURES panel or the CAD View.
For more information, see “Inspect Surface” on page 129. No datum is
required.
and select SURFACE PROFILE. See “GD&T Tolerances” on page 68.
button.
For more information, see “Profile of a Surface” on page 264.
Profile of a Line
To tolerance the profile of a line:
1 Select an existing polyline feature in the FEATURES panel or the CAD View.
For more information, see “Measuring a Polyline” on page 124. No datum is
required.
and select LINE PROFILE. See “GD&T Tolerances” on page 68.
button.
For more information, see “Profile of a Line” on page 264.
217
November 2010
Angularity
To define an Angularity tolerance:
1 Select an existing plane or line-reducible feature in the FEATURES panel or the
CAD View.
and select ANGULARITY. See “GD&T Tolerances” on page 68.
4 Click the Datum Reference drop-down and select a datum.
To specify and angle and length for an Angularity tolerance:
1 Select an existing tolerance.
2 In the GD&T TOLERANCES panel, right-click the tolerance and select Override
Length and Angle.
3 Enter values for angle and/or length, and click OK.
button.
NOTE: The feature being toleranced must have a nominal associated or you must
specify an angle value.
For more information, see “Angularity” on page 257.
Concentricity
Concentricity measures how well a cylinder fits inside of another cylinder. To
tolerance a cylinder to a datum:
1 Select an existing cylinder in the FEATURES panel, or the CAD View.
2 In the GD&T TOLERANCES panel, click the NEW GD&T TOLERANCE button.
This adds a control frame to the GD&T TOLERANCES panel. See “GD&T
Tolerances” on page 68.
3 Click in the left control frame and select CONCENTRICITY.
218
November 2010
5 Click in the right control frame and select a datum. See “Datum” on page 214.
You can also enter the Exact Feature Length. For more information, see “Exact
Feature Length” on page 214.
button.
For more information, see “Concentricity” on page 261.
Parallelism
Parallelism measures the condition of a surface or center plane that is equal in
distance at all points from the datum plane. To tolerance a plane or line to a
datum:
1 Select an existing feature in the FEATURES panel, or the CAD View.
3 Click in the left control frame and select PARALLELISM.
button.
For more information, see “Parallelism” on page 262.
219
November 2010
Perpendicularity
Perpendicularity measures the condition of a surface, center plane, or axis at a
right angle (90 degrees) to a datum plane or axis. To tolerance a plane or line to a
datum:
3 Click in the left control frame and select PERPENDICULARITY.
button.
For more information, see “Perpendicularity” on page 262.
Total Runout
Total Runout controls the composite surface variations of circularity, cylindricity,
parallelism, straightness, taper and profile of a surface where applied to features
constructed around a datum axis. Total Runout applied to surfaces constructed
perpendicular to a datum axis controls composite variations of perpendicularity
and flatness. The tolerance is applied simultaneously at all circular and profile
measuring positions as the part is rotated through 360°.
You will need to measure a cylinder (feature), and a plane (datum) perpendicular
to the cylinder. Make sure to rotate the cylinder the full 360° as you are adding
readings. It is recommended that you measure down the length of the shaft, rotate
the shaft a little, and continue measuring until you rotate the shaft all the way
around. To tolerance the total runout of a cylinder:
220
November 2010
3 Click in the left control frame and select TOTAL RUNOUT.
button.
For more information, see “Total Runout” on page 265.
Position
To tolerance the position of a feature:
1 Select an existing plane-reducible or line-reducible feature in the FEATURES
panel or the CAD View.
and select POSITION. See “GD&T Tolerances” on page 68.
4 Click on the Material Condition symbol, to the right of the tolerance, and
select:
• RFS - Regardless of Feature Size
• MMC - Maximum Material Condition
• LMC - Least Material Condition
5 Click the Datum Reference drop-down list and select a datum. Repeat this step
to select three datums.
NOTE: You can specify a datum scheme for each Position tolerance. The
specified datum scheme will be used to create a temporary alignment to the
nominal data for the purposes of evaluation the tolerance. Datum features must
have a nominal feature associated in order to perform the alignment.
221
November 2010
button.
See “RFS and MMC for a Measured Hole” on page 266, or “RFS and MMC for
a Measured Shaft” on page 267.
222
November 2010

This chapter covers the details for creating and
editing QuickTools programs. QuickTools
programs allow you to save a set of CAM2 Q
commands in a list to run anytime the measurement file is open. You can create
multiple QuickTools programs in a single file, and play them whenever you
choose. Some of the QuickTools commands are also available on the
QUICKTOOLS toolbar at the top of your screen. See the View < Toolbars <
Customize < Toolbars Tab.
QuickTools Programs
The QUICKTOOLS panel allows you to record, edit, and delete QuickTools
programs in either Measure Mode or Template Mode. The following chart
illustrates the behavior of CAM2 Q when recording QuickTools programs in
Measure Mode and Template Mode.
QuickTools
Not Recording Recording
Insert • Adds feature to • Adds feature to

Measured measurement file measurement file
Feature • Prompts operator • Adds measurement
to measure feature step to QuickTool
• Prompts operator
to measure feature
Measure Mode
Manually • Prompts operator • Adds measurement

Invoke “Add to measure feature step to QuickTool
Readings” • Prompts operator
to measure feature
Insert • Adds feature to • Adds feature to

Template Mode
Measured measurement file measurement file

Feature
Manually • Prompts operator • Adds measurement

Invoke “Add to measure feature step to QuickTool
Readings”
223
November 2010
Recording QuickTools Programs

Record a QuickTools program in Measure Mode or Template Mode. The
QuickTools control command buttons are at the bottom of the list, just above the
PROPERTIES panel. To create a QuickTools program:
1 Open the QUICKTOOLS panel.
2 Click the NEW PROGRAM button.
3 Type a name for your program or use the default name.
4 Click the RECORD button to begin recording the program.
5 Measure your part to add commands to the program.
NOTE: You can select multiple features and select Add Readings to create
multiple commands in the QuickTools program, but the current measurement
mode will be applied to each of the features added in this manner. The person
playing the QuickTools program may override the measurement mode for a
feature being measured, but the next feature will load the measurement mode
with which it was created.
6 Press the STOP button to stop adding commands.
7 Save your measurement file. QuickTools programs are stored within each
measurement file.
Dragging Features Into Programs

A quick method to add commands to a QuickTool program is to drag features,
and feature groups, from the FEATURES panel to a QuickTool program. For more
information, see “Features Panel” on page 88.
NOTE: Dragging a feature group adds all of the features in that group as
individual QuickTool commands.
Importing QuickTools From Learn Files

You can import SoftCheck Tools files and Learn files created with CAM2
Measure X or CAM2 Measure 4.0 into the current measurement file for use in a
QuickTools program:
1 From the FILE menu, click IMPORT < QUICKTOOLS < FROM LEARN
FILES.
2 Select an existing SoftCheck Tools file or Learn file (*.sct or *.xln) and click
IMPORT.
224
November 2010
3 All supported commands from the imported file appear in the QuickTools
program.
NOTE: Unsupported commands are highlighted and captured in an error report
after the import process. You can save the report for future reference.
Editing QuickTools Programs

You can add, reorder, and delete the commands of a QuickTools program. The
QuickTools control command buttons are at the bottom of the list, just above the
PROPERTIES panel. To create a QuickTools program:
2 Select an existing QuickTools program. You may need to click the Plus sign
next to the program name to expand the command list.
3 Edit the commands:
• Move a command by dragging any command up and down the list.
• Delete a command by choosing the command and clicking the DELETE
button.
• Add more commands to the program by clicking the RECORD button.
4 Save your measurement file. QuickTools programs are stored within each
measurement file.
NOTE: If you have multiple devices assigned to add readings commands, use
the FILTER drop-down window to only show commands assigned to a specific
device.
Playing QuickTools Programs

Play a QuickTools program to measure the features in your measurement file.
The QuickTools control command buttons are at the bottom of the QUICKTOOLS
panel, just above the PROPERTIES panel.
2 Select a QuickTools program.
3 In the PROPERTIES panel, configure the Prompt for Session Data, Clear
Existing Measurement Data, and Maximize Measurement Window check
boxes. Prompt for Session Data presents the operator with the DOCUMENT
HEADER INFORMATION window, Clear Existing Measurement Data clears all
existing measurement data when the QuickTools program is run, and
Maximize Measurement Window displays the Measurement Window at full
screen size.
225
November 2010
4 Click the PLAY button.
The commands will run in the list order. You cad add concurrent measurements
from multiple devices if multiple devices are connected. If commands are
assigned to different devices, the first command for each device will run at the
same time.
A MEASUREMENT Window opens for each Add Readings command and is
automatically set from the properties of the command. For more information, see
“Command Properties” on page 229.
• The collection mode is automatically set from the properties of the command.
• The number of readings for the command is automatically set from the
properties of the command. Watch the MEASUREMENT window for each
reading and take an end click point after the last reading.
• The number of readings can also be a range, or a minimum and a maximum,
number of points. Take an end click point after the minimum number of
readings, or keep digitizing until you reach the maximum number of readings.
• Close the MEASUREMENT window to skip any Add Readings command.
The MEASUREMENT window can also have a picture if one exists in the
QuickTools program command. See “Image Creator” on page 231.
Automating QuickTools Programs

You can automatically play a QuickTools program without first opening
CAM2 Q.
Open a command line to start CAM2 Q with the measurement file (*.fcd)
containing the QuickTools program, and add
/runQT:<ProgramName> to the command.
For example, if you wanted to run the QuickTools program called “My Program
1" in the Measurement file, you would open a command line and enter:
cam2q.exe c:\MeasurementFile.fcd /runQT:My Program 1
When the QuickTools program runs, CAM2 Q shows the MEASUREMENT
window at full screen size.
Locking QuickTools Programs

Lock a QuickTools program to secure the program from being edited,
overwritten, or deleted from the measurement file.
226
November 2010
A lock/unlock icon is visible in the QUICKTOOLS panel. When locked, users may
modify the QuickTools program only after entering the unlock password. When
unlocked, the document allows all QuickTools programs to be modified.
1 Select the QuickTools program to be locked.
2 Click the Lock button.
3 In the Credentials window, enter a password to lock the program.
NOTE: Use this same password to unlock the program. After all modifications are
complete, click the QUICKTOOLS button to lock the program again.
CAUTION: If you forget a password, there’s no way to recover it. Consider
keeping a backup copy of the measurement file with a QuickTool that isn’t
password-protected.
Deleting QuickTools Programs

Delete a QuickTools program to completely remove it from the measurement
file. The QuickTools control command buttons are at the bottom of the
QUICKTOOLS panel, just above the PROPERTIES panel.
1 Select the QuickTools program to be deleted.
2 Click the DELETE button to delete the QuickTools program.
QuickTools Tools
The QUICKTOOLS Tools drop-down menu, located on the QuickTools menu
bar, contains commands that may be included in a QuickTools program. For
more information, see “QuickTools Program Commands” on page 228.
View Report
The VIEW REPORT command creates a report macro at the end of a QuickTools
program. When you select this command, the Report View Settings dialog lets
you select a Report List, Report Template, and whether to automatically generate
the report. When the QuickTools program is played, this command will open the
REPORT tab for the user to create and print a report. For more information, see
“Reporting” on page 235.
NOTE: Automatic report generation creates a tab-delimited text file (*.txt) with
the name of the QuickTools program and saves it in the same location as the
measurement file containing the QuickTools program.
227
November 2010
Add Comment
The ADD COMMENT command inserts a comment into a QuickTools program,
in either Measure Mode or Template Mode. A comment is a textual message that
a user will see when playing the QuickTools program, must acknowledge by
clicking OK, and can thus be used to help guide the user through the program by
providing important information at key points. Comments may be placed at any
position within the QuickTools program.
Change Adapter
The CHANGE ADAPTER command inserts a prompt into a QuickTools
program, in either Measure Mode or Template Mode, to change the adapter of the
FARO Laser Tracker device. For more information, see “QuickTools Program
Commands” on page 228.
When executing this step of a QuickTools program, the user is guided through
the process of changing the adapter. When the adapter change is successful, the
user can continue running the QuickTools program.
NOTE: This command may only be used in conjunction with the FARO Laser
Tracker.
QuickTools Program Commands

QuickTools programs may contain several types of commands.
• Change Adapter: The operator is prompted to change the probe adapter of the
measurement device. For more information, see “Change Adapter” on
page 204.
• Clear Existing Measurement Data: When the operator runs the QuickTools
program, CAM2 Q clears all existing measurement data in the measurement
file.
• Comment: The operator is presented with informational text boxes at key
points in the program. For more information, see “Add Comment” on
page 228.
• Export: CAM2 Q exports all measurement data to a text or CAD file. For
more information, see “Export” on page 31.
228
November 2010
• Maximize Measurement Window: When the operator runs the QuickTools
program, the Measurement Window is displayed at full screen size.
• Measure: The operator is prompted via the MEASUREMENT window to add
readings to measured features or add measurements to constructed features.
• Move Device: While recording the command, the new Device Position will be
defined based on existing targets. When the operator runs the QuickTools
program, the Device Manager panel prompts the operator to remeasure the
targets and solve the device position before continuing. For more information,
see “Move Device” on page 198.
• Prompt for Session Data: When the operator runs the QuickTools program,
the operator is presented with the Document Header Information window. For
more information, see “Document Header Information” on page 59.
• Save File: The operator is prompted to select a name and save location for the
measurement file.
• View: The CAD View contents zoom, pan, or change viewpoints.
• View Report: The operator is automatically presented with the REPORT
Window. For more information, see “View Report” on page 227.
NOTE: Construction, Dimension, Coordinate System, Alignment, and Device
Position commands are not added to QuickTools programs because these features
are just waiting for data to solve.
Command Properties
Some QuickTools commands have properties that you can edit in the PROPERTIES
panel, located just below the QuickTools control command buttons. To change
the command properties:
2 Select an existing QuickTools program. You may need to click the Plus sign
next to the program name to expand the command list.
3 Select any command.
CAD View Commands

Use the CAD VIEW buttons to assign, preview, or delete a specific view of the
CAD part for any QuickTools command.
Select any QuickTools command.
229
November 2010
Save CAD View for Step: Manipulate the position of the CAD part in the
CAD View window as desired, and click this button to save this view to the
QuickTools command.
Clear Saved CAD View: Click this button to delete an associated CAD
View from the QuickTools command. If no CAD View has been saved to this
command, this button is grayed out.
Preview Saved CAD View: Click this button to preview an associated

CAD View from the QuickTools command. If no CAD View has been saved to
this command, this button is grayed out.
Add Readings Properties Basic Tab

Use the BASIC tab to change the device and number of readings for the command.
1 Select an existing device from the DEVICE drop-down window.
2 Enter the number of readings for the command.
• Select the USE RANGE check box and enter the minimum and maximum
number of points.
Add Readings Properties Advanced Tab

Use the ADVANCED tab to set the collection mode; single point or any of the
available scanning modes. For more information, see “Scanning” on page 86.
1 Select the collection mode from the SAMPLE MODE drop-down window.
2 Enter any Interval and Distance values if necessary.
3 Select the Replace Existing Readings check box to replace any existing
readings in the feature.
NOTE: Insert the EDIT < CLEAR ALL READINGS command at the
beginning of your QuickTools program to delete all the readings from every
feature in your file. See “Clear All Readings” on page 37.
230
November 2010
QuickTools in Measure Mode

Using Measure Mode to create a QuickTools program will measure a part and
record everything about the measurement process. See “Recording QuickTools
Programs” on page 224.
You should have at least one device connected. This mode records every
necessary command, and for Add Readings (measurement) commands
automatically sets the following command properties:
• The current device.
• The collection mode.
• The number of readings.
The properties are set after you finish the measurement. See “Measurement
Window” on page 85.
QuickTools in Template Mode

Using Template Mode to create a QuickTools program enables you to create your
program without measuring your part or without a device connected. See
“Recording QuickTools Programs” on page 224.
This mode records every necessary command, and for Add Readings
(measurement) commands the default command properties are set. Change these
properties in the PROPERTIES panel. See “Command Properties” on page 229.
Image Creator
Image Creator is an additional tab in CAM2 Q that allows you to add pictures to
a QuickTools program command. These pictures appear in the MEASUREMENT
WINDOW panel when the program command is playing. For each ADD
READINGS command, you can create a single picture or a picture for each
reading in the command.
Adding Pictures
Pictures of a part may be added to each QuickTools command to show an
operator exactly where to take measurements.
When taking pictures, include as many features in a shot as possible without
sacrificing space, picture clarity, and quality. Capturing a big cluster of features
from far away will not provide enough detailed information for the operator. One
picture can be used as many times as needed.
231
November 2010
The ideal image size is 640x480 pixels; most cameras have an adjustable setting
for the size of a picture. However, you should first add one image to a
QuickTools command, then play the command and look at the picture in the
MEASUREMENT WINDOW panel.
Taking and Importing Images

1 Use a digital camera to take pictures of the part.
NOTE: For best results, take clear, detailed pictures of the part that plainly
illustrate the locations to be measured. Take close-up shots of areas where
extra detail is needed. Orient the camera in the same way that the operator will
be looking at the part.
2 Transfer the pictures to your computer.
3 In CAM2 Q, click the IMAGE CREATOR tab to display the IMAGE CREATOR
window.
NOTE: The Image Creator plug-in must be installed to use the IMAGE CREATOR
window. If the plug-in is not installed, the IMAGE CREATOR tab will not be
visible.
4 Click the IMPORT button to display the OPEN dialog.
5 Navigate to the directory that contains the images.
6 Select the images.
7 Click the OPEN button to add the images to the BASE IMAGES panel.
Creating QuickTools Pictures

A Base picture with probe images allows you to create a visual measurement
map. Use the probe images as targets to represent the sphere of a probe or SMR.
The sphere is green, or red to match the FRONT and BACK buttons of the
FaroArm, or the G and H keyboard keys for the FARO Laser Tracker.
In the QUICKTOOLS panel, select an existing QuickTools program. You may need
to click the Plus sign next to the program name to expand the command list.
To add a picture to a QuickTools command:
1 Select any existing QuickTools command. Generally, this is an ADD
READINGS command.
2 Click the NEW IMAGE button at the bottom of the IMAGES panel.
3 Drag any image from the BASE IMAGES panel to the IMAGES panel. This adds
the picture to the QuickTools command.
232

November 2010
4 Drag any probe image from the PROBES panel onto your image in the IMAGES
panel. Add another probe image by holding down SHIFT and dragging it onto
your image.
5 Move the mouse pointer above any probe image to edit:
• Click and drag the center of the probe image to move it.
• Click and drag the lower right corner of the probe image to make it bigger or
smaller.
• Click and drag the upper center of the probe image to rotate it.
• Click the X in the upper right corner of the probe image to remove it.
6 Click another QuickTools command, or the NEW IMAGE button.
7 Save your measurement file. The pictures save with the measurement file.
Look at the bottom of the IMAGES panel and see a thumbnail of the picture. This
is a graphical list of the pictures for the selected QuickTools command.
Multiple pictures
When there is a single picture in a QuickTools command that picture will repeat
for every reading. However, you may want to create a more detailed
measurement map by creating a picture for every reading.
• Select the thumbnail picture and click the NEW IMAGE button to create
another picture in the current command. The probe images will also copy.
• Drag the probe image to another location in the picture.
• Repeat this for the amount of readings in the command.
After adding multiple images to the QuickTools command, you can:
• Change the order by dragging an image to the left of right.
• Delete the picture by choosing the thumbnail and pressing the DELETE key, or
just drag another Base image into the IMAGES panel to replace a picture.
233

November 2010

CAM2 Q employs the DevExpress™ reporting engine. The robust DevExpress
engine has been incorporated into CAM2 Q to provide dynamic, customizable
reports in many file formats.
Reporting Overview
Figure 15-1 Sample CAM2 Q Report

The DevExpress engine creates customizable reports based on an XML schema
that are automatically formatted for the page. The XML Schema is published
with the software:
\Program Files\FARO\CAM2 Q\Schema\.
Report data is continually updated as the measurement file data changes.
Report Templates
CAM2 Q automatically detects new report templates that are placed in the proper
directory:
\My Documents\CAM2 Q\Templates\Reporting.
235
November 2010
NOTE: It is good practice not to replace any of the default CAM2 Q templates
because reinstalling or updating the software will replace all of the default
templates.
Editing a Report Template

Select a report format from the combo box at the bottom of the REPORT panel and
click the EDIT LAYOUT button. This starts the DevExpress template editor.
• Select FILE < SAVE AS and save the template with a new name so that you do
not accidentally replace the default CAM2 Q report template.
• The report template is divided into four sections:
• PageHeader: Use this area to add items that will show on the top of every
page.
• Report: This is a title section for the first page of the report. The logo image
filed is in the upper left corner of this section. All other fields are Labels.
Add, arrange, remove, or edit the existing labels.
• DetailReport: This section uses the data from the CAM2 Q file following
the current ACTIVE REPORT LIST. Show or hide individual feature data using
the FEATURE INFORMATION panel. For more information, see “Nominals
• PageFooter: Use this area to add items that will show on the bottom of
every page. Every CAM2 Q report template has the Page Info field in this
section.
Logo Customization
You can change the logo image displayed in default report templates. The file
name is specified in the application preferences, and the image size is 3" x 1"
with a resolution of 300 dpi.
You can change the report logo image in the Report section of the PREFERENCES
AND SETTINGS window. See “Logo” on page 59.
Document Properties
Extra data (metadata) for a report is stored within the document properties.
Document properties are configured in the DOCUMENT HEADER INFORMATION
window. For more information, see “Document Header Information” on
page 59.
236

November 2010
This list is not fixed; plug-ins may register additional document properties which
will appear in the editor. Document properties are arranged into logical groups
(typically by the plug-in that registers them).
NOTE: A plug-in may also override a default document property if it provides
duplicate functionality (e.g. Part name in the SPC Graph plug-in).
User Interface
The REPORT window provides an always-available report display that continually
updates to reflect measurement file data changes. It resides at the same level as
the CAD View, and as such cannot be displayed at the same time as the CAD
View.
Select the REPORT tab to make the REPORT window visible.
Figure 15-2 Report view
Using the Features Panel

If you select features in the FEATURES panel and then select the REPORT tab, a
new IN REPORT list creates and automatically adds the features. There is a
237
November 2010
CAM2 Q preference to control this behavior. See “Features Panel” on page 88
and “Auto Report” on page 58.
Report Lists
Select the REPORT tab and the ACTIVE REPORT drop-down, IN REPORT list and
NOT IN REPORT list replace the CAD PARTS list and FEATURE list in the
FEATURES panel. The NOT IN REPORT list contains all features in the
measurement file that you can add to the current report. You should create a
name for the ACTIVE REPORT before adding or removing features.
NOTE: This content of this panel changes if you select the CAD or IMAGE
CREATOR tab. For more information, see “Features Panel” on page 88.
Creating/Recalling/Deleting Active Reports

You can create one or more ACTIVE REPORTS under a specific name within the
measurement file.
To create a list:
• Enter a name in the combo, replacing the New List 1 default text.
• Press the ENTER key.
NOTE: ACTIVE REPORTS are automatically saved as you change them. Saved
ACTIVE REPORTS are stored within the measurement file and may not be used
across different measurement files.
Recall an existing ACTIVE REPORT by selecting it from a drop-down list box at
the top of the FEATURES panel.
Delete an existing ACTIVE REPORT by selecting is from the drop-down list box
and clicking the X button next to the drop-down arrow.
Operations
In the FEATURES panel, the features in the IN REPORT list (top half) are included
in the report; the features in the NOT IN REPORT list (bottom half) are not. The
features are reported in the order they appear in the list. All operations are multi-
select capable.
To add a feature to the IN REPORT list:
• Select a feature in the NOT IN REPORT list of the FEATURES panel.
• Click the up arrow button located between the lists.
To remove a feature from the IN REPORT list:
• Select a feature in the IN REPORT list of the FEATURES panel.
238

November 2010
• Click the up down button located between the lists.
To reorder the features in the IN REPORT list:
• Select a feature in the IN REPORT list of the FEATURES panel and drag it up or
down the list. Or, select a feature and use the up or down arrow button at the
top of the IN REPORT list.
NOTE: The data contained in the current report automatically updates as features
are added, moved, and deleted in the IN REPORT list.
Standard Report Window Commands

Search: Enter text and to find in the report.
Print Setup: Select the current printer for the report.
Print: Send the report to the current printer.
Page Setup: Adjust the printer page.
Scaling: Adjust the printed scale of the report.
Hand Tool: Use this tool to move the report around the REPORT window.
Zoom: Zoom in or out of the report in the REPORT window.
Next/Previous Page: Use the arrows to move from page to page.
First/Last Page: Use the arrows to move to the first or last page.
Page Display: Use this to see multiple pages in the REPORT window. Click the
button and then drag down and right to select the number of pages.
Page Color: Select a background color for the report page.
Watermark: Add text or a picture to the background of the report page.
E-mailing/Saving a Report
E-mail or Save the report in the following formats: PDF, HTML, MHT, Rich
Text, Excel, CSV, Text, and Graphic (BMP, EMF, WMF, GIF, JPEG, PNG,
TIFF). Not all formats are available for E-mail and Save.
An e-mail message opens using the default e-mail application with the report file
attached. You can edit the message/subject prior to sending.
Printing a Report
Click the PRINT button to access the PRINT dialog and send the active report to a
printer.
239

November 2010
CAD Picture
Click the CAD PICTURE SHOWN button in the toolbar at the bottom of the
REPORT panel to include or exclude a picture of the current CAD view in the
report.
NOTE: If the CAD picture does not automatically update, force an update by
clicking the button off and back on.
Selecting a Report Template

Report templates are listed in a combo box at the bottom of the REPORT panel.
Selecting a report template in the combo box makes it the active template and the
report is updated immediately to reflect the change.
Saving Report Data

You can save the report as a raw XML file. In the bottom right corner of the
REPORT window, click the EXPORT DATA button and enter a filename.
240
November 2010

CAM2 Q Remote offers a web interface to control CAM2 Q, in combination
with the iPhone®, iPod® Touch, or iPad®. The ability to invoke commands
without needing to go back to the computer is essential when you are working at
a distance.
To enable remote control of CAM2 Q and your FARO Laser Tracker or
FaroArm:
• Connect your computer to an existing wireless network, or set up an ad hoc
network on your computer.
• Connect your iPhone, iPod Touch, or iPad to that wireless network.
• Start the CAM2 Q Remote application, and connect to your FARO Laser
Tracker or FaroArm.
Using a Wireless Network

If your computer is already connected to a network that has a wireless router, get
the current Internet Protocol, or IP, address (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn) for the wireless
network, and use CAM2 Q Remote to connect to that network. Continue to
“Setting up the Remote Device” on page 243. In that section, use your current
wireless network name and security key.
Using an Ad Hoc Network

This section details how to setup a computer-to-computer, or ad hoc, network on
your computer running Windows XP, Windows Vista, or Windows 7. Create an
ad hoc network only if you do not have an existing wireless network.
Windows XP
NOTE: Make sure your iPhone, iPod Touch, or iPad has been registered and
working properly prior to CAM2 Q installation.
1 Open the START menu and click CONTROL PANEL.
2 Under PICK A CATEGORY, click NETWORK AND INTERNET CONNECTIONS.
3 Under OR PICK A CONTROL PANEL ICON, click NETWORK CONNECTIONS.
4 Right-click your wireless network connection, and then click PROPERTIES.
5 In the WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTION PROPERTIES dialog box, click the
WIRELESS NETWORKS tab.
241

November 2010
6 On the WIRELESS NETWORKS tab, under PREFERRED NETWORKS, click
ADD.
7 In the WIRELESS NETWORK PROPERTIES dialog box, on the ASSOCIATION
tab, type the name of your ad hoc wireless network in NETWORK NAME (SSID)
box. For example, you could type FARO Remote.
• Clear the THE KEY IS PROVIDED FOR ME AUTOMATICALLY check box and
select the THIS IS A COMPUTER-TO-COMPUTER (AD HOC) NETWORK check
box.
• Create a 13-digit password and type it in both the NETWORK KEY and
CONFIRM NETWORK KEY boxes. For the best security, include letters,
numbers, and punctuation. Then click OK.You will also need to enter this
key into your iPhone, iPod Touch, or iPad later.
8 Click OK again to save your changes.
Windows Vista
1 Open the START menu.
2 Click CONNECT TO.
3 Click SETUP A CONNECTION OR NETWORK.
4 Click SETUP A WIRELESS AD HOC NETWORK and click NEXT.
5 Enter the new network name such as FARO Remote.
6 Enter a Security Key. You will also need to enter this key into your iPhone,
iPod Touch, or iPad later.
7 Check SAVE THIS NETWORK.
Windows 7
1 Open the START menu and click CONTROL PANEL.
2 Click NETWORK AND INTERNET, then click NETWORK AND SHARING
CENTER.
3 Under CHANGE YOUR NETWORKING SETTINGS, click SETUP A NEW
CONNECTION OR NETWORK.
4 Click SETUP A WIRELESS AD HOC (COMPUTER-TO-COMPUTER) NETWORK.
242

November 2010
5 Click NEXT twice.
6 Enter the Network name such as FARO Remote.
7 Select the Security WAP (or WEP) and enter the Security key or password.
You will also need to enter this key into your iPhone, iPod Touch, or iPad later.
8 Select the SAVE THIS NETWORK checkbox.
9 Click TURN ON INTERNET CONNECTION SHARING.
Setting up the Remote Device

This section details the installation of operating system software for the iPhone,
iPod Touch, or iPad and the CAM2 Q Remote application. Before continuing,
you should have already registered your iPhone, iPod Touch, or iPad and created
an iTunes account.
Apple iOS Software

Before you begin, make sure that the iPhone, iPod Touch, or iPad has the latest
operating system software installed. To check this:
1 Connect the iPhone, iPod Touch, or iPad to your PC or Notebook and start
iTunes.
2 In iTunes select the iPhone, iPod Touch, or iPad device on the left side of the
screen. iTunes shows the version of the installed operating system software.
3 Click on the CHECK FOR UPDATE button.
243

November 2010
If there is a new update, iTunes will ask you to install it. Install the update.
Figure 16-1 Apple iTunes

NOTE: CAM2 Q Remote requires iOS 3.1.1 or later and has been fully tested
on iOS 4.
CAM2 Q Remote Application

The CAM2 Q Remote application is a free download from the iTunes store.
1 In iTunes, select the iTunes Store.
2 Search for CAM2 Q Remote and download the application.
3 After the download is complete, select the iPhone, iPod Touch, or iPad device
and click the SYNC button. This copies the CAM2 Q Remote application to
your iPhone, iPod Touch, or iPad.
Setting up the Wi-Fi Connection

This section details how to setup your iPhone, iPod Touch, or iPad in order to
control CAM2 Q via a Wi-Fi network connection. Make sure your computer’s
Wi-Fi connection is active and switch on the iPhone, iPod Touch, or iPad.
244

November 2010
1 On the START screen touch the SETTINGS application.
Figure 16-2 Start Screen

2 On the SETTINGS screen touch WiFi.
Figure 16-3 Settings

3 Active the WiFi by touching the On/Off switch.
4 On the WI-FI NETWORKS screen you should see a list of all available Wi-Fi
networks including the network that you just setup on your computer
(FARO Remote). Touch this network.
5 Enter the Security Key, or Password, from the network that your setup on your
computer (FARO Remote). Please note that this key is case-sensitive (you have
to touch the shift button on the onscreen keyboard EACH TIME before
entering a capital letter).
6 Touch JOIN.
7 Press the HOME key to return to the START screen.
Manually Connecting to the Network

If the network does not appear on WI-FI NETWORKS screen:
1 Touch OTHER.
245

November 2010
2 On the OTHER NETWORK screen, type your network name (FARO Remote).
3 Touch SECURITY and choose WEP. Touch the Other network button to return
to the OTHER NETWORK screen.
4 On the OTHER NETWORK screen, type the Security Key, or Password, from the
network that your setup on your computer (FARO Remote). Please note that
this key is case-sensitive (you have to touch the shift button on the onscreen
keyboard EACH TIME before entering a capital letter).
5 Touch JOIN.
Starting CAM2 Q Remote

Since CAM2 Q Remote will control the CAM2 Q software, make sure that you
have started the CAM2 Q software on your computer and check that at least one
measuring device is connected.
Before starting the CAM2 Q Remote application, you must get the Internet
Protocol, or IP, address for your wireless network connection. You will enter this
twelve digit address (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn) just after starting the CAM2 Q Remote
application.
1 On your computer, open the START menu and click RUN.
2 Type cmd and press OK.
3 Type ipconfig and press ENTER.
4 Look for the Wireless Network Connection section and write down the twelve
digit IP address (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn). Close the command window.
5 On your remote device, Touch CAM2 Q Remote.
6 Enter the twelve digit IP address and touch CONNECT.
7 On the DEVICES screen, touch a measuring device to control remotely.
CAM2 Q Remote Screens

This section describes the CAM2 Q Remote screens. The COMMANDS screen and
the QUICKTOOLS screen are the two main screens. After selecting a command or
QuickTool, the three sections of the MEASUREMENT WINDOW screen shows you
the measurement data.
Commands Screen
The Commands screen contains all of the CAM2 Q measurement commands.
Touch a command to measure.
246
November 2010
Starting a command with CAM2 Q Remote:
• Automatically adds a measurement feature to the CAM2 Q measurement file
• Switches CAM2 Q to MEASUREMENT mode
• Switches CAM2 Q Remote to the MEASUREMENT screen
QuickTools Screen
Touch the QuickTools button at the bottom of the screen to see a list of any
QuickTools in the current measurement file. Touch a QuickTool to measure.
NOTE: This list automatically refreshes if you change to another CAM2 Q
measurement file on your computer.
Measurement Screen
The CAM2 Q MEASUREMENT Window is your control panel during
measurement, providing the current measurement mode, the position of the
probe, the position and form of the feature being measured, and an image of the
part when running a QuickTools program. For more information, see
“Measurement Window” on page 85.
This same information is also now available in the MEASUREMENT screen of
CAM2 Q Remote. Use the buttons on this screen to measure:
• Return to Commands - Touch the button in the upper right corner of the
screen to return to the COMMANDS screen.
• Probe Settings - Touch the button in the upper right corner of the screen to
change the probe/tooling, and the measurement mode.
• Record Measurement - Touch the button in the lower left of the screen to add
a reading to the feature.
• Record End Click - Touch the button in the lower center of the screen to add
an end click to the feature.
• Remove Last Point - Touch the button in the lower right of the screen to
remove the last reading from the feature.
The MEASUREMENT screen has three screen sections. Notice the three dots just
above the three buttons that indicate the current section. Slide the screen to the
left or right to change:
Feature Information (left dot) - This section shows the results for the feature.
QuickTools Picture (center dot) - This section shows any QuickTool images for
the feature.
247

November 2010
Live Digital Readout (right dot) - This section shows a live X,Y,Z location of
the probe.
Operating and Troubleshooting

As you are using the CAM2 Q Remote application to control your CAM2 Q
measurement file, you should be aware of potential issues with the wireless
connection.
Preventing Disconnection
The ad hoc network connection will be disconnected if the iPhone, iPod Touch,
or iPad Auto-Locks. Consider setting the Auto-Lock time to 5 Minutes or Never
to prevent frequent disconnects (SETTINGS > GENERAL > AUTO-LOCK).
If the device loses the ad hoc connection, it will default to the next available
wireless network that is available and configured on the iPhone, iPod Touch, or
iPad.
iPhone, iPod Touch, or iPad Troubleshooting

If you are encountering problems with the Wi-Fi connection this could have
several reasons:
• Is your iPhone, iPod Touch, or iPad already connected to another wireless
network?
• Microsoft Windows does not support a wireless network connection with a
simultaneous ad hoc wireless connection. If you are connected through a Wi-
Fi network use that network to connect to the device and do not create an ad
hoc wireless connection.
or
• On the Wifi Network screen, touch the arrow next to the network name and
then touch FORGET NETWORK.
• Do you have the latest iPhone, iPod Touch, or iPad software installed? Older
versions might have problems with setting up a stable connection to the
computer.
• Have you entered the Security key correctly? Try to enter the Security key
again. Please note that the Security key is case-sensitive and that you have to
click on the shift button of the onscreen keyboard each time before you enter a
capital letter.
• In rare circumstances the iPhone, iPod Touch, or iPad accepts the ad hoc
network but the network cannot be used.
248

November 2010
1 On the START screen, touch SETTINGS.
2 Touch Wifi.
3 Make sure a check mark is visible before your ad hoc network name.
4 Touch the arrow next to your ad hoc network name.
5 The IP address should begin with169.254.xxx.xxx on Windows XP and
192.168.xxx.xxx on Windows Vista and Windows 7.
If there is no IP (blank field), this is why CAM2 Q can't connect. Wait about 60
seconds on that screen and a new IP address will be assigned automatically.
249
November 2010

There are many Hot Keys and Shortcut menus to quickly launch some commands
in CAM2 Q. You can edit or create new Hot Keys. See “Keyboard Tab” on
page 65.
NOTE: Hot Keys function for the active device only. For more information, see
“Device Control Panel” on page 201.
Hot Keys
The following is a list of Hot Keys, or keyboard shortcuts, that you can use to
quickly start some CAM2 Q commands.
Hot Key Function
ARROW KEYS Pans the view in the specified direction.
2,4,6,8 on numeric See “Pan” on page 73.
keypad
F1 Help
F2 Measuring a Point
F3 Measuring a Plane
F4 Measuring a 2D Line
F5 Measuring an Inspect Surface Point
F10 Measuring a Circle
F11 Measuring a Cylinder
F12 Measuring a Sphere
INSERT Add Readings
G Record Measurement
H Record End Click
BACKSPACE Delete the Last Measurement
SHIFT + A Measure All
SHIFT + R Remeasure
ALT + ENTER Measure Properties
251
November 2010
Hot Key Function

PLUS SIGN (+) on Increase Whisker Scale
keyboard
MINUS SIGN (-) on Decrease Whisker Scale
keyboard
4 +X/-X View
5 +Y/-Y View
6 +Z/-Z View
7 Isometric SE
8 Isometric SW
9 Isometric NE
0 Isometric NW
I Zoom In
PLUS SIGN (+) on
numeric keypad
O Zoom Out
MINUS SIGN (-) on
numeric keypad
E Zoom All
W Zoom To Window
7 on numeric keypad Rotate Around X Counterclockwise
9 on numeric keypad Rotate Around X Clockwise
1 on numeric keypad Rotate Around Y Counterclockwise
3 on numeric keypad Rotate Around Y Clockwise
0 on numeric keypad Rotate Around Z Counterclockwise
PERIOD (.) on numeric Rotate Around Z Clockwise
keypad
S Switch between the three shaded and
wireframe views
252
November 2010
Hot Key Function

SHIFT + ALT + ENTER Full Screen
NUMBER SIGN (#) Grid
R Reset View
L Labels
ESC Cancels the Current Measurement
P Device Control Panel
D Show Feature Window
A Create and Edit Alignments
C Coordinate System Wizard
M Move Device
DELETE Delete any selected item
ENTER Repeat Last Command
HOME Reset
T Motor On Off
B Set Backsight
V Drive Beam
CRTL + N New file
CRTL + O Open file
CRTL + S Save file
ALT + F4 Exit CAM2 Q
You can edit or create new Hot Keys. See “Keyboard Tab” on
page 65.
253
November 2010
Shortcut Menus
Right-click in areas of the CAM2 Q window or control panels to quickly access
commands.
Any panel’s title bar

• Floating - Undock a panel from the edge of the screen.
• Dock - Move and attach a floating panel to the edge of the screen.
• Auto Hide - Set the panel to Auto Hide mode.
• Hide - Temporarily hide a panel. Use the VIEW < PANELS command to show
any hidden panel. For more information, see “Panels” on page 66.
Any selected feature in the Features Panel or CAD Window

NOTE: Some menu items are not available for all feature types, or if multiple
features are selected.
• Rename - Edit the feature name. Press the ENTER key to continue.
• Delete - Permanently delete the feature from the file.
• Add Readings - Add readings to the feature with the current device. See “Add
• Add Readings From - Add readings to the feature with any device. See “Add
• Remeasure - Add readings to the feature with any device, and replace all
existing readings. See “Remeasure” on page 130.
• Add Measurement - Create a measured feature and associate the selected
feature as a nominal.
• Clear Readings - Permanently delete all readings from the feature. See
• Aim - Laser Tracker Only, Aim at the feature with the current device. See
“Aim” on page 205.
• Aim With - Laser Tracker Only, Aim at the feature with any device. See
“Aim” on page 205.
• Add CAD Parts - Add a CAD part to the measurement file. See “CAD” on
page 30.
• Show in Feature List - CAD Window Only, Highlights the feature in the
FEATURES panel.
• Assign Datum - Assign a GD&T Datum to the feature. See “Datum” on
page 214.
• Edit GD&T - Opens the GD&T Tolerance panel. See “GD&T Tolerances” on
page 213.
• Label - Show or Hide the feature’s label. See “Labels” on page 94.
254
November 2010
• Flip Vector - Reverses the direction of the feature’s normal vector. See “Flip
Vector” on page 37.
• Properties - Edit the feature. See “Properties” on page 61.
Any selected reading in the Readings panel

• Aim - FARO Laser Tracker only - Automatically point the laser beam to the
X,Y,Z coordinate of the reading.
• Delete - Permanently delete the reading from the file.
For more information, see “Readings” on page 95.
Any Toolbar
• Toolbar list - Show/Hide any toolbar.
• Customize - Create or customize the contents of the toolbars. For more
information, see “Customize” on page 64.
Any Feature Label

• Select All - Select all of the Features in your measurement file.
• Show/Hide Label(s) - Show or hide the labels of the selected features. This
will switch the state of the label.
• Delete - Permanently delete the feature from the file.
• Properties - Edit the properties of a feature. This is not available when
multiple features are selected.
For more information, see “Labels” on page 94.
Any Selected QuickTools Program

• Play - Start playing the contents of a QuickTools program.
• Record - Start recording, or adding to, a QuickTools program.
• Delete - Permanently delete the QuickTools program from the file.
255

November 2010

This chapter describes some glossary terms, definitions, and specifics on
tolerances in CAM2 Q.
GD&T Tolerances
The following are examples of the Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing
(GD&T) for measured circles, which show the Maximum Material Condition
(MMC) and the Regardless of Feature Size (RFS) options. For more information
on GD&T Tolerancing, refer to GEO METRICS III - The Application of
Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing Techniques, by Lowell W. Foster, and
published by Addison-Wesley Publishing Company Inc.
Angularity
0.1
Angularity measures how much a surface, axis, or plane can deviate from an
angle described in the design. This tolerance requires a datum reference, and no
bonus tolerance is permissible.
POSSIBLE AXIS ORIENTATION
0.5
In the figure above, the angularity tolerance is used to control the center axis of
an angled hole. The tolerance zone of 0.5 is indicated by the parallel lines.
This form of angularity tolerance applies only in the drawing view in which the
tolerance is specified, and requires the permissible variation to be defined for
other views.
NOTE: In GD&T, the degree of permissible variation is not specified as a
tolerance on the angle. Instead, an indirect method is used where one specifies
257

November 2010
a tolerance zone at a specified angle from a datum, within which a part feature,
axis, or center plane must lie.
Circularity
0.1
Circularity measures the form deviation of a circle.
Max:
Min:
In this example, the circle is measured with seven points. The Circularity
calculation is the Maximum distance plus the Minimum distance.
NOTE: The result and report values for the circle show the maximum error as a
positive number, and the minimum error as a negative number. These positive
and negative signs indicate the direction of the maximum and minimum error
readings from the circle. The Circularity result value is the absolute distance
between the maximum and minimum error.
258

November 2010
Flatness
0.1
Flatness measures the form deviation of a plane.
Max:
Min:
In this example, the plane is measured with seven points. The Flatness
NOTE: The result and report values for the plane show the maximum error as a
readings from the plane. The Flatness result value is the absolute distance
between the maximum and minimum error.
259

November 2010
Straightness
0.1
Straightness measures the form deviation of an line.
Max:
Min:
In this example, the line is measured with seven points. The Straightness
NOTE: The result and report values for the line show the maximum error as a
readings from the line. This calculation does not add a positive and a negative
number together for a smaller value. The Straightness result value is the
absolute distance between the maximum and minimum error.
260

November 2010
Concentricity
0.2 A
Concentricity measures how well a cylinder (line) fits inside of another cylinder
(line).
0.2 A
0.2 Tolerance
Zone
A
The center line of the measured cylinder is compared to the center line of the
datum cylinder. The center line of the measured cylinder must be inside the
tolerance zone. Concentricity is always RFS (Regardless of Feature Size) for the
diameter of the cylinder; however, the measured length of the cylinder is critical
in the calculation.
261

November 2010
Parallelism
0.2 A
Parallelism measures the condition of a plane that is equal in distance at all points
from the datum plane.
0.2 A
A 0.2 Tolerance
Zone
The measured plane, line, or cylinder is compared to the datum plane, line, or
cylinder. The measured feature must be inside the tolerance zone, and the
measured length of the feature is critical in the calculation.
Perpendicularity
0.2 A
Perpendicularity measures the condition of a plane at a right angle (90 degrees)
to a datum plane.
0.2 A
A 0.2 Tolerance
Zone
262

November 2010
The measured plane, line, or cylinder is compared to the datum plane, line, or
cylinder. The measured feature must be inside the tolerance zone, and the
measured length of the feature is critical in the calculation.
Cylindricity
0.1
Cylindricity measures the form deviation of a cylinder.
Max:
Min:
In this example, the cylinder is measured with 13 points. The Cylindricity

NOTE: The result and report values for the cylinder show the maximum error
as a positive number, and the minimum error as a negative number. These
positive and negative signs indicate the direction of the maximum and
minimum error readings from the cylinder. This calculation does not add a
positive and a negative number together for a smaller value. The Cylindricity
result value is the absolute distance between the maximum and minimum error.
263

November 2010
0.1
Profile of a Surface is a three-dimensional geometric tolerance that controls how
much a surface can deviate from the true profile. It represents the smallest
tolerance zone conforming to the nominal surface contour that will hold the
entire measured surface.
0.8 TOLERANCE ZONE EQUALLY
ACTUAL PROFILE SPACED ABOUT THE TRUE PROFILE,
OR 0.4 EACH SIDE
DATUM PLANE A
In the figure above, the surface profile tolerance of 0.8 is equally spaced on either
side of the true profile. The true profile must be situated between the uniform
boundary of 0.4 (upper and lower) with respect to Datum Plane A.
NOTE: Profile of a Surface is computed as the most positive error value minus
the most negative error value (or zero if no negative errors).
Profile of a Line
0.1
Profile of a Line is a two-dimensional geometric tolerance that controls how
much a polyline, or curve, can deviate from the true profile. It represents the
264

November 2010
smallest tolerance zone conforming to the nominal curve contour that will hold
the entire measured surface.
0.8 TOLERANCE ZONE EQUALLY
ACTUAL PROFILE SPACED ABOUT THE TRUE PROFILE,
OR 0.4 EACH SIDE
DATUM PLANE A
In the figure above, the line profile tolerance of 0.8 is equally spaced on either
side of the true profile. The true profile must be situated between the uniform
boundary of 0.4 (upper and lower) with respect to Datum Plane A.
NOTE: Profile of a Line is computed as the most positive error value minus the
most negative error value (or zero if no negative errors).
Total Runout
0.2 A
Total Runout controls the composite surface variations of circularity, cylindricity,
parallelism, straightness, taper and profile of a surface where applied to features
constructed around a datum axis. Total Runout applies to an entire surface
simultaneously, not just individual circular elements.
0.2 A
DATUM A
In the figure above, the Total Runout tolerance of .2 indicates that the entire
surface must have cylindrical surface variation of less than 0.2 relative to Datum
265
November 2010
A as the part is rotated. The tolerance is applied simultaneously at all circular and
profile measuring positions as the part is rotated through 360°.
RFS and MMC for a Measured Hole

Measured Nominal +Tol. -Tol. Deviation Out of Tol.
X: 0.100 0.000 +0.010 -0.010 0.100 0.090
Y: 0.000 0.000 +0.010 -0.010 0.000 *****
Z: 0.000 0.000 +0.010 -0.010 0.000 *****
Diam: 1.050 1.000 +0.010 -0.010 0.050 0.040
RFS: 0.2001 +0.0203 0.200 0.1805
MMC: 0.2002 +0.0404 0.200 0.1606
Bonus is at its maximum: 0.020

See “Nominals and Tolerances” on page 96.
1 Measured RFS = twice the 2D distance between the Nominal and Measured
points.
2 Measured MMC = twice the 2D distance between the Nominal and Measured
points.
• HOLE: The MMC bonus is the difference between the measured diameter
and the minimum limit, not to exceed total size of the tolerance band. There
is no bonus if the part is smaller than the maximum limit.
• SHAFT: The MMC bonus is the difference between the measured diameter
and the maximum limit, not to exceed total size of the tolerance band. There
is no bonus if the part is larger than the maximum limit.
3 “+Tol” of RFS = Entered by operator.
4 “+Tol” of MMC = “+Tol” of RFS + Bonus.
5 “Out of tolerance” of RFS = Measured RFS minus the RFS tolerance.
6 “Out of tolerance” of MMC = Measured MMC minus the MMC tolerance.
266
November 2010
RFS and MMC for a Measured Shaft

Measured Nominal +Tol. -Tol. Deviation Out of Tol.
X: 0.016 0.000 +0.010 -0.010 0.016 0.006
Y: 0.000 0.000 +0.010 -0.010 0.000 *****
Z: 0.000 0.000 +0.010 -0.010 0.000 *****
Diam: 1.002 1.000 +0.010 -0.010 0.002 *****
RFS: 0.0321 +0.0203 0.032 0.0125
MMC: 0.0322 +0.0204 0.032 0.0046
Bonus = 0.008
See “Nominals and Tolerances” on page 96.
1 Measured RFS = twice the 2D distance between the Nominal and Measured
points.
2 Measured MMC = twice the 2D distance between the Nominal and Measured
points.
• HOLE: The MMC bonus is the difference between the measured diameter
and the minimum limit, not to exceed total size of the tolerance band. There
is no bonus if the part is smaller than the maximum limit.
• SHAFT: The MMC bonus is the difference between the measured diameter
and the maximum limit, not to exceed total size of the tolerance band. There
is no bonus if the part is larger than the maximum limit.
3 “+Tol” of RFS = Entered by operator.
4 “+Tol” of MMC = “+Tol” of RFS + Bonus.
5 “Out of tolerance” of RFS = Measured RFS minus the RFS tolerance.
6 “Out of tolerance” of MMC = Measured MMC minus the MMC tolerance.
267
November 2010
CAM2 Q True Position

ANSI Y 14.5M is very specific in its description of the meaning and usage of true
position tolerance. FARO has incorporated True Position into CAM2 Q with the
intent of matching this specification as close as possible, based upon the amount
and type of data that is made available during a normal measurement session.
True Position is defined as a cylindrical tolerance zone about the nominal center
line, through the thickness of the material into which the hole was drilled (or the
height of the stud). This tolerance requires three datum references that can make
an orthogonal coordinate system. A point-reducible datum is not supported;
however, bonus tolerance is permissible for MMC and LMC. To apply the
concept of True Position to CAM2 Q measurements, one must make some
simplifying assumptions.
1 The datum features specified on the engineering drawing were used in the
coordinate system. For more information, see “Coordinate System Wizard” on
page 179.
2 There are small deviations between the nominal primary datum and the
measured primary datum.
3 Material thickness is much less than the diameter of the feature.
4 Feature centerlines are perpendicular to the primary datum.
Regarding MMC and RFS, CAM2 Q can apply these conditions to features only
and not to the datums. Should engineering data require the application of these
conditions to datums, manual calculations will need to be performed to determine
the True Position. CAM2 Q calculates the True Position of features as follows:
• For measured 2D features, the true position is calculated as twice the distance
between the measured and the nominal as projected to the plane of the
measured feature.
268

November 2010
Nominal
Measured
Circle
X = Distance between measured and nominal in plane of measured
circle.
True Position = 2 * X
Figure 18-1 True Position of a Circle
A more exact definition would be twice the distance between the measured and
the nominal, as projected to the plane of the nominal feature. But, since the plane
of the nominal feature is not generally provided, it is practical to use the plane of
the measured if the aforementioned simplifying assumptions are valid.
• For all other measured point-reducible features, the True Position is calculated
as twice the distance between the measured and the nominal as projected to the
XY Plane.
269

November 2010
Measured
Nominal
XY Plane
X = Distance between measured and nominal in plane of measured

circle.
True Position = 2 * X
Figure 18-2 True Position of a Point
MMC cannot be applied if there is no measured diameter from which to calculate

a bonus tolerance. If the features cannot be measured as circles and do not lie in
the XY plane, then manual calculations will need to be performed to determine
the true position.
270

November 2010
Glossary and Definitions

This section describes the glossary terms and definitions used in this manual.
Best Fit Circle

Max:
Min:
Best Fit Cone
Max:
Min:
271

November 2010
Best Fit Cylinder
Max:
Min:
Best Fit Ellipse

Max:
Min:
272

November 2010
Best Fit Line

Max:
Min:
Best Fit Plane
Max:
Min:
Best Fit Point

Max:
273

November 2010
Best Fit Rectangular Slot

Max:
Min:
Best Fit Round Slot
Max: Min:
274

November 2010
Best Fit Sphere
Max:
Min:
Best Fit Torus
Max:
Min:
Right-Hand Rule
Cartesian coordinates describe the position of points in space relative to three
mutually perpendicular axes X, Y, & Z. The intersection of these axes form the
origin, or zero of the system.
Each axis emanates from the origin according to the right-hand rule. The right-
hand rule defines the positive direction of each axis, such that when the hand is
positioned according to the figure below, the + Z points along the thumb, the + X
275

November 2010
axis points along the index finger, and the + Y axis points along the middle
finger.
NOTE: CAM2 Q does not support left hand rule coordinate systems.
Unsolved Features
A feature that does not have the minimum readings to complete the calculation of
the feature, or a feature that has enough readings and fails the best-fit calculation.
Select
When in a dialog box, click the drop-down arrow and scroll down to select a
feature. You can also click the name of the feature with the LEFT MOUSE
button in the FEATURES panel.
To select a feature from the MAIN Window, move the pointer over the drop-down
list box and click the FROM SCREEN icon that appears. This selects the drop-
down list and you can then click a feature with the LEFT MOUSE button in the
MAIN window. If the drop-down list is already selected, then just click the feature
with the LEFT MOUSE button in the MAIN window.
Select from the List

When in a dialog box, click in the SELECTED CHOICES window.
Select a single feature by clicking the name of the feature with the LEFT
MOUSE button.
Select multiple, consecutive features from the FEATURE window by holding
down the SHIFT key, clicking the first (top) feature in the sequence with the
276

November 2010
LEFT MOUSE button, then clicking the last feature in the sequence with the
LEFT MOUSE button.
Select multiple features in non-consecutive order by holding down the CTRL key
and clicking each feature with the LEFT MOUSE button.
You can also click a feature with the LEFT MOUSE button in the MAIN window,
or the name of the feature with the LEFT MOUSE button in the FEATURES panel.
Select a Feature
feature. You can also click the name of the feature with the LEFT MOUSE
button in the FEATURES panel.
To select a feature from the MAIN Window, move the pointer over the drop-down
down list and you can then click a feature with the LEFT MOUSE button in the
MAIN window. If the drop-down list is already selected, then just click the feature
Select a Plane
plane, or plane reducible, feature. You can also click the name of the plane with
the LEFT MOUSE button in the FEATURES panel.
To select a plane from the MAIN Window, move the pointer over the drop-down
down list and you can then click a plane with the LEFT MOUSE button in the
MAIN window. If the drop-down list is already selected, then just click the plane
Select a Surface
surface. You can also click the name of the surface with the LEFT MOUSE
button in the SURFACES panel.
To select a surface from the MAIN Window, move the pointer over the drop-down
down list and you can then click a surface with the LEFT MOUSE button in the
MAIN window. If the drop-down list is already selected, then just click the
surface with the LEFT MOUSE button in the MAIN window.
277
November 2010
Select a Line
When in a dialog box, click the drop-down arrow and scroll down to select a line,
or line reducible, feature. You can also click the name of the line with the LEFT
MOUSE button in the LINES panel.
To select a line from the MAIN Window, move the pointer over the drop-down
down list and you can then click a line with the LEFT MOUSE button in the
MAIN window. If the drop-down list is already selected, then just click the line
NOTE: Two points can also be used to define a line. You can construct a line
using two points using the Construct Line: By Best Fit command. See “Construct
Line: By Best Fit” on page 151.
Select a Point
point, or point reducible, feature. You can also click the name of the point with
the LEFT MOUSE button in the POINTS panel.
To select a point from the MAIN Window, move the pointer over the drop-down
down list and you can then click a point with the LEFT MOUSE button in the
MAIN window. If the drop-down list is already selected, then just click the point
Select Nominal Points

When choosing points from a CAD model, click any part of the surface,
individual points, surface trim lines, polylines, or splines. When picking a line,
you use the point at which the mouse pointer intersects the line.
Select the Vector

After choosing the points for a feature, an arrow indicates the positive direction
of the vector. Click the LEFT MOUSE button to change the direction of the
vector. Click the RIGHT MOUSE button to accept the constructed nominal
circle.
278

November 2010
Select a Coordinate System

coordinate system. You can also click the name of the coordinate system with the
LEFT MOUSE button in the COORDINATE SYSTEMS panel.
To select a coordinate system from the MAIN Window, move the pointer over the
drop-down list box and click the FROM SCREEN icon that appears. This selects
the drop-down list and you can then click a coordinate system with the LEFT
MOUSE button in the MAIN window. If the drop-down list is already selected,
then just click the coordinate system with the LEFT MOUSE button in the MAIN
window.
Typing values in different units

You can type a value in any unit, and CAM2 Q converts the value to the default
unit value. For example, the default value is 0mm but the diameter is 10inches.
Type 10in and CAM2 Q automatically converts the value to 254 millimeters.
Typing values in different units and coordinate systems

You can type a value in any unit, and CAM2 Q converts the value to the default
unit value. For example, the default value is 0,0,0 mm but your feature is 5,5,10
inches. Type 5in, 5in, 10in and CAM2 Q automatically converts the
value to 127, 127, 254 millimeters.
To change the coordinate system, click the arrow on the right side of the dialog
box and select from the menu. CAM2 Q automatically converts the values to the
current coordinate system during the feature construction.
right-hand rule
Cartesian coordinates describe the position of points in space relative to three
mutually perpendicular axes X, Y, & Z. The intersection of these axes form the
origin, or zero of the system.
Each axis emanates from the origin according to the right-hand rule. The right-
hand rule defines the positive direction of each axis, such that when the hand is
positioned according to the figure below, the + Z points along the thumb, the + X
axis points along the index finger, and the + Y axis points along the middle
finger.
NOTE: CAM2 Q does not support left hand rule coordinate systems.
279
Technical Support
FARO Technologies, Inc. is committed to providing the best technical
support to our customers. Our Service Policy is detailed in Appendix C:
Industrial Products Service Policy of this manual. If you have any
problem using one of our products, please follow these steps before
contacting our Technical Support Team:
• Be sure to read the relevant sections of the documentation to find the
help you need.
• Visit the FARO Customer Care area on the Web at www.faro.com to
search our technical support database. This is available 24 hours a day
7 days a week.
• Document the problem you are experiencing. Be as specific as you
can. The more information you have, the easier the problem will be to
solve.
• If you still cannot resolve your problem, have your device’s Serial
Number available before calling.
Support Hours (Monday through Friday)
North America:
8:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time (EST).
Europe:
8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Central European Standard Time (CET).
Asia:
8:30 a.m. to 5:30 p.m. Singapore Standard Time (SST).
Japan:
9:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Japan Standard Time (JST).
China:
8:30 a.m. to 5:30 p.m. China Standard Time (CST).
India:
9:30 a.m. to 5:30 p.m. India Standard Time (IST).
You can also e-mail or fax any problems or questions 24 hours a day.
281
• Phone
North America:
800 736 2771, +1 407 333 3182 (Worldwide)
Mexico:
866-874-1154
Europe:
+800 3276 7378, +49 7150 9797-400 (Worldwide)
Asia:
1800 511 1360, +65 6511 1350 (Worldwide)
Japan:
+800 6511 1360, +81 561 63 1411 (Worldwide)
China:
+800 6511 1360, +86 21 6191 7600 (Worldwide)
India:
000800 650 1397, +91 11 4167 6330/1 (Worldwide)
• Fax
North America:
+1 407 333 8056
Europe:
+800 3276 1737, +49 7150 9797-9400 (Worldwide)
Asia:
+65 6543 0111
Japan:
+81 561 63 1412
China:
+86 21 6494 8670
India:
+91 11 4167 6332
• E-Mail
North America:
support@faro.com
Europe:
support@faroeurope.com
Asia:
salesap@faro.com
282
Japan:
support_japan@faro.com
China:
chinainfo@faro.com
India:
infoindia@faro.com
E-Mails or Faxes sent outside regular working hours usually are
answered before 12:00 p.m. the next working day. Should our staff be
on other calls, please leave a voice mail message; calls are always
returned within 4 hours. Please remember to leave a detailed description
of your question and your device’s Serial Number. Do not forget to
include your name, fax number, telephone number and extension so we
can reach you promptly.
283
Appendix A: Software License

Agreement
BEFORE INSTALLING, COPYING, DOWNLOADING,
ACCESSING, OR OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU
SHOULD CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND
CONDITIONS. INSTALLING, COPYING, DOWNLOADING,
ACCESSING, OR OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE
INDICATE THAT YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT, AND THAT YOU AGREE
TO BE BOUND BY ALL THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF
YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THEM, DO NOT INSTALL,
COPY, DOWNLOAD, ACCESS, OR OTHERWISE USE THE
SOFTWARE.
FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
This Software License Agreement is a legal agreement between You
(defined below) and FARO Technologies, Inc. (“FARO”). If You do not
agree with these terms: (a) do not install, copy, download, access, or
otherwise use the Software (defined below); and (b) return the
complete, unused Software and all accompanying items (including
written materials) and packaging, within thirty (30) days after purchase,
for a full refund of any amounts paid for the returned Software. By
installing, copying, downloading, accessing, or otherwise using the
Software you represent that you are acting on behalf of your employer
(such employer being hereinafter referred to as “You,” “you” or the
“Licensee”), and are authorized to, and do, accept these terms and
conditions on its behalf.
I. Definitions
1.1 Agreement. “Agreement” shall mean this Software License
Agreement.
1.2 Licensed Software. “Licensed Software” shall mean the
computer software, in machine-readable, object code form only,
owned and distributed by FARO via CD ROM, the Internet, or other
distribution mechanism, including any Upgrades to such Licensed
Software that may be provided by FARO pursuant to this Agreement.
Licensed Software does not include third party software even if it is
included in products supplied by FARO.
A-1
1.3 Licensed Software Materials. “Licensed Software Materials”

shall mean any materials related to the Licensed Software and
provided by FARO hereunder for use in connection with the Licensed
Software.
1.4 Software. “Software” shall mean the Licensed Software and
Licensed Software Materials.
II. License Grant.
2.1 License. Subject to compliance with the terms of this
Agreement, FARO grants, and You accept, a non-exclusive, non-
transferable, limited license to use the Software for internal business
purposes only on a single computer by one user at a time.
2.2 Reservation of Rights. FARO shall retain all right, title,
copyright, trade secrets, patents and other proprietary rights in and to
the Software, and all modifications, enhancements and any derivative
works thereof, regardless of origin. You do not acquire any rights,
express or implied, in the Software or derivative works thereof, other
than those specified in this Agreement, and all rights in and to the
Software that are not expressly granted herein are reserved to FARO.
2.3 Copies. You may make one (1) copy of the Licensed
Software, provided that such copy is used exclusively by You and
solely for archival purposes. Except as set forth in this Section II
(License Grant) You shall not use, print, copy, translate, or display the
Software, in whole or in part. You shall not copy the Licensed
Software Materials without FARO's prior written consent. You shall
include, and shall under no circumstances remove, FARO's and its
licensor's (if any) copyright, trademark, service mark and other
proprietary notices on any complete or partial copies of the Software
in the same form and location as the notice appears in the original.
2.4 Modifications. You shall not, and will not permit others to,
modify, adapt, translate code, reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble or otherwise attempt to create derivative works from the
Licensed Software, otherwise alter the Licensed Software, or discover
its source code.
2.5 Compliance with Applicable Laws. You shall at all times
comply with all foreign, federal, state and local laws, whether in the
form of statutes, regulations, rules, standards, directives, guidelines,
judicial or administrative decisions, or any other federal, state or local
action having the effect of law.
A-2
2.6 Audit Right. FARO shall have the right, upon reasonable
notice during business hours, to audit your use of the Software for
purposes of evaluating your compliance with this Agreement.
2.7 Metering Devices. The Licensed Software may contain
technology-based metering devices and passive restraints to regulate
usage. For example, the Licensed Software may contain a license file
limiting use to the licensed number of concurrent users or named
users or may temporarily restrict usage until license and other fees
have been paid in full. You acknowledge that such passive restraints
and metering devices are a reasonable method to ensure compliance
with the license and have been factored into the license and other fees
and the Agreement as a whole. You agree that you will not
circumvent, override, or otherwise bypass such metering devices and
passive restraints that regulate the use of the Licensed Software.
2.8 Maintenance Package. A separate maintenance package for
the Licensed Software is available for purchase from FARO at a
standard list price (the “Maintenance Package”). If you have selected
and have paid for the Maintenance Package, then the Limited
Warranty under Section 3.1 shall be extended for an extended
warranty period (the “Extended Warranty Period”) which shall expire
upon the expiration of the term of the Maintenance Package or at any
time that You fail to pay any amount due in respect of the
Maintenance Package. In addition, if You have a current Maintenance
Package in good standing at the time of release of any enhancement,
upgrade or modification of the Software (including any new version
of the Licensed Software) (each an “Upgrade”), You shall be entitled
to any such Upgrade without additional charge. If You do not have a
current Maintenance Package in good standing at the time of the
release of an Upgrade, then you acknowledge that you are not entitled
to any such Upgrade.
III. Limited Warranty
3.1 Licensed Software Performance. FARO warrants that, for a
period of thirty (30) days following the delivery of the Licensed
Software to you (the “Standard Warranty Period”), the Licensed
Software, as delivered, will substantially conform to the Licensed
Software Materials provided by FARO to you, when properly used in
the operating environment specified by FARO (the “Limited
Warranty”).
A-3
3.2 Exclusive Remedy. If, during the Warranty Period (or

Extended Warranty Period if You have a Maintenance Package as set
forth in Section 2.8), you notify FARO of any non-compliance with
the Limited Warranty occurring during such period, FARO will, in its
sole option and discretion: (a) use commercially reasonable efforts to
provide the programming services necessary to correct any verifiable
non-compliance in the License Software; or (b) replace any non-
conforming Licensed Software; or (c) terminate this Agreement in
whole or in part, and refund to you the amounts paid for the non-
conforming Licensed Software (provided that during the Extended
Warranty Period the maximum amount subject to refund shall be the
amount paid for the Maintenance Package). FARO does not guarantee
results or represent or warrant that all errors or defects will be
corrected. THE FOREGOING STATES YOUR SOLE AND
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY WITH RESPECT TO NON-
COMPLIANCE WITH THE LIMITED WARRANTY IN THIS
SECTION III (LIMITED WARRANTY).
3.3 Warranty Disclaimer: EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED
WARRANTY CONTAINED IN SECTION 3.1 (AS EXTENDED IN
TIME FOR PURCHASERS OF A MAINTENANCE PACKAGE),
FARO DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES RELATED
TO THE SOFTWARE WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
WRITTEN OR ORAL, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
INTEROPERABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, QUIET ENJOYMENT, OR
THOSE ARISING FROM TRADE USAGE OR COURSE OF
DEALING. FARO DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE
SOFTWARE WILL BE FREE FROM DEFECTS OR THAT USE OF
THE LICENSED SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR
ERROR FREE. WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, FARO
DOES NOT WARRANT THE CORRECTNESS OF TEXT
DISPLAYED BY THE SOFTWARE IN LANGUAGES OTHER
THAN ENGLISH. IT IS YOUR RESPONSIBILITY TO CONFORM
TO FARO'S STATED HARDWARE AND OPERATING SYSTEM
REQUIREMENTS.
A-4
IV. Fees and Payment

4.1 Fees, Invoicing and Payment. You shall pay the fees and
charges for the Software and Maintenance Package if selected within
thirty (30) days after the date of FARO's invoice. All fees and other
charges paid hereunder are non-refundable. All past due amounts
shall bear interest at the lesser of (a) one and one-half percent (1.5%)
per month, or (b) the maximum rate allowed by law.
4.2 Taxes. The fees, charges or expenses under this Agreement
do not include sales, use, property, excise, value-added, service or
other taxes, or any penalties or interest related to such taxes, now or
hereafter levied by any federal, state, local or other taxing authority
relating to (a) any services rendered by FARO, (b) the Software or
their use; (c) the license granted hereunder; or (d) this Agreement
(collectively, “Taxes”). In addition to the payments otherwise due
under this Agreement, you shall pay all Taxes. If FARO is required to
pay Taxes (except Taxes based on FARO's income), FARO shall
invoice You for such Taxes, and you shall pay such invoice in
accordance with Section 4.1 (Fees, Invoicing and Payment). You
agree to indemnify FARO for and hold it harmless against any out of
pocket costs, interest and penalties imposed upon or incurred by
FARO by reason of your failure to perform your obligations under
this Agreement.
V. Term and Termination.
5.1 Termination.
5.1.1By FARO. FARO may terminate this Agreement
immediately upon written notice if You fail to comply with any of
the terms and conditions of this Agreement or failing to pay any
fees or other charges when due. Termination of this Agreement by
FARO shall, among other things, constitute termination of all
licenses granted hereunder.
5.1.2By You. You may terminate this Agreement by prior
written notice to FARO, if FARO fails to perform any material term
or condition of this Agreement, and does not cure such failure
within forty-five (45) days after FARO's receipt of written notice
from You particularly stating the default and your intention to
terminate.
A-5
5.1.3Effect of Termination. Within fifteen (15) days after any

termination of this Agreement, You will furnish to FARO a written
certification that through your best efforts and to the best of your
knowledge, the original and all copies of the Software received
from FARO or made in connection with such license have been
returned to FARO or destroyed. Termination of this Agreement
shall not limit either party from pursuing any other remedies
available to it, nor shall termination relieve your obligation to pay
all fees that have accrued or are otherwise owed by You hereunder.
VI. Limitation Of Remedies And Liability
6.1 Selection and Use of Software. You accept sole
responsibility for 1) the selection of the Software to achieve your
intended results; 2) the installation of the Software (unless installed
by FARO); 3) the use of the Software; 4) the results obtained from
Software and the use of those results; and 5) lost or damaged data and
the adoption of procedures and safeguards (e.g., regular data backups)
to prevent such loss or damage. You also accept sole responsibility for
the selection and use of, and results obtained from, any other
programs, programming, equipment or services used with the
Software. You accept sole responsibility for all loss, claim, liability,
or damage, and related costs and expenses arising directly or
indirectly out of or in any way related to your own fault or negligence.
6.2 CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE WAIVER. IN NO EVENT
SHALL FARO BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT,
CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR PUNITIVE
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY
DAMAGES ASSOCIATED WITH LOSS OF USE,
INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF DATA OR LOSS OF
PROFITS).
6.3 LIMITATION ON DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL
FARO BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF THE
AMOUNTS PAID TO FARO BY YOU IN RESPECT OF THE
SOFTWARE ITEM TO WHICH THE DEFAULT RELATES.
6.4 BASIS OF THE AGREEMENT. THE ABOVE
LIMITATIONS SHALL APPLY TO ANY CLAIMS OR DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF OR IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THIS
AGREEMENT, REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION,
A-6
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF

FARO HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. You acknowledge that FARO has set its prices and
entered into this Agreement in reliance upon the limitations of
damages, waiver of consequential damages and disclaimers of
warranties and damages set forth in this Agreement, and that the same
form an essential basis of the bargain between you and FARO. You
agree that the limitations, exclusions or disclaimers in this Agreement
will survive and apply even if the exclusive remedies in Sections 3.2
(Exclusive Remedy) and 7.1 (Infringement Claims) are found to have
failed of their essential purpose.
VII.Intellectual Property Infringement
7.1 Infringement Claims. FARO agrees to defend you in a
lawsuit or other judicial action, and pay the amount of any adverse
final judgment (or settlement to which FARO consents) from such
lawsuit or judicial action, asserted by any third party against you that
the Software infringe any U.S. patent, copyright or trademark issued
as of the date FARO provided you with the Software (each, a
“Claim”); provided, that you (a) promptly notify FARO in writing of
the Claim; (b) give FARO sole control over the defense and
settlement, if any, of the Claim; (c) provide FARO with full
cooperation and assistance in the defense of the Claim; and (d) fully
comply with FARO's direction to cease any use of the potentially
infringing Software. In addition to the obligations set forth above, if
FARO receives information concerning a Claim, FARO may, at its
expense, but without obligation to do so, undertake further actions
such as: (a) procuring for you such patent, copyright or trademark
right(s) or license(s) as may be necessary to address the Claim; or (b)
replace or modify the Software to make it non-infringing. In the event
FARO is, in FARO's sole discretion, unable to procure the right to
continued use of the allegedly infringing Software or replace or
modify the Software to make it non-infringing as set forth above,
FARO may terminate this Agreement in whole or in part, and the
allegedly infringing Software shall be promptly returned to FARO. In
such event, FARO's sole and maximum liability for such infringement
shall be to refund to you the amount paid to FARO for such infringing
item, less depreciation as calculated on a five-year straight-line basis
commencing with the Effective Date.
A-7
7.2 Limitations. The obligations set forth in this Section VII

(Intellectual Property Infringement) shall not apply, and FARO shall
have no obligations with respect to, any Claim or infringement arising
out of: (a) the use of the Software other than in strict accordance with
this Agreement and any applicable documentation or instructions
supplied by FARO; (b) any alteration, modification or revision of the
Software not performed by FARO; (c) your failure to use or
implement Updates made available without charge by FARO; (d)
your distribution, marketing or use of the Software for the benefit of
third parties; (e) the combination of the Software with materials not
supplied by FARO; or (f) information, materials or specifications
provided by or on behalf of yourself. In the event that FARO is
required to defend a lawsuit or other judicial action pursuant to
Section 7.1 (Infringement Claims) above and such lawsuit or other
judicial action includes allegations with respect to non-FARO
products (including without limitation, third party materials), then
you shall retain, at your sole expense, separate counsel to defend
against such allegations, and agree to reimburse FARO for any and all
attorney's fees and costs incurred by FARO with respect to defending
against such allegations. Moreover, FARO and its suppliers shall have
no liability for any intellectual property infringement claim
(including, without limitation, any Claim) based on your
manufacture, use, sale, offer for sale, information or other disposition
or promotion of the Software after it has received FARO's notice that
you should cease use of such Software due to such claim. You shall
indemnify and defend FARO from and against all damages, costs and
expenses, including reasonable attorneys' fees incurred due to your
continued use of the allegedly infringing Software after FARO
provides such notice. THE PROVISIONS OF THIS SECTION VII
(INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY INFRINGEMENT) STATE FARO'S
ENTIRE LIABILITY AND YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE
REMEDIES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIM OR OTHER
ALLEGATION INVOLVING INFRINGEMENT OR
MISAPPROPRIATION OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY
RIGHTS.
A-8
VIII.Protection And Security of Software

8.1 Confidentiality. You acknowledge that the ideas, methods,
techniques and expressions thereof contained in the Software or
disclosed or delivered through the provision of services hereunder
(collectively, “FARO Confidential Information”) constitute
confidential and proprietary information belonging to FARO, the
unauthorized use or disclosure of which would be damaging to
FARO. You agree to hold the Software and FARO Confidential
Information in strictest confidence, disclosing same only to your
employees (excluding independent contractors) with a need to know
and to use such information only for the purposes authorized by this
Agreement. You are responsible for and agree to take all reasonable
precautions, by instruction, agreement or otherwise, to ensure that
your employees who are required to have access to such information
in order to perform under this Agreement, are informed that the
Software and FARO Confidential Information are confidential
proprietary information belonging to FARO and to ensure that they
make no unauthorized use or disclosure of such information. You may
disclose said materials if you are required to do so pursuant to a
governmental agency or court of law so long as you provide FARO
with written notice of such request prior to such disclosure and
cooperates with FARO to obtain a protective order.
8.2 Disposal. Prior to disposing of any media reflecting or on
which is stored or placed any Software, you shall ensure that such
Software thereon or therein have been erased or otherwise destroyed.
8.3 Equitable Relief. You recognize that no remedy at law for
damages is adequate to fully compensate FARO for the breach of the
covenants in this Section VIII. Therefore, FARO shall be entitled to
temporary injunctive relief against you without the necessity of
proving actual damages. Such injunctive relief shall in no way limit
any other remedies FARO may have as a result of breach by you of
the covenants contained herein.
IX. Miscellaneous.
9.1 Notices. Any notices required or permitted to be given
hereunder by either party to the other shall be given in writing: (1) by
personal delivery; (2) by electronic facsimile with confirmation sent
by United States first class registered or certified mail, postage
prepaid, return receipt requested; (3) by bonded courier or by a
nationally recognized overnight delivery company; or (4) by United
A-9
States first class registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, return

receipt requested. In the case of notice sent to FARO, all such notices
shall be sent to the attention of Customer Service at FARO. Notices
shall be deemed received on the earliest of personal delivery, upon
delivery by electronic facsimile with confirmation from the
transmitting machine that the transmission was completed, one
business day following deposit with a bonded courier or overnight
delivery company, or three business days following deposit in the
U.S. Mail as required herein.
9.2 Entire Agreement/Interpretation. This Agreement together
with the Quotation to which this Agreement is attached and any
applicable provision in any other appendix to such Quotation
constitutes the complete and exclusive statement of the agreement
between FARO and You with respect to the subject matter hereof, and
all previous representations, discussions, and writings are superseded
by this Agreement. With respect to matters relative to Software, this
Agreement shall prevail over any conflicting or inconsistent terms
and conditions which may appear in any other Appendix to the
Quotation. No alteration, amendment, or modification of the terms of
this Agreement shall be valid or effective unless in writing and signed
by You and FARO. If any provision of this Agreement is found to be
invalid or unenforceable by any court, such provision shall be
ineffective only to the extent of such invalidity or unenforceability
without invalidating the remaining provisions hereof. You
acknowledge and agree that you desire to execute and accept this
Agreement electronically in substitution for conventional paper-based
documents. You agree that this Agreement shall be admissible as
between the parties to the same extent and under the same conditions
as other business records originated and maintained in documentary
form.
9.3 Force Majeure. Any delays in, or failure to perform, any
provision of this Agreement (other than for the payment of amounts
due hereunder) caused by acts, omissions, events, causes or
conditions beyond the parties' reasonable control (including, without
limitation, acts of God, third-party nonperformance, failure of or
defects and errors in third party software or hardware, acts of
governmental entities, civil disobedience or insurrection, lock-outs,
freight embargoes, acts of civil or military authorities, terrorists, fires,
floods, wars, or riots) shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement
and shall not give rise to any claim for damages, and the time for
A-10
performance of such provision, if any, shall be deemed to be extended

for a reasonable period of time at least equal to the duration of the
conditions preventing performance.
9.4 Waiver. All waivers under this Agreement shall be in
writing and be identified in such writing as a waiver to this
Agreement in order to be effective. No failure or delay by a party to
exercise any right it may have by reason of the default of the other
party shall operate as a waiver of default or modification of this
Agreement or shall prevent the exercise of any right of the non-
defaulting party under this Agreement.
9.5 Survival. The expiration or termination of this Agreement
for any reason will not release either party from any liabilities or
obligations set forth herein which (a) the parties have expressly stated
will survive such expiration or termination, (b) remain to be
performed, or (c) by their nature would be intended to be applicable
following such expiration or termination.
9.6 Governing Law and Venue. This Agreement shall be
construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Florida. The
parties agree that all actions or proceedings arising in connection with
this Agreement shall be tried and litigated exclusively in the state or
federal (if permitted by law and a party elects to file an action in
federal court) courts located in ___________________. Any action of
any kind brought by you and arising out of or in any way connected
with this Agreement must be commenced within one (1) year of the
date upon which the cause of action accrued.
9.7 Assignment. You may not sublicense, assign or transfer this
Agreement or the Software without prior written consent of FARO.
Any attempt to sublicense, assign or transfer any of the rights, duties
or obligations hereunder without prior written consent of FARO is
null and void.
9.8 Export Restrictions. The Software are licensed for use in the
specific country authorized by FARO. You may not export the
Software to another country without FARO's written permission and
payment of any applicable country specific surcharges. You agree to
comply fully with all relevant export laws and regulations of the
United States and foreign nations in which the Software will be used
(“Export Laws”) to ensure that neither the Software nor any direct
product thereof are (a) exported, directly or indirectly, in violation of
any Export Laws; or (b) are intended to be used for any purposes
A-11
prohibited by the Export Laws. Without limiting the foregoing, you

will not export or re-export the Software: (a) to any country to which
the United States or European Union has embargoed or restricted the
export of goods or services or to any national of any such country,
wherever located, who intends to transmit or transport the Software
back to such country; (b) to any user who you know or have reason to
know will utilize the Software in the design, development or
production of nuclear, chemical or biological weapons; or (c) to any
user who has been prohibited from participating in export transactions
by any federal or national agency of the U.S. government or European
Union.
9.9 U.S. Government Restricted Rights. The Software is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined at 48 CFR 2.101 (October
1995), consisting of “commercial computer software” and
“commercial computer software documentation”, as such terms are
used in 48 CFR 12.212 (September 1995), and is provided to the U.S.
Government only as a commercial end item. Consistent with 48 CFR
12.212 and 48 CFR 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all
U.S. Government End Users acquire the Software with only those
rights set forth herein.
A-12
Appendix B: Purchase Conditions
All Purchase Orders (hereafter, the “Order”) for FARO-provided
products and services (hereafter, the “Product”) are subject to the
following terms and conditions, which are agreed to by the Purchaser.
All capitalized terms are defined in Section 8.00 Definitions hereafter.
1.00Payment of Purchase Price
1.01Purchaser hereby promises to pay to the order of FARO all deferred
portions of the Purchase Price, together with interest on late purchase
price payments payable at 1.5% per month (18% per annum).
1.02The Purchaser grants to FARO a security interest in the products
sold pursuant to the Order, which may be perfected by UCC-1
Financing Statements to be recorded in the applicable County of the
Purchaser’s business location and filed with the Secretary of State’s
Office, which security interest will remain in effect until payment in full
of the purchase price together with interest on late purchase price
payments payable thereon had been received by FARO.
1.03If the Purchaser fails to make full payment of the purchase price
within the period set out in the Order, FARO shall at its option have the
following remedies, which shall be cumulative and not alternative:
a) the right to cancel the Order and enter the Purchaser’s premises to
re-take possession of the Product, in which event the Purchaser agrees
that any down-payment or deposit shall be forfeited to FARO, as
liquidated damages and not as a penalty, and all costs incurred by
FARO in connection with the removal and subsequent transportation
of the Product shall be payable by the Purchaser upon written
demand;
b) the right to enter the Purchaser’s premises and remove any
Software, components of the Product or other items necessary in
order to render the Product inoperative;
c) the right to withhold all services which would otherwise be
required to be provided by FARO pursuant to the Warranties set out in
Section 4.00 Warranties and Limitation of Liability hereof;
d) terminate any existing software license agreement and
B-1
e) pursue any other available remedy, including suing to collect any

remaining balance of the purchase price (i.e., accelerate the payment
of the purchase price causing the entire balance to immediately
become due and payable in full).
f) Customer will be charged a 20% restocking fee for refusal to accept
equipment as delivered. Equipment must be returned unopened within
10 business days of receipt at customer facility.
1.04If Purchaser fails to make payment(s) in accordance with the terms
of this Order, the Purchaser’s Products may be rendered inoperable until
such payment terms are met.
No waiver by FARO of its rights under these conditions shall be deemed
to constitute a waiver of subsequent breaches or defaults by the
Purchaser. In the event more than one Product is being purchased
pursuant to the Order, unless otherwise set forth herein, each payment
received by FARO from Purchaser shall be applied pro rata against the
cost of each product rather than being applied to the purchase price of
any product.
2.00Delivery and Transportation
2.01Delivery dates are estimates and not guarantees, and are based upon
conditions at the time such estimate is given.
2.02FARO shall not be liable for any loss or damage, whether direct,
indirect or consequential, resulting from late delivery of the Product.
The Purchaser’s sole remedy, if the Product is not delivered within 90
days of the estimated delivery date, shall be to cancel the Order and to
recover from FARO without interest or penalty, the amount of the down-
payment or deposit and any other part of the purchase price which has
been paid by the Purchaser. Notwithstanding the foregoing, such right of
cancellation shall not extend to situations where late delivery is
occasioned by causes beyond FARO’s control, including, without
limitation, compliance with any rules, regulations, orders or instructions
of any federal, state, county, municipal or other government or any
department or agency thereof, force majuere, acts or omissions of the
Purchaser, acts of civil or military authorities, embargoes, war or
insurrection, labor interruption through strike or walkout, transportation
delays and other inability resulting from causes beyond FARO’s control
to obtain necessary labor, manufacturing facilities or materials from its
usual sources. Any delays resulting from such causes shall extend
estimated delivery dates by the length of such delay.
B-2
2.03Responsibility for all costs and risks in any way connected with the
storage, transportation and installation of the Product shall be borne
entirely by the Purchaser. If any disagreement arises as to whether or not
damage to the Product was in fact caused in storage, transit or on
installation, the opinion of FARO’s technical advisors, acting
reasonably, shall be conclusive.
3.00Installation and Operator Training
3.01The Purchaser shall be responsible for installation of the Product,
including, without limitation, the preparation of its premises, the
uncrating of the Product and setting up of the Product for operation.
Purchaser may elect to order contract services from FARO to perform
this service should they elect to do so.
4.00Warranties and Limitation of Liability
4.01FARO warrants that (subject to Section 4.06), the Product shall be
free from defects in workmanship or material affecting the fitness of the
Product for its usual purpose under normal conditions of use, service
and maintenance. A complete statement of FARO’s maintenance/
warranty service is set forth in Appendix B: Purchase Conditions.
4.02FARO warrants that the Software shall operate according to
specifications and the System shall operate and perform in the manner
contemplated in connection with the usual purpose for which it is
designed.
4.03The maintenance/warranty set out in paragraphs 4.01 shall expire at
the end of the twelve (12) month period commencing on the date of
shipment from the FARO factory (the “Maintenance/Warranty Period”).
4.04Subject to the limitations contained in Section 4.06, the Warranties
shall apply to any defects found by the Purchaser in the operation of the
Hardware Device and reported to FARO within the Maintenance/
Warranty Period. If the Hardware Device or the Software is found by
FARO, acting reasonably, to be defective, and if the defect is
acknowledged by FARO to be the result of FARO’s faulty material or
workmanship, the Hardware Device will be repaired or adjusted to the
extent found by FARO to be necessary or at the option of FARO,
replaced with a new Hardware Device or parts thereof at no cost to the
Purchaser.
B-3
4.05Claims under the Warranties shall be made by delivering written

notice to FARO of the defect in the System, the Hardware Device.
Within a reasonable time of receipt of such notice, FARO shall have the
System and Hardware Device diagnosed by its service personnel, and
maintenance/warranty service will be provided at no cost to the
Purchaser if the System and Hardware Device is found by FARO to be
defective within the meaning of this Section.
(If, in the reasonable opinion of FARO after diagnosis of the system and
the Hardware Device are not defective, the Purchaser shall pay the cost
of service, which shall be the amount that FARO would otherwise
charge for an evaluation under a non-warranty service evaluation.
4.06The Warranties do not apply to:
a) Any defects in any component of a System where, if in the
reasonable opinion of FARO, the Hardware Device, Software or
System has been improperly stored, installed, operated, or
maintained, or if Purchaser has permitted unauthorized modifications,
additions, adjustments and/or repair to any hard drive structure or
content, or any other part of the System, or which might affect the
System, or defects caused or repairs required as a result of causes
external to FARO workmanship or the materials used by FARO. As
used herein, “unauthorized” means that which has not been approved
and permitted by FARO.
b) The Warranties shall not cover replacement of expendable items,
including, but not limited to, fuses, diskettes, printer paper, printer
ink, printing heads, disk cleaning materials, or similar items.
c) The Warranties shall not cover minor preventive and corrective
maintenance, including, but not limited to, replacement of fuses, disk
drive head cleaning, fan filter cleaning and system clock battery
replacement.
d) Any equipment or its components which was sold or transferred to
any party other than the original Purchaser without the expressed
written consent of FARO.
4.07Factory Repairs
a) IF SYSTEM IS UNDER MAINTANENCE/WARRANTY: The
Purchaser agrees to ship the Product to FARO in the original packing
containers. FARO will return the repaired or replacement Product.
B-4
FARO will incur the expense of the needed part and all return
shipping charges to the Purchaser. FARO may authorize the
manufacturer of a component of the Product to perform the service.
b) IF SYSTEM IS UNDER PREMIUM SERVICE PLAN: When
practical and subject to availability, FARO will make available to the
Purchaser substitute component parts or Hardware Device’s
(“Temporary Replacements”) while corresponding parts of the
Purchaser’s system or Hardware Device are undergoing repair at
FARO’s factory. Shipping charges for these “Temporary
Replacement” parts or Hardware Device’s will be the responsibility of
FARO.
c) IF SYSTEM IS NOT UNDER MAINTANENCE/WARRANTY:
The Purchaser is responsible for the cost of the replacement part or
software, and all shipping charges. All charges shall be estimated and
prepaid prior to commencement of repairs.
4.08Nothing herein contained shall be construed as obligating FARO to
make service, parts, or repairs for any product available after the
expiration of the Maintenance/Warranty Period.
4.09Limitation of Liability
FARO shall not be responsible under any circumstances for special,
incidental or consequential damages, including, but not limited to,
injury to or death of any operator or other person, damage or loss
resulting from inability to use the System, increased operating costs,
loss of production, loss of anticipated profits, damage to property, or
other special, incidental or consequential damages of any nature arising
from any cause whatsoever whether based in contract, tort (including
negligence), or any other theory of law. FARO’s only liability
hereunder, arising from any cause whatsoever, whether based in
contract, tort (including negligence) or any other theory of law, consists
of the obligation to repair or replace defective components in the
System or Hardware Device subject to the limitations set out above in
this section.
This disclaimer of liability for consequential damage extends to any
such special, incidental or consequential damages which may be
suffered by third parties, either caused directly or indirectly resulting
from test results or data produced by the system or any component
thereof and the Purchaser agrees to indemnify and save FARO harmless
from any such claims made by third parties.
B-5
4.10The foregoing shall be FARO’s sole and exclusive liability and the
Purchaser’s sole and exclusive remedy with respect to the system.
THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY OF FARO UNDER THE
WARRANTIES IS STATED HEREIN AND FARO SHALL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT, OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES, WHETHER THE CLAIM IS FOR BREACH OF
WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR OTHERWISE.
OTHER THAN THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES HEREIN STATED,
FARO DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES INCLUDING IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS.
4.11FARO does not authorize any person (whether natural or corporate)
to assume for FARO any liability in connection with or with respect to
the Products. No agent or employee of FARO has any authority to make
any representation or promise on behalf of FARO, except as expressly
set forth herein, or to modify the terms or limitations of the Warranties.
Verbal statements are not binding upon FARO.
4.12The Maintenance/Warranties extend only to the Purchaser and are
transferable, only under the following conditions:
• The Hardware Device is currently under maintenance/warranty.
• New owner is, or becomes, a certified user.
• A FARO maintenance/warranty transfer form is completed, and
submitted to Customer Service.
All claims under the Warranties must originate with the Purchaser, or
any subsequent owner, and the Purchaser will indemnify and save
FARO harmless from any claims for breach of warranty asserted against
FARO by any third party.
4.13Oral representations of FARO or its sales representatives, officers,
employees or agents cannot be relied upon as correctly stating the
representations of FARO in connection with the system. Refer to this
purchase order, any exhibits hereto and any written materials supplied
by FARO for correct representations.
B-6
4.14PURCHASER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT HAS PURCHASED

THE SYSTEM BASED UPON ITS OWN KNOWLEDGE OF THE
USES TO WHICH THE SYSTEM WILL BE PUT. FARO
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY OR LIABILITY
RELATED TO THE FITNESS OF THE SYSTEM FOR ANY
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR ARISING FROM THE INABILITY OF
THE PURCHASER TO USE THE SYSTEM FOR ANY
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
5.00Design Changes
5.01The Hardware Device, the Software and the System are subject to
changes in design, manufacture and programming between the date of
order and the actual delivery date. FARO reserves the right to
implement such changes without the Purchaser’s consent, however,
nothing contained herein shall be construed as obligating FARO to
include such changes in the Hardware Device, Software or System
provided to the Purchaser.
6.00Non-Disclosure
6.01All Software including, without limitation, the Operating System
Program and any FARO special user programs, provided to the
Purchaser as part of the system, either at the time of or subsequent to the
delivery of the Hardware Device, is the intellectual property of FARO.
The Purchaser shall not reproduce or duplicate, disassemble, decompile,
reverse engineer, sell, transfer or assign, in any manner the Software or
permit access to or use thereof by any third party. The Purchaser shall
forthwith execute any further assurances in the form of non-disclosure
or licensing agreements which may reasonably be required by FARO in
connection with the software.
7.00Entire Agreement / Governing Law / Miscellaneous /
Guarantee
7.01These Purchase conditions constitute the entire agreement between
FARO and the Purchaser in respect to the Product. There are no
representations or warranties by FARO, express or implied, except for
those herein contained and these conditions supersede and replace any
prior agreements between FARO and the Purchaser.
7.02No representative of FARO has any authority to modify, alter,
delete or add to any of the terms or conditions hereof. Any such
modifications shall be absolutely void unless made by instrument in
B-7
writing properly executed by an actual authorized employee or agent of

FARO.
7.03The terms and conditions hereof shall be binding upon FARO and
the Purchaser, and shall be construed in accordance with the laws of the
State of Florida, United States of America.
7.04FARO shall be entitled to recover all of its reasonable fees and costs
including, but not limited to, its reasonable attorney’s fees incurred by
FARO in connection with any dispute or litigation arising thereunder or
in connection herewith, including appeals and bankruptcy or creditor
reorganization proceeds.
7.05These conditions shall not be construed more strictly against one
party than another as a result of one party having drafted said
instrument.
8.00Definitions
8.01“FARO” means FARO Technologies, Inc.
8.02“Purchaser” means the party buying the Product and who is legally
obligated hereunder.
8.03“Software” means all computer programs, disk drive directory
organization and content, including the computer media containing such
computer programs and disk drive directory organization and content,
sold pursuant to the Order.
8.04“Product” means the Hardware Device, the Software, operating
manuals and any other product or merchandise sold pursuant to the
Order. If the Purchaser is buying only a Hardware Device, or the
Software, Product will mean the product being purchased by the
Purchaser pursuant to the Order.
8.05“System” means a combination of the Hardware Device, the
Software, the Computer, and optional parts and accessories associated
with the Hardware Device.
8.06“Certified user” means any person who has completed and passed
the written exam issued by FARO. The exam is available upon request.
8.07“Purchase Order” means the original document issued from the
Purchaser to FARO, listing all parts and/or services to be purchased and
the agreed purchase price.
B-8
8.08“Maintenance/Warranty Transfer Form” means a document to be

completed for the transfer of the FARO Maintenance/Warranty. This
document is available from FARO upon request.
B-9
Appendix C: Industrial Products
Service Policy
A one-year maintenance/warranty comes with the purchase of new
FARO manufactured hardware products. Supplemental Service Plans
are also available at additional cost. See Appendix D: Industrial Service
Policy for further details.
FARO Hardware under Maintenance/

Warranty
The following is a summary of what services can be obtained under the
original warranty or Supplemental Service Plan.
1 Factory repairs on FARO-manufactured hardware products.
2 Factory repairs are targeted for completion within 7 (FaroArms) or 14
(Laser Trackers and Laser Scanners) working days of FARO’s receipt
of the defective item. The customer is responsible for returning the
hardware to FARO in the original packing container or custom case.
3 FARO will return the hardware via 2-day air service to the
Continental U.S. Outside the Continental U.S., FARO will return the
hardware to the customs broker via 2-day air service. Expedited
service can be arranged at the customer’s expense.
4 Upon expiration of original warranty a Supplemental Service Plan
may be purchased and can be renewed annually on
FARO-manufactured hardware products.
5 All Supplemental Service Plans will be due for renewal at the end of
the month in which the Service Plan or warranty was purchased, plus
12 months.
6 The original warranty and Supplemental Service Plan are transferable
to subsequent owners under certain conditions:
• The Hardware Device is currently under the original warranty and
Supplemental Service Plan.
• New owner is, or becomes, a certified user.
• A FARO Transfer of Original Warranty or Service Plan Agreement
form is completed and submitted to Customer Service.
C-1
FARO Hardware NOT under Maintenance/

Warranty
Factory assessments and repairs on FARO-manufactured products will
follow the following procedure:
1 The customer obtains a service number from FARO’s Customer
Service Department.
2 The customer sends the part to FARO with the service number on the
label along with payment or a corporate purchase order for system
testing and evaluation, which includes calibration and recertification.
3 The payment will be applied toward the total service cost beyond the
initial payment. The estimated repair cost will be given to the
customer prior to the repair. The total cost must be paid prior to
beginning the service.
4 System testing and evaluation can take up to 30 days. FARO-
manufactured part repairs can take up to 60 days. However, the part
will be scheduled for service as soon as it arrives at FARO’s factory.
5 The customer is responsible for all shipping charges to and from
FARO, including import and export fees for international customers.
FARO Software
All FARO Software users will receive maintenance releases until the
end of life for the version at no charge electronically or at a minimal fee
for the computer media package. All enhancement and functionality
upgrades will be available for purchase upon release.
Hardware & Software Training

FARO’s training program is designed to instruct trainees in the
operation of FARO’s hardware and software, which the customer has
purchased. The training classes are set up for each trainee to obtain
valuable hands on application exposure. This will help the trainees in
their everyday use of the hardware and software. FARO also feels that
once the trainee completes the training, finding solutions to problems or
applying applications will be simpler. Details are as follows:
C-2
1 The training class will prepare attendees to successfully attain an
operators certification (see Certification Requirements section for
more details).
2 The fee schedules for advanced additional training courses can be
obtained from Customer Service, or the Sales department.
Certification Requirements
The Hardware Device operator’s inherent ability to understand 3D
concepts may be in their background training. However, the precision
with which the operator performs 3D measurements with the Hardware
Device is critical in establishing the accuracy and repeatability of the
results of subsequent measurements.
In order to establish the proficiency of Hardware Device operators,
FARO has instituted an Operator Certification program, where each
operator’s knowledge and understanding of the Hardware Device is
evaluated. The successful operator is awarded a certificate which
identifies him/her as an accredited Hardware Device operator. The
requirements are as follows:
1 Attend a FARO-conducted basic training course, either at a FARO
Facility or on site at your facility.
2 Certification will be awarded once the class has been completed, and
then the certified user will be registered for hardware and software
support.
To certify an operator, call FARO’s Training Department, 800.736.0234
(North America), +1 407.333.9911 (Worldwide), for updated
information.
Hardware Device Repair Fee Schedule

(Out of Maintenance/Warranty Owners Only!)
System Testing and Evaluation Fee - Contact your local FARO
Service Center for pricing.
A fee is charged for any system testing and evaluation. This includes
system diagnosis, calibration and/or recertification, and applies to all
Hardware Devices. However, this fee does not include disassembly/
repair costs if required. An estimated cost for disassembly/repair will be
C-3
given to the customer prior to the repair. The disassembly/repair charges

must be paid in full prior to the actual disassembly/repair. However, if
no repairs are needed the fee will be applied to the cost of system testing
and evaluation. All evaluations contain a recertification. Re-certification
will be performed on an “as needed” basis.
Contact your local FARO Service Center for the current system testing
and evaluation fee pricing.
Repair Times
Calibration and/or Recertification Only - Can take up to 14 days to
complete.
Disassembly and Repair - Can take up to 60 days to complete. This
time is dependent on the supply of purchased components.
*Includes Calibration and Recertification
C-4
Transfer of Original Warranty or Service Plan

Agreement
_________________________________________________________
(SELLER’S CORPORATE OR INDIVIDUAL NAME AS APPLICABLE),
hereby waives all rights under the warranty service policy for
Hardware Device Serial Number______________________________
CAM2 Port Lock Number __________________
purchased originally on ______________________(DATE).
_________________________________________________________
(BUYER’S CORPORATE OR INDIVIDUAL NAME AS APPLICABLE),
hereby assumes all rights and obligations of the Hardware and/or Software Warranty
Service Policy from __________________ (DATE OF TRANSFER).
This transfer is only valid under the following conditions.
1 The Hardware Device is currently under maintenance/warranty
2 New owner is, or becomes, a certified user.
3 This maintenance/warranty transfer form is completed and submitted to FARO Customer
Service.
AGREED
________________________________ ________________________________
(PRINT SELLER’S CORPORATE OR (PRINT SELLER’S CORPORATE OR
INDIVIDUAL NAME AS INDIVIDUAL NAME AS
APPLICABLE) APPLICABLE)
BY BY
X_____________________________ X_____________________________
(PRINT NAME OF SIGNATORY) (PRINT NAME OF SIGNATORY)
FARO Technologies Inc.
Approved by x _________________________________
_________________________________
(PRINT NAME OF SIGNATORY)
C-5
Appendix D: Industrial Service Policy

This Service Plan (hereafter, the “Plan”) is part of the Operating Manual
for the FARO manufactured product purchased from FARO
TECHNOLOGIES INC. (hereafter, “FARO”). The Plan and all of the
optional additions, are subject to the conditions in Appendices A, B, &
C, and are subject to change. This appendix refers to FARO’s service
plans as written in the sales advertising literature, and is meant to
provide additional details that the literature does not permit.
1.00The purchase of the Plan shall occur with the purchase of the FARO
products.
1.01The plan shall apply to systems exclusively created or authored by
FARO.
1.02The plan shall include FARO product hardware only, and can not be
extended or transferred through the sale of any part of the system to a
third party unless the entire system has been sold or transferred.
1.03The plan shall not cover Hardware or Software which has been
subjected to misuse or intentional damage. FARO reserves the right to
determine the condition of all returned Hardware and/or Software.
1.04FARO shall determine the service method and contractor to service/
repair all hardware which is not directly manufactured by FARO. All
outside contractor terms and conditions are available from FARO and
are incorporated herein by reference.
1.05FARO shall not be responsible for any non-FARO authored
software which inhibits the operation of the system. Furthermore the
plan will not cover the re-installation of any software.
1.06The Hardware and Software are subject to changes in design,
manufacture, and programming. All updates are as follows:
a) Hardware - The Hardware Device and all of the associated optional
parts, and the Computer are not subject to updates.
b) Software - All computer programs, authored by FARO, which are
used in conjunction with the FARO provided Hardware, will be
updated (maintenance upgrades) for the life of the Purchaser’s current
version. All enhancement and functionality upgrades must be
purchased.
D-1
c) 3rd Party Software - All computer programs not authored by FARO

will not be updated under the Plan. The purchaser is responsible for
the acquisition of all 3rd party software updates and warranty service
or claims.
1.07In the event that FARO replaces any product or replacement
product, FARO retains all right, title, and interest in and to all products
or portions of products that were replaced by FARO.
2.00 Definitions
2.01“FARO” means FARO Technologies, Inc.
2.02“Purchaser” means the party buying the Product and who is legally
obligated hereunder.
2.03“Software” means all computer programs, disk drive directory
organization and content, including the diskettes containing such
computer programs and disk drive directory organization and content,
sold pursuant to the Order.
2.04“Product” means the Hardware Device, the Software, operating
manuals and any other product or merchandise sold pursuant to the
Order. If the Purchaser is buying only a Hardware Device, or the
Software, Product will mean the product being purchased by the
Purchaser pursuant to the Order.
2.05“System” means a combination of the Hardware Device, the
Software, the Computer, and optional parts associated with the
Hardware Device.
2.06“Hardware” means the Hardware Device and all of the associated
optional parts, and the Computer if provided by FARO.
2.07“Software” means all computer programs, authored by FARO,
which are used in conjunction with the FARO provided Hardware.
The following is a layman’s definition of the coverage.
Standard Service Plans

All shipping times below are to destinations within the Continental
United States. Outside the Continental U.S., FARO will ship equipment
directly to the customs broker.
• Standard Service Plans are contracted at time of purchase or at any
time while a unit is covered by a FARO hardware service plan (as
described in more detail later).
D-2
• The Standard Service Plan covers the Hardware Device and controller
box.
• Shipping costs, including insurance from the Purchaser to FARO are
the responsibility of the Purchaser. FARO will be responsible for all
return shipping costs including insurance.
• All reasonable efforts will be made to keep the service repair time
within 7 (FaroArm) or 14 (Laser Tracker and Laser Scanner) working
days. The equipment will be returned via 2-Day air service, therefore,
total service repair time will vary due to return shipping location.
• Since the Hardware Device is designed to be used with many other
software packages not authored by FARO, this service plan can be
purchased in its entirety to cover only FARO produced or authored
products. For items not produced or authored by FARO, the customer
is responsible for securing their own separate warranty or service plan
coverage.
Hardware Coverage
Hardware Device
Covered
• All parts and labor for Hardware Devices failing under normal use as
described in Appendix B.
• Annual calibration and re-certification of the Hardware Device.
Not Covered
• Misuse
• Intentional damage
• Wear and tear of probes, ball bars, auxiliary hardware products such
as cables, wrenches, hex keys, screwdrivers, etc.
Computer
Covered
• FARO contracts with 3rd party service providers for this service for
up to 3 years. The terms and conditions of FARO’s contract with the
provider apply herein and are incorporated herein by reference.
• Typically, these services include repair of the computer, memory
cards, and video monitors.
Not Covered
D-3
• All exclusions contained in the 3rd party service providers policy

which is incorporated herein by reference.
• Software operating system installation.
• User intentional or unintentional removal of key software property or
files.
Software Coverage
Covered
• Periodically, FARO Technologies may release maintenance updates
of its proprietary software. This will be supported through the life of
the product version. All enhancement and functionality upgrades will
be available in the next full version for a fee.
Not Covered
• End users are responsible for the procurement and installation of 3rd
party authored or S/W updates as required to use with FARO authored
software products, unless FARO Technologies resold these packages
to the end user as an authorized reseller. Examples of 3rd party
authored S/W are: DOS, Windows, AutoCAD, AutoSurf, SurfCAM
and others.
Premium Service Plans

The Premium Service Plans additionally provide loaner Hardware
Devices and Computers when service is required. All equipment
shipping costs are paid for by FARO (both ways). FARO will make its
best effort to ship all loaner Hardware Devices within 24 hours of the
receipt of the purchasers request. Once the need for a service has been
verified by FARO, FARO will make its best effort to ship all loaner
computers within 72 hours of the receipt of the purchaser’s request.
D-4
November 2010
Index
Symbols edit 190
export 191
+X/-X view 75 import 31, 195
+Y/-Y view 75 iterative 192
+Z/-Z view 75 menu 189
recalculation 191
Numerics set active 191
status 190
2D line three feature 194
measure 102 toolbar 189
3 plane coordinate system 183 tube measurement 110
3 point coordinate system 184 alignments
3-2-1 coordinate system 181, 183 control panel 67
3D line maximum iterations 53
measure 115 preferences 53
toolbar 63
alignments file location 40
A angle 171
Acrobat Reader by key-in 171
help 23 by selecting features 172
active DRO angle unit 44
control panel 67 angularity 218, 257
active survey 208 arm as a mouse
actual and nominal features in constructions 147 See device-controlled mouse
adding arm as mouse
CAD part 30 user preference 48
nominals arrange labels 77
multiple nominals 98 auto repeat last measurement 48, 50
single nominal 97 automatic
typing 98 construction 147
pictures dimension 171
image creator 231 nominals 98
readings 129 probe compensation 82, 87
adding features to a layer 93 report list generation 58
adding nominals automatic feature recognition 84
automatic 98 auto-save preference 39
dynamic nominals 98
aim
at a feature 205
B
at a reading 96 bars
alignment See toolbars
clear 191 basic service plans 2
coordinate system 191 best fit examples 271
create 190 bore coordinate system 185
delete 191 breakpoints 168
Index - 1
November 2010
tube change
breakpoints 110 adapter in QuickTools 228
buttons the order of features 91
See toolbars to measure mode 52
to measurement mode 52
circle
C best fit example 271
CAD construct 162
creating nominals 141 key in 133
highlighting preference 44 measure 105
measurement preference 51 pick from CAD 142
measuring on CAD side 82 circularity 215, 258
preferences clear
rendering quality 42 alignment 191
show construction lines 42 all readings 37
surface stitching 54 saved CAD view 230
selecting side for measurement 80 command buttons
CAD file location 40 See toolbars
CAD part comment
edit properties 61 QuickTools 228
export to XGL 32 comments 80
insert 30 compensate axis point 122
properties 61, 69 compensation for the probe 82
CAD picture concentricity 218, 261
in report 240 cone
CAD to Part alignment 189 best fit example 271
import 195 construct 168
iterative 192 key-in 135
three feature 194 measure 111
CAD translator 33 pick from CAD 144
CAM2 Q construct
control panels circle 162
coordinate system 8 by best fit 162
help 21 by coaxial intersection 164
installing 4 by offset 164
introduction 1 from cone 164
menus 11 plane intersect 163, 170
screen layout 10 vectors 162
starting 6 cone 168
toolbars 12 by best fit 168
true position 268 coordinate system 179
unit of measure 8 cylinder 166
CAM2 Q remote 241 by best fit 166
center of rotation 20 ellipse 169
certification requirements 3 by best fit 169
Index - 2
November 2010
line 151 See shortcut menus
by axis best fit 152 control panels 66
by best fit 151 active DROview 67
by bisection 152 alignments 67
by intersection of two planes 153 CAD part properties 69
by offset 154 device manager 69
by projection 154 feature creator 18, 66
parallel 155 feature information 20, 68, 96
perpendicular 156 feature properties 67, 69
menu 147 features 66
plane 147 GD&T tolerances 68
bisector 149 manage reset points 69
by 3 points and 3 offsets 148 messages 17, 66
by best fit 148 QuickTools 19, 67
by offset 149 readings 19, 69, 95
parallel tolerances 99
See by offset coordinate system 8
perpendicular 150 advanced tab 181
point 157 alignment 191
best fit 157 basic tab 180
by bisection 157 by key-in 187
by intersection 158 by offset 186
by offset 160 key-in 139
by projection 161 menu 179
midpoint plane/line/line 185
See by bisection plane/line/point 181, 183
move IJK plane/line/point hold secondary 184
See by offset plane/plane/plane 183
rectangular slot 168 point/point/point 184
best fit toolbar 63, 179
rectangular slot types
construct 169 cartesian 9
round slot cylindrical 9
by best fit 169 spherical 9
sphere 165 copy tolerances 38
by best fit 165 creating a layer 92
by offset 165 cross-sections
toolbar 147 See polyline group
torus 167 customize toolbars 64
by best fit 167 cycle shading 77
tube 167 cylinder
from features 167 best fit example 272
using actual and nominal features 147 construct 166
construction key in 133
automatic 147 measure 107
preference 45 pick from CAD 143
construction lines 42 cylindricity 215, 263
context menus
Index - 3
November 2010
D docking panels 16
document header information 59
datum 214 documents file location 40
default DRO options
compensation method 49 preference 46
measure mode 49 dynamic
plane preference 51 nominals 98
delete zoom 74
alignment 191
deleting a layer 93
detailed labels 78 E
device edit
control panel 201
CAD part properties 61
manager 197
clear all readings 37
measurement mode setting 202 features and CAD part 61
menu 197
measured features 80
move 198
menu 37
multiple devices 202
report template 235
position 198 toolbar 37
export and import device position 200
editing a layer 93
moving 199
electronic manual 23
moving device with survey 211 ellipse
save and load setup 200
best fit example 272
record
construct 169
end click 204 key-in 138
measurement 203
measure 114
survey 207
pick from CAD 145
toolbar 197 e-mail
device control
file 34
toolbar 64
report 239
device manager control panel 69 erasing readings 37
preferences 47
exact length
startup preference 47
in GD&T 214
device manager preference exit program 35
use arm as mouse 48
export 31
device positions file location 40
CAD picture to file 33
device-controlled mouse 48 CAD to XGL 32
digital readout (DRO) 86
device position 200
dimension
measurement data 32
angle 171 picture to file 33
by key-in 171
points 31
by selecting features 172
tolerances 33
automatic 171 tube 33
length 173
view to image 78
by key-in 173
from features 174
menu 171 F
toolbar 171
faro hardware
distance intervals 202
not under maintenance/warranty 2
Index - 4
November 2010
under maintenance/warranty 1 feature properties
faro hardware not under maintenance/warranty 2 control panel 69
faro hardware under maintenance/warranty 1 feature recognition 84
FARO Laser Tracker file
See Device CAD
faro software translator 33
under maintenance/warranty 2 export 31
faro software under maintenance/warranty 2 import 30
FaroArm locations 6
See Device menu 29
feature new 29
actual and nominal features in constructions 147 open 29
adding readings 129 preferences 39
alignment 194 alignments 53
CAD highlighting preference 44 device manager control panel 47
control panel 66, 88 unit & decimal place 44
creator control panel 66 save 29
display preference 47 save as 30
editing 61, 80 send 34
grouping 92 toolbar 29
labels 94 file location
layers 92 alignments 40
adding features 93 CAD 40
creating 92 device position 40
deleting 93 documents 40
editing 93 measurement 40
viewing 93 points 40
length in GD&T 214 tube 40
list 88 fit scale 193
naming 90 flatness 216, 259
naming multiple 90 flip vector 37
override length front view 75
in GD&T 214 full screen view 70
properties control panel 67 measurement window 86
readings 71
reordering 91
selecting 89 G
show and hide 91 GD&T
status indicator 90 angularity 218, 257
types defined 21 circularity 215, 258
unsolved 276 concentricity 218, 261
visibility 38 copy tolerances 38, 56
whiskers 71 cylindricity 215, 263
window 70 datum 214
window preference 46 flatness 216, 259
feature comments 80 parallelism 219, 262
feature information paste tolerances 38
control panel 68 perpendicularity 220, 262
feature information panel 20 position 221
Index - 5
November 2010
profile IGES 33
line 217, 264 points 30
surface 217, 264 ProE 33
straightness 216, 260 QuickTools 31
tolerances 213 STEP 33
tolerances control panel 68 tolerances 31
total runout 220, 265 tube 31
using exact feature length 214 VDA 33
geometric data 86 in report list 238
getting started 6 include previously measured features 52
grid 77 industrial service policy 1
group insert
feature 92 CAD part 30
properties 92 inside compensation 82
inspect surface 129
inspect surface point 104
H installing
handheld remote 241 CAM2 Q 4
hardware introduction
training 2 CAM2 Q 1
hardware coverage 3 isometric view
header NE 76
document 59 NW 76
help SE 75
Acrobat Reader 23 SW 76
CAM2 Q 21 iterative alignment 192
hide all labels 78 fit scale 193
hide feature 38 material temperature 194
hide features 91 set weights 193
high point 119 tolerance 53
home in point 116
home in zone 117, 122
measuring points 118
K
zone size 51, 56 key in
hot keys 251 See key-in
keyboard shortcuts 251
key-in 131
I circle 133
icons cone 135
See toolbars coordinate system 139
image cylinder 133
measurement 86 ellipse 138
image creator 231 line 131
adding pictures 231 menu 131
import 30 plane 131
alignment 31 point 132
alignment from file 195 rectangular slot 138
CATIA 33 round slot 137
device position 200 sphere 133
Index - 6
November 2010
torus 134 preference 59
tube 134 low point 119
vector point 132
M
L maintenance/warranty
labels 77 faro hardware 1, 2
arrange 77 faro software 2
detailed 78 manage reset points control panel 69
for features 94 material temperature 194
hide all 78 maximum iterations 53
show all 78 measure
simple 78 2D line 102
smart labeling preferences 46 3D line 115
laser probe measurement 83 add readings 129
Laser Tracker circle 105
See Device compensate axis point 122
survey 207 compensation preference 49
layers 92 cone 111
adding features 93 cylinder 107
creating 92 ellipse 114
deleting 93 high point 119
editing 93 high/low point 119
viewing 93 home in point 116
learn files inspect surface 129
importing 224 inspect surface point 104
length 173 low point 119
by key-in 173 menu 79
from features 174 mode preference 49
override in GD&T 214 on CAD side 51, 80
using exact in GD&T 214 planar point 116
length unit 45 plane 101
licensing 5 point 103
network 5 point cloud 123
updating 5 polyline 124
line polyline group 125
best fit example 273 properties 80
construct 151 rectangular slot 113
key in 131 round slot 112
measure 102, 115 scan mode 86
pick from CAD 141 single point circle 128
profile 217, 264 sphere 106
line/line intersect coordinate system 185 surface point 120, 121
list of features 88 torus 108
load device setup 200 tube 109
locking QuickTools programs 226 vector point 121
logo measure all
file location 59 include previously measured features 52
in report template 236 measure mode 79
Index - 7
November 2010
QuickTools 231 N
measured features
editing 80 naming a feature 90
measurement multiple features 90
automatic feature recognition 84 network licensing 5
geometric data 86 new
image 86 file 29
measure mode preference 52 in this version 23
measurement mode preference 52 nominal and actual features in constructions 147
mode settings 202 nominals
prompt 86 adding to a feature 96
properties clearing 96, 97, 98
comments 80 from CAD
measure on CAD side 82 See pick from CAD
select a plane 81 from keyboard
sound preference 48 See key-in
toolbar 63 not in report list 238
measurement comments 80 not used values
measurement completion mode 49 See set weights
measurement data
export 32
measurement file location 40
O
measurement window 85 offset
preference 46 a circle 164
measuring a coordinate system 186
on CAD side property 82 a line 154
with a laser probe 83 a point
menus on-screen labels 94
alignment 189 open file 29
construct 147 operational concepts 257
coordinate system 179 outside compensation 82
device 197 override length in GD&T 214
dimension 171
edit 37
file 29 P
key-in 131 pan 73
measure 79 down 73
pick from CAD 141 left 73
shortcut 254 right 73
view 63 up 73
messages control panel 66 panels
move features
device 198 layers 92
panels 16 layers 92, 93
moving device position with a survey 211 moving and docking 16
multiple reordering 16
devices 202 See control panels
nominals 98 parallelism 219, 262
paste tolerances 38
Index - 8
November 2010
perpendicular intersection coordinate system 184 surface point 120, 121
perpendicularity 220, 262 vector point 121
pick from CAD 141 points file location 40
circle 142 polyline
cone 144 measure 124
cylinder 143 polyline group
ellipse 145 measure 125
line 141 pop-up menus
menu 141 See shortcut menus
plane 141 position 221
point 142 device 198
rectangular slot 144 export and import device position 200
round slot 144 moving device 199
sphere 143 moving device with survey 211
torus 143 save and load device setup 200
vector point 142 post alignment format 58
picture pre alignment format 59
creating for QuickTools 232 preferences 38
export 33 alignments 53
image creator 231 iterative alignment tolerance 53
planar points maximum iterations 53
measure 116 angle unit 44
plane CAD
best fit example 273 rendering quality 42
construct 147 show construction lines 42
key in 131 surface stitching 54
measure 101 construction 45
pick from CAD 141 decimal place
select in measuring 81 vector 45
plane projection toolbar 63 device manager
plane-lock scanning 82 use arm as mouse 48
point device manager control panel 47
key in 132 display controls
pick from CAD 142 CAD surface highlighting 44
point cloud DRO options 46
measure 123 feature window 46
See Inspect Surface features 47
points measurement window 46
best fit example 273 file 39
construct 157 alignments file location 40
export 31 auto-save 39
high 119 CAD file location 40
home in 116 device position file location 40
import 30 documents file location 40
inspect surface 104 measurement file location 40
low 119 tube file location 40
measure 103 length unit 45
Index - 9
November 2010
measurement surface 217, 264
auto repeat last measurement 48, 50 profiles
auto-switch to measure mode 52 user 60
change to measurement mode 52 projection plane 63, 81
copy GD&T tolerances 56 prompt
default compensation method 49 measurement 86
default plane 51 properties 61
home in zone size 51, 56 group 92
include previously measured features 52 measure 80
measure on CAD side 51 purchase conditions 1
measure/template mode 49
measurement completion mode 49
measurement sound 48 Q
show measurement properties 48 QuickTools 223
use last plane 50 add comment 228
points file location 40 CAD view commands 229
report 58 change adapter 228
automatic report list generation 58 clear saved CAD view 230
default format with alignment 58 command properties 229
default format without alignment 59 control panel 67
logo 59 creating pictures 232
smart labeling 46 deleting programs 227
tolerance 56 editing programs 225
unit import 31
angle 44 importing learn files 224
length 45 locking programs 226
unit & decimal place 44 measure mode 231
premium service plans 4 playing programs 225
preset views 75 preview saved CAD view 230
+X/-X 75 program commands 228
+Y/-Y 75 programs 223
+Z/-Z 75 recording programs 224
isometric NE 76 save CAD view 230
isometric NW 76 template mode 231
isometric SE 75 toolbar 64
isometric SW 76 tools 227
preview saved CAD view 230 view report 227
printing
a report 239
features 97 R
probe compensation 82 readings 95
automatic 82, 87
adding 129
inside 82
aim 96
none 82 change probe 95
outside 82
clearing all 37
sampled end click 82
control panel 69, 95
profile delete 96
line 217, 264
edit probe settings 96
See polyline
removing 95
Index - 10
November 2010
report 96 best fit example 274
viewing 71 construct 169
recalculating an alignment 191 key-in 137
record measure 112
end click 204 pick from CAD 144
measurement 203 runout 220
rectangular slot
best fit example 274
construct 168 S
key-in 138 sampled end click compensation 82
measure 113 save
pick from CAD 144 auto-save preference 39
remote control 241 save as 30
renaming features 90 save CAD view for step 230
rendering quality 42 saving
reordering device setup 200
feature 91 files 29
panels 16 report 239
repeat report data 240
last command 37 scan mode 86
last measurement 48, 50 scanning 86
report screen layout 10
automatic report list generation 58 selecting
CAD picture 240 a plane 81
default format 58, 59 features 21, 89
document information 59 send
email 239 file 34
logo 236 service policy 1
file location preference 59 set
preferences 58 weights 193
printing 239 settings 38
QuickTools 227 setup device 197
readings 96 shaded view 76
report lists 238 shading
saving 239 cycle 77
raw data 240 sheet metal
selecting a template 240 See CAD part properties
template 235 See measuring on the CAD side
user interface 237 shortcut menus 254
reports show
survey results 211 features 91
reset view 76 measurement properties preference 48
right-click menus show all labels 78
See shortcut menus show feature 38
right-hand rule 275 simple labels 78
rotate simultaneous measurement 202
a coordinate system 186 single nominal 97
center of rotation 20 single point circle
round slot measure 128
Index - 11
November 2010
slots template mode 79
best fit example 274 preference 49
construct 168 QuickTools 231
measure 112, 113 three feature alignment 194
smart labeling 46 time intervals 202
software tolerances
training 2 adding and editing 96
software coverage 4 control panel 99
software license agreement 1 copy 38
software training 2 copy preference 56
sphere editing for a feature 99
best fit example 275 export 33
construct 165 GD&T 213
key in 133 import 31
measure 106 iterative alignment 53
pick from CAD 143 operational concepts 257
standard service plans 2 paste 38
standard toolbar 63 preference 56
starting toolbars
CAM2 Q 6 alignment 63, 189
status bar 63 construct 147
status indicator 90 coordinate system 63, 179
straightness 216, 260 customize 64
surface edge point 121 commands tab 64
surface point 120 keyboard tab 65
surface profile 217, 264 options tab 66
surface stitching 54 toolbars tab 64
survey 207 default 12
active survey 208 device 197
moving device position 211 device control 64
performing a survey 210 dimension 171
reporting survey results 211 edit 37
setup 208 file 29
types of survey 208 help 12
system requirements 3 measurement 63
hardware 3 plane projection 63
software 3 QuickTools 64
standard 63
tools
T QuickTools 227
tabs torus 108
commands 64 best fit example 275
customize 64 construct 167
keyboard 65 key in 134
options 66 pick from CAD 143
toolbars 64 total runout 220, 265
technical support 281 training
temperature certification requirements 3
material 194 hardware and software 2
Index - 12
November 2010
transfer of maintenance/warranty service plan control panels 66
agreement 5 alignments 67
translate CAD files 33 device manager 69
tube feature creator 66
alignment 110 feature information 68
construct 167 feature properties 67, 69
export 33 features 66
import 31 GD&T tolerances 68
key-in 134 manage reset points 69
measure 109 messages 66
tube file location 40 QuickTools 67
types of survey 208 readings 69
typing nominals 98 controlling with mouse 20
cycle shading 77
detailed labels 78
U export to image 78
unit of measure feature readings 71
in measurement file 8 feature whiskers 71
preference 44 full screen 70
unsolved feature 276 grid 77
updating your license 5 hide all labels 78
use last plane preference 50 labels 77
user menu 63
preferences 38 pan 73
profiles 60 down 73
left 73
right 73
V up 73
vector preset views 75
+X/-X 75
decimal places 45
+Y/-Y 75
flip 37
in constructed circles 162 +Z/-Z 75
isometric NE 76
vector decimal place
isometric NW 76
preferences 45
vector point 121 isometric SE 75
isometric SW 76
key in 132
reset view 76
measuring points 122
pick from CAD 142 shaded 76
show all labels 78
view
show feature window 70
arrange labels 77
simple labels 78
status bar 63
Index - 13
November 2010
toolbar W
alignments toolbar 63
coordinate system warranty. see also maintenance/warranty
toolbar 63 What is new 23
customize whiskers 71
device control wireframe view 77
toolbar 64 wireless remote 241
measurement toolbar 63
projection plane 63
QuickTools 64
Z
standard toolbar 63 zoom
wireframe 77 all 74
zoom 73 dynamic 74
all 74 in 74
in 74 in - fine 74
in - fine 74 out 74
out 74 out - fine 74
out - fine 74
viewing features on a layer 93
visibility of a feature 38
Index - 14
Hardware Device Version 1.5 FARO Technologies, Inc.

November 2010 250 Technology Park
Lake Mary, FL 32746
800-736-2771 U.S. / +1 407-333-3182 Worldwide
E-Mail: support@faro.com
FARO Europe GmbH & Co. KG

Lingwiesenstrasse 11/2
D-70825 Korntal-Münchingen, Germany
FREECALL +800 3276 7378 / +49 7150/9797-400
FREEFAX +800 3276 1737 / +49 7150/9797-9400
E-Mail: support@faroeurope.com
FARO Singapore Pte. Ltd.

3 Changi South Street 2
#01-01 Xilin Districentre Building B
SINGAPORE 486548
TEL: 1800 511 1360, +65 6511.1350
FAX: +65 6543.0111
E-Mail: salesap@faro.com
FARO Japan Inc.

716 Kumada, Nagakute-Cho
Aichi-Gun, Aichi-Ken
480-1144 JAPAN
TEL: +800 6511 1360, +81 561 63 1411
FAX:+81 561 63 1412
E-Mail: support_japan@faro.com
FARO (Shanghai) Co., Ltd.

Floor 1, Building 29
No. 396 Guilin Road
Shanghai, 200233
CHINA
TEL: +800 6511 1360, +86 21.6191.7600
FAX: +86 21.6494.8670
E-Mail: chinainfo@faro.com
FARO Business Technologies India Pvt. Ltd.

B-1, D-5, Mohan Cooperative
Industrial Estate, Mathura Road
New Delhi - 110 044
INDIA
TEL: 000800 650 1397, +91 11.4167.6330/1
FAX: +91 11.4167.6332
E-Mail: infoindia@faro.com

CAM2 Q Users Manual Version 1.5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

CAM2 Q Users Manual Version 1.5

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CAM2 Q Users Manual Version 1.5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

08M53E00_CAM2_Q.

book Page 1 Wednesday, January 12, 2011 9:38 AM

©FARO Technologies Inc., 2008-2010. All rights reserved.

FARO Technologies Inc. Internal Control File Locations:

Chapter 2: File Menu

Chapter 3: Edit Menu

Chapter 4: View Menu

Wireframe View ............................................................. 77

Chapter 5: Measure Menu

Measuring an Ellipse.................................................... 114

Chapter 6: Key-In Menu

Chapter 7: Pick From CAD Menu

Chapter 8: Construct Menu

Construct Circle........................................................... 162

Chapter 9: Dimension Menu

Chapter 10: Coordinate Systems Menu

Chapter 11: Alignments Menu

Chapter 12: Device Menu

Chapter 13: GD&T Tolerances

Chapter 14: QuickTools

Chapter 15: Reporting

User Interface............................................................... 237

Chapter 16: CAM2® Q Remote

Chapter 17: Hot Keys and Shortcut Menus

Chapter 18: Operational Concepts

Glossary and Definitions.............................................. 271

Software License Agreement ............... A-1

Chapter 1: Introduction to CAM2® Q

CAM2® Q Version 1.5

CAM2® Q Version 1.5

CAM2® Q Version 1.5

• Microsoft® Internet Explorer 8.0

CAM2® Q Version 1.5

Updating Your License

Directory and File Locations

Figure 1-1 CAM2 Q Program Icon

Figure 1-2 Device Control panel

Unit of Measure and Coordinate System

Figure 1-3 Units menu

CAM2® Q Version 1.5

Figure 1-4 Coordinate Systems menu

Figure 1-5 CAM2 Q Screen Layout

Figure 1-6 Pull-down Menu

Figure 1-8 Standard Toolbar

Figure 1-9 Alignments Toolbar

Coordinate Systems Toolbar

Figure 1-10 Coordinate Systems Toolbar

Figure 1-11 Measurement Toolbar

Figure 1-12 Projection Planes Toolbar

Device Control Toolbar

Figure 1-13 Device Control Toolbar

Figure 1-14 QuickTools Toolbar

Moving and Docking Control Panels

Moving a Control Panel

Reordering Control Panel Tabs

Figure 1-15 Messages panel

Figure 1-16 Features panel

Figure 1-17 Feature Creator panel

Figure 1-18 QuickTools panel